2021-Nissan-Sentra-Owner-Manual.Pdf

2021 SENTRA

OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you un- cerning proper use of such accessories Before driving your vehicle, please read this derstand the operation and maintenance prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac- Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many cessory. It is recommended that you visit a familiarity with controls and maintenance miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. NISSAN dealer for details concerning the requirements assisting you in the safe op- Please read through this manual before particular accessories with which your ve- eration of your vehicle. operating your vehicle. hicle is equipped. A separate Warranty Information Book- WARNING let explains details about the warranties IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance REMINDERS! and schedules” section of this manual Follow these important driving rules to explains details about maintaining and help ensure a safe and comfortable trip servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a for you and your passengers! separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re- • NEVER drive under the influence of solve any concerns you may have with alcohol or drugs. your vehicle, and clarify your rights un- • ALWAYS observe posted speed limits der your state's lemon law. and never drive too fast for conditions. When you require any service or have any • ALWAYS give your full attention to questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to driving and avoid using vehicle fea- assist you with the extensive resources tures or taking other actions that available to them. could distract you. • ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap- In addition to factory-installed options, propriate child restraint systems. your vehicle may also be equipped with Preteen children should be seated in additional accessories installed prior to de- the rear seat. livery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the • ALWAYS provide information about particular accessories with which your ve- the proper use of vehicle safety fea- hicle is equipped. It is important that you tures to all occupants of the vehicle. familiarize yourself with all disclosures, • ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual warnings, cautions and instructions con- for important safety information. WHEN READING THE MANUAL

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This manual includes information for all refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO- features and equipment available on this GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual. This vehicle should not be modified. model. Features and equipment in your ve- Modification could affect its perfor- hicle may vary depending on model, trim IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT mance, safety, emissions or durability level, options selected, order, date of pro- THIS MANUAL and may even violate governmental duction, region or availability. Therefore, You will see various symbols in this manual. regulations. In addition, damage or per- you may find information about features or They are used in the following ways: formance problems resulting from equipment that are not included or in- modifications may not be covered un- stalled on your vehicle. WARNING der NISSAN warranties. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at This is used to indicate the presence of WARNING the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the a hazard that could cause death or se- right to change specifications, perfor- rious personal injury. To avoid or re- Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di- mance, design or component suppliers duce the risk, the procedures must be agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses without notice and without obligation. followed precisely. the port during normal driving, for ex- From time to time, NISSAN may update or ample remote insurance company revise this manual to provide Owners with CAUTION monitoring, remote vehicle diagnos- the most accurate information currently tics, telematics or engine reprogram- available. Please carefully read and retain This is used to indicate the presence of ming, may cause interference or dam- with this manual all revision updates sent a hazard that could cause minor or age to vehicle systems. We do not to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac- moderate personal injury or damage to recommend or endorse the use of any cess to accurate and up-to-date informa- your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un- tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver- the procedures must be followed less specifically approved by NISSAN. sions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any carefully. The vehicle warranty may not cover updates can also be found in the Owner damage caused by any aftermarket section of the NISSAN website at https:// plug-in device. owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Per- chlorate Material – special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/”. BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. APD1005 and licensed to If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do Panasonic. this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. © Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's these indicate movement or action. Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me- Arrows in an illustration that are similar to chanical, photocopying, recording or oth- these call attention to an item in the erwise, without the prior written permis- illustration. sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V. NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa- NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion at: you would like to provide NISSAN directly – Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. customers with comments or questions, please con- number Nissan North America, Inc. tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- – Vehicle identification number (attached Consumer Affairs Department ment using our toll-free number: to the top of the instrument panel on the P.O. Box 685003 For U.S. customers driver's side) Franklin, TN 37068-5003 1-800-NISSAN-1 – Date of purchase or via e-mail at: (1-800-647-7261) – Current odometer reading [email protected] For Canadian customers – Your NISSAN dealer's name For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 – Your comments or questions Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive OR Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: [email protected] If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. Table of Illustrated table of contents 0 contents Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Do-it-yourself 8

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

Index 11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ...... 0-2 Instrument panel...... 0-6 Exterior front ...... 0-3 Engine compartment check locations...... 0-7 Exterior rear ...... 0-4 Warning/Indicator lights ...... 0-8 Passenger compartment ...... 0-5 AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

6. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P. 1-43) 7. Front seats (P. 1-2) 8. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) (P. 1-43) 9. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) 10. Rear seats (P. 1-2) 11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P. 1-22) 12. Rear outboard seat belts with pretensioner(s) (P. 1-43) 13. Rear outboard seat-mounted side impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LIC4601 1. Top tether anchors (P. 1-22) 4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-10) 2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-11) 5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-11, 1-43) supplemental rollover air bag (P. 1-43) 0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT

7. Tire pressure (P. 8-28) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-35) 8. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-50) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24) LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (if so equipped) (P. 2-54) 9. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-56) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2635 1. Engine hood (P. 3-21) 5. Doors (P. 3-4) 2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-48) NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-7) 3. Windshield (P. 8-17) Keys (P. 3-2) 4. Power windows (P. 2-66) 6. Mirrors (P. 3-28) Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR

7. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-23) Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-23) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-4) 8. Rear sonar sensors (P. 5-136) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2636 1. Rearview camera (P. 4-8) 4. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24) 2. Trunk lid (P. 3-22) 5. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-49) Trunk lid release (P. 3-22) 6. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-7) 3. High-mounted stop light (P. 8-24) 0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

9. Console box (P. 2-64) 10. Rear armrest (if so equipped) (P. 1-6) Cup holders (if so equipped) (P. 2-65) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2637 1. Interior lights (P. 2-71) 5. Rearview mirror (P. 3-28) 2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-69) 6. Glove box (P. 2-62) 3. Interior lights (P. 2-71) 7. Cup holders (P. 2-62) 4. Sun visors (P. 3-26) 8. Parking brake (if so equipped) (P. 5-24) Illustrated table of contents 0-5 INSTRUMENT PANEL

5. Cruise control switches (P. 5-61) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-63) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P. 4-65) 6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-48) 7. Vents (P. 4-30) 8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-43) 10. Audio system (P. 4-43) 11. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) 12. Glove box (P. 2-64) 13. Front passenger supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-43) 14. Shift lever (P. 5-18) 15. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-11) 16. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-38) 17. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-43) 18. Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-26) 19. Hood release (P. 3-21) 20. Fuel filler door release (P. 3-23) 21. ECO mode switch (P. 5-26) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-50) LII2638 Trunk release (P. 3-22) Trip reset switch (P. 2-4) 1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/ 3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) Horn (P. 2-56) For additional information, refer to the turn signal switch (P. 2-50) separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. 2. Steering wheel switch (P. 2-16) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) Audio controls (P. 4-43) Warning and indicators lights (P. 2-7) Refer to the page number indicated in Vehicle information display (P. 2-16) parentheses for operating details. 0-6 Illustrated table of contents ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-16) 6. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6) 7. Drive belt location (P. 8-14) 8. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-11) 9. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI3477 2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model) 2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid 1. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6) reservoir (P. 8-10) 3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-19) 4. Battery (P. 8-12) Illustrated table of contents 0-7 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Indicator Indicator Indicator light (red) light (red) light (yellow) Brake warning 2-8 Seat belt warning 2-10 light light and chime Automatic Emer- 2-11 or gency Braking with Pedestrian Supplemental air 2-10 Detection system bag warning light warning light

Front passenger 2-11 Charge warning 2-9 air bag status light Warning/ Name Page light Indicator light Engine oil pres- 2-9 (yellow) Low tire pressure 2-11 sure warning light warning light Anti-lock Braking 2-11 System (ABS) Malfunction Indi- 2-9 or warning light Master warning 2-10 cator Light (MIL) light

Master warning 2-10 Power steering 2-13 light warning light

0-8 Illustrated table of contents Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Warning/ Name Page Indicator Indicator Indicator light light light (yellow) (other) (other)

Rear Automatic 2-14 ECO mode indica- 2-15 High beam indi- 2-15 Braking OFF tor light (green) cator light (blue) warning light

Slip indicator light 2-14 Front fog light in- 2-14 Side light and 2-15 dicator light (if so headlight indica- equipped) (green) tor light (green) Vehicle Dynamic 2-14 High Beam Assist 2-15 Turn signal/ 2-15 Control (VDC) OFF hazard indicator indicator light indicator light (green) lights (green)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9 MEMO

0-10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats...... 1-2 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-19 Front manual seat adjustment Child safety ...... 1-20 (for passenger's seat and if so Infants ...... 1-20 equipped for driver's seat) ...... 1-3 Small children ...... 1-21 Front power seat adjustment Larger children ...... 1-21 (if so equipped for driver's seat) ...... 1-4 Child restraints ...... 1-22 Folding rear seat ...... 1-6 Precautions on child restraints ...... 1-22 Center armrest (if so equipped) ...... 1-6 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Head restraints/headrests ...... 1-7 CHildren) system ...... 1-24 Adjustable head restraint/headrest Rear-facing child restraint installation components ...... 1-8 using LATCH ...... 1-27 Non-adjustable head restraint/ Rear-facing child restraint installation headrest components ...... 1-8 using the seat belts ...... 1-29 Remove...... 1-8 Forward-facing child restraint Install ...... 1-9 installation using LATCH ...... 1-32 Adjust ...... 1-9 Forward-facing child restraint Seatbelts...... 1-11 installation using the seat belts ...... 1-35 Precautions on seat belt usage...... 1-11 Booster seats ...... 1-40 Seat belt warning light and chime ...... 1-14 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...... 1-43 Pregnant women ...... 1-14 Precautions on SRS ...... 1-43 Injured persons ...... 1-15 Supplemental air bag warning labels ...... 1-64 Three-point type seat belt with Supplemental air bag warning light ...... 1-65 retractor...... 1-15 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-19 SEATS

• Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. • To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly be- ARS1152 come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people WARNING • For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the and pets. • Do not ride in a moving vehicle when seat should be upright. Always sit • Do not adjust the driver’s seat while the seatback is reclined. This can be well back and upright in the seat with driving so full attention may be given dangerous. The shoulder belt will not both feet on the floor and adjust the to vehicle operation. The seat may be against your body. In an accident, seat properly. For additional infor- move suddenly and could cause loss you could be thrown into it and re- mation, see “Precautions on seat belt of control of the vehicle. ceive neck or other serious injuries. usage” (P. 1-11). • The seatback should not be reclined You could also slide under the lap belt • After adjustment, gently rock in the any more than needed for comfort. and receive serious internal injuries. seat to make sure it is securely Seat belts are most effective when locked. the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased. 1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage. FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for passenger's seat and if so equipped for driver's seat) Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section. LRS3245 LRS3246 Forward and backward Reclining Pull the center of the bar up and hold it To recline the seatback, pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or back- and lean back. To bring the seatback forward to the desired position. Release the ward, pull the lever up and lean your body bar to lock the seat in position. forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1-11). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever (CVT) is in P (Park) or the manual shift lever is in N (Neu- tral) with the parking brake applied. Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 LRS3251 LRS2662 Seat lifter (driver's seat) FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to (if so equipped for driver's seat) Moving the switch as shown will slide the adjust the seat height until the desired po- seat forward or backward to the desired sition is achieved. Operating tips position. • The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor Reclining stops during operation, wait 30 seconds Move the recline switch as shown until the then reactivate the switch. desired angle is obtained. • Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is The reclining feature allows adjustment of off. This will discharge the battery. the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1-11). Also, the seatback can be reclined to 1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied.

LRS2784 LRS2745 Seat lifter Lumbar support Move the switch as shown to adjust the The lumbar support feature provides ad- height of the seat cushion. justable lower back support to the driver. Push the switch as shown to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 • Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. • When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. • Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them LRS3247 LRS3267 from playing and becoming locked in FOLDING REAR SEAT the trunk where they could be seri- CENTER ARMREST (if so equipped) ously injured. Keep the car locked, Pull the knob OA to fold each seatback Pull the armrest down as shown. down. with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and WARNING prevent children's access to car keys. • Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING • Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) Head restraints/headrests supplement to lock them in a desired adjustment the other vehicle safety systems. They position. may provide additional protection • The non-adjustable head restraints/ against injury in certain rear end colli- headrests have a single locking notch to sions. Adjustable head restraints/ secure them to the seat frame. headrests must be adjusted properly, • Proper Adjustment: as specified in this section. Check the – For the adjustable type, align the head adjustment after someone else uses restraint/headrest so the center of the seat. Do not attach anything to the your ear is approximately level with the head restraint/headrest stalks or re- center of the head restraint/headrest. move the head restraint/headrest. Do – If your ear position is still higher than not use the seat if the head restraint/ the recommended alignment, place headrest has been removed. If the head LRS2403 the head restraint/headrest at the restraint/headrest was removed, rein- The illustration shows the seating positions highest position. stall and properly adjust the head equipped with head restraints/headrests. • If the head restraint/headrest has been restraint/headrest before an occupant removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and uses the seating position. Failure to fol- ᭡ Indicates the seating position is locked in place before riding in that des- low these instructions can reduce the equipped with a head restraint. ignated seating position. effectiveness of the head restraints/ ࡯ Indicates the seating position is headrests. This may increase the risk of equipped with a headrest. serious injury or death in a collision. + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable). • Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 LRS2300 LRS2299 LRS2302 ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD REMOVE HEADREST COMPONENTS RESTRAINT/HEADREST Use the following procedure to remove the 1. Removable head restraint/headrest COMPONENTS head restraint/headrest: 2. Multiple notches 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position. 3. Lock knob 2. Single notch 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 4. Stalks 3. Lock knob 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest 4. Stalks from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 INSTALL ADJUST 1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks For adjustable head restraint/headrest with the holes in the seat. Make sure that Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the the head restraint/headrest is facing the center is level with the center of your ears. If correct direction. The stalk with the your ear position is still higher than the notch (notches) O1 must be installed in recommended alignment, place the head the hole with the lock knob O2 . restraint/headrest at the highest position. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306 For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest Raise Lower Make sure the head restraint/headrest is To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it To lower, push and hold the lock knob and positioned so the lock knob is engaged in up. push the head restraint/headrest down. the notch before riding in that designated Make sure the head restraint/headrest is Make sure the head restraint/headrest is seating position. positioned so the lock knob is engaged in positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated the notch before riding in that designated seating position. seating position.

1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SEAT BELTS

SSS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces USAGE or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being If you are wearing your seat belt properly driven. adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING WARNING • Every person who drives or rides in • The seat belt should be properly ad- this vehicle should use a seat belt at justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so all times. Children should be in the may reduce the effectiveness of the rear seats and in an appropriate entire restraint system and increase restraint. the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system • Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- • Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have curely fastened to the proper buckle. activated, they cannot be reused and • Do not wear the seat belt inside out must be replaced together with the or twisted. Doing so may reduce its retractor. It is recommended that you effectiveness. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • Do not allow more than one person • All seat belt assemblies, including re- to use the same seat belt. tractors and attaching hardware, • Never carry more people in the ve- should be inspected after any colli- hicle than there are seat belts. sion. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • If the seat belt warning light glows NISSAN recommends that all seat continuously while the ignition is belt assemblies in use during a colli- turned ON with all doors closed and sion be replaced unless the collision all seat belts fastened, it may indi- was minor and the belts show no SSS0014 cate a malfunction in the system. damage and continue to operate Have the system checked. It is rec- properly. Seat belt assemblies not in WARNING ommended that you visit a NISSAN use during a collision should also be dealer for this service. • Always route the shoulder belt over inspected and replaced if either your shoulder and across your chest. • No changes should be made to the damage or improper operation is Never put the belt behind your back, seat belt system. For example, do not noted. under your arm or across your neck. modify the seat belt, add material, or • All child restraints and attaching The belt should be away from your install devices that may change the hardware should be inspected after face and neck, but not falling off your seat belt routing or tension. Doing so any collision. Always follow the re- shoulder. may affect the operation of the seat straint manufacturer's inspection in- belt system. Modifying or tampering • Position the lap belt as low and snug structions and replacement recom- with the seat belt system may result as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT mendations. The child restraints in serious personal injury. THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high should be replaced if they are could increase the risk of internal in- damaged. juries in an accident.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 • The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas- • An object placed under the front passen- tened and the seat is occupied by a pas- ger seat. senger for 7 seconds after the ignition • An object placed between the seat cush- switch is placed in the ON position. ion and center console or between the • The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas- seat cushion and the door. tened and objects or external force on • An object hanging on the seat or placed the passenger seat change the seat belt in the seatback pocket. reminder classification to Occupied. • A child restraint or other object pressing The seat belt warning light will flash under against the rear of the seatback. the conditions shown above until the necessary seat belt is securely fastened. NOTE: A warning chime will sound for approxi- The rear seats are equipped with a seat mately 90 seconds or until one of the fol- belt warning message in the vehicle in- LRS0786 lowing conditions is met: formation display. SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND • The unbuckled front occupant’s seat belt For additional information, see “Vehicle infor- is securely fastened. mation display 4.2 inch (11 cm) TYPE A” (P.2-16) CHIME • The seat belt reminder function in the or “Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) The driver and front passenger seat is front passenger seat no longer detects TYPE B” (P. 2-30). equipped with an enhanced seat belt re- that the front passenger seat is occupied. PREGNANT WOMEN minder function. If your vehicle is equipped • The ignition is turned off or the vehicle is with an enhanced seat belt reminder func- placed in P (Park). NISSAN recommends that pregnant tion, a visual and audible alert will operate if women use seat belts. The seat belt should a driver or front passenger seat belt is un- The below situations could result in the be worn snug and always position the lap buckled at speeds of approximately 9 mph seat belt reminder light being illuminated belt as low as possible around the hips, not (15 km/h) or more under the following con- and the chime sounding, even with no oc- the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your ditions: cupant present in the passenger seat: shoulder and across your chest. Never run • If the driver seat belt is not fastened. • Heavy objects placed on the seat. the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal • Someone pushing or pulling on the front area. Contact your doctor for specific passenger seat. recommendations.

1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system INJURED PERSONS • Do not allow children to play with the NISSAN recommends that injured persons seat belts. Most seating positions are use seat belts. Check with your doctor for equipped with Automatic Locking specific recommendations. Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT around a child’s neck with the ALR WITH RETRACTOR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt WARNING retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. • Every person who drives or rides in Unbuckle the seat belt to release the this vehicle should use a seat belt at child. If the seat belt cannot be un- all times. buckled or is already unbuckled, re- • Do not ride in a moving vehicle when lease the child by cutting the seat the seatback is reclined. This can be belt with a suitable tool (such as a LRS3245 dangerous. The shoulder belt will not knife or scissors) to release the seat Manual front seat shown be against your body. In an accident, belt. (if so equipped) you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. Fastening the seat belts You could also slide under the lap belt 1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa- and receive serious internal injuries. tion, see “Seats” (P. 1-2). • For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 LRS2662 LRS2674 Power front seat shown (if so equipped) 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle OA until you hear and feel the latch engage. • The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. • If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. 1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- WARNING tend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement When fastening the seat belts, be cer- in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt tain that the seatbacks are completely when the vehicle slows down rapidly or secured in the latched position. If they during certain impacts. are not completely secured, passen- The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks gers may be injured in an accident or the seat belt for child restraint installation. sudden stop. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt LRS2675 fully retracts. For additional information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-22). 3. Position the lap belt portion low and The ALR mode should be used only for snug on the hips OB as shown. child restraint installation. During nor- 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR retractor to take up extra slack OC .Be mode should not be activated. If it is ac- sure the shoulder belt is routed over tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat your shoulder and across your chest. belt tension. It can also change the op- The front passenger seat and the rear eration of the front passenger air bag. seating positions’ three-point seat belts For additional information, see “Front have two modes of operation: passenger air bag and status light” • Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) (P. 1-54). • Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: • Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.

WRS0139 LRS0242 Unfastening the seat belts Shoulder belt height adjustment To unfasten the seat belt, press the button (front seats) on the buckle O1 . The seat belt automati- The shoulder belt anchor height should be cally retracts. adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, see “Precautions on Checking seat belt operation seat belt usage” (P. 1-11). To adjust, pull out Seat belt retractors are designed to lock the adjustment button O1 and move the seat belt movement by two separate shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi- methods: tion O2 , so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away • When the seat belt is pulled quickly from from your face and neck, but not falling off the retractor your shoulder. Release the adjustment but- • When the vehicle slows down rapidly ton to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

1-18 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING WARNING • If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat • After adjustment, release the adjust- • Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoul- ment button and try to move the made by the same company which der belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. shoulder belt anchor up and down to made the original equipment seat • Periodically check to see that the seat make sure it is securely fixed in belts, should be used with NISSAN belt and the metal components, such position. seat belts. as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible • The shoulder belt anchor height • Adults and children who can use the wires and anchors, work properly. If loose should be adjusted to the position standard seat belt should not use an parts, deterioration, cuts or other dam- best for you. Failure to do so may re- extender. Such unnecessary use age on the webbing is found, the entire duce the effectiveness of the entire could result in serious personal injury seat belt assembly should be replaced. restraint system and increase the in the event of an accident. chance or severity of injury in an • Never use seat belt extenders to in- accident. stall child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the SEAT BELT EXTENDERS child could be seriously injured or If, because of body size or driving position, it killed in a collision or a sudden stop. is not possible to properly fit the lap/ shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE that is compatible with the installed seat • To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a belts is available for purchase. The ex- mild soap solution or any solution rec- tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) ommended for cleaning upholstery or of length and may be used for either the carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow driver or front passenger seating position. the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN allow the seat belts to retract until they dealer for assistance with purchasing an are completely dry. extender if an extender is required.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 CHILD SAFETY

WARNING There are three basic types of child re- For additional information, see “Child restraint systems: straints” (P. 1-22). Do not allow children to play with the • Rear-facing child restraints A child restraint may be secured in the ve- seat belts. Most seating positions are • Forward-facing child restraints hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An- equipped with Automatic Locking Re- • Booster seats chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat with the vehicle seat belt. For additional belt becomes wrapped around a child’s The proper restraint depends on the child's information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-22). neck with the ALR mode activated, the size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year child can be seriously injured or killed if and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens the seat belt retracts and becomes in rear-facing child restraints. Forward- and children be restrained in the rear tight. This can occur even if the vehicle facing child restraints are available for chil- seat. Studies show that children are is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re- dren who outgrow rear-facing child re- safer when properly restrained in the lease the child. If the seat belt cannot straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster rear seat than in the front seat. be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, seats are used to help position a vehicle This is especially important because release the child by cutting the seat lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no your vehicle has a supplemental re- belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife longer use a forward-facing child restraint. straint system (air bag system) for the or scissors) to release the seat belt. front passenger. For additional informa- WARNING Children need adults to help protect tion, see “Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem (SRS)” (P. 1-43). them. They need to be properly Infants and children need special pro- restrained. tection. The vehicle's seat belts may INFANTS not fit them properly. The shoulder belt In addition to the general information in Infants up to at least 1 year old should be may come too close to the face or neck. this manual, child safety information is placed in a rear-facing child restraint. The lap belt may not fit over their small available from many other sources, includ- NISSAN recommends that infants be hip bones. In an accident, an improp- ing doctors, teachers, government traffic placed in child restraints that comply with erly fitting seat belt could cause serious safety offices, and community organiza- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or or fatal injury. Always use appropriate tions. Every child is different, so be sure to Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. child restraints. learn the best way to transport your child. You should choose a child restraint that fits All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or your vehicle and always follow the manu- territories require the use of approved child facturer's instructions for installation and restraints for infants and small children. use. 1-20 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SMALL CHILDREN Once a child outgrows the height or weight A booster seat should be used until the limit of the harness-equipped forward- child can pass the seat belt fit test below: Children that are over 1 year old and weigh facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a • Are the child’s back and hips against the that the child be placed in a commercially rear-facing child restraint as long as pos- vehicle seatback? available booster seat to obtain proper sible up to the height or weight limit of the • Is the child able to sit without slouching? seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the child restraint. Children who outgrow the booster seat should raise the child so that • Do the child’s knees bend easily over the height or weight limit of the rear-facing the shoulder belt is properly positioned front edge of the seat with feet flat on the child restraint and are at least 1 year old across the chest and the top, middle por- floor? should be secured in a forward-facing child tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt • Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu- should not cross the neck or face and belt low and snug across the hips and facturer’s instructions for minimum and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt shoulder belt across mid-chest and maximum weight and height recommen- should lie snugly across the lower hips or shoulder)? dations. NISSAN recommends that small upper thighs, not the abdomen. • Is the child able to use the properly ad- children be placed in child restraints that justed head restraint/headrest? comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety A booster seat can only be used in seating Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle positions that have a three-point type seat • Will the child be able to stay in position for Safety Standards. You should choose a belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle the entire ride? child restraint that fits your vehicle and al- seat and have a label certifying that it com- ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- plies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety tions for installation and use. Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has LARGER CHILDREN grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on Children should remain in a forward-facing or near the face and neck and the lap belt child restraint with a harness until they can be positions properly across the lower reach the maximum height or weight limit hips or upper thighs, use the seat belt with- allowed by the child restraint out the booster seat. manufacturer.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2690 ARS1098 If you answered no to any of these ques- PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD tions, the child should remain in a booster RESTRAINTS seat using a three-point type seat belt. NOTE: WARNING Laws in some communities may follow • Failure to follow the warnings and in- different guidelines. Check local and structions for proper use and instal- state regulations to confirm your child is lation of child restraints could result using the correct restraint system before in serious injury or death of a child or traveling. other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

1-22 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system are safer when properly re- chorage, and a child could be strained in the rear seat than in seriously injured or killed in a the front seat. If you must install a collision. forward-facing child restraint in – Never use the anchor points for the front seat, see “Forward- adult seat belts, or other items. facing child restraint installation – A child restraint with a top tether using the seat belts” (P. 1-35). strap should not be used in the – Even with the NISSAN Advanced front passenger seat. Air Bag System, never install a – Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- rear-facing child restraint in the sible after fitting the child front seat. An inflating air bag restraint. could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must – Infants and children should al- only be used in the rear seat. ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle. WRS0256 – Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and • When the child restraint is not in use, – The child restraint must be used keep it secured with the LATCH sys- and installed properly. Always fol- vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle. tem or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or low all of the child restraint manu- collision, loose objects can injure oc- facturer's instructions for instal- – Child restraint anchorages are de- cupants or damage the vehicle. lation and use. signed to withstand only those – Infants and children should never loads imposed by correctly fitted be held on anyone's lap. Even the child restraints. Under no circum- CAUTION strongest adult cannot resist the stances are they to be used to at- forces of a collision. tach adult seat belts, or other A child restraint in a closed vehicle can items or equipment to the vehicle. become very hot. Check the seating – Do not put a seat belt around both Doing so could damage the child surface and buckles before placing a a child and another passenger. restraint anchorages. The child re- child in the child restraint. – NISSAN recommends that all child straint will not be properly in- restraints be installed in the rear stalled using the damaged an- seat. Studies show that children

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 This vehicle is equipped with a universal • If the child restraint is compatible with child restraint anchor system, referred to your vehicle, place your child in the child as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers restraint and check the various adjust- for CHildren) system. Some child restraints ments to be sure the child restraint is include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- compatible with your child. Choose a ments that can be connected to these an- child restraint that is designed for your chors. For additional information, see child's height and weight. Always follow “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for all recommended procedures. CHildren) system” (P. 1-24). • If the combined weight of the child and If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be you may use either the LATCH anchors or used. the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time). Several manufacturers offer child re- • If the combined weight of the child and straints for infants and children of various LRS3268 sizes. When selecting any child restraint, child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. LATCH system lower anchor locations keep the following points in mind: (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child LATCH (Lower Anchors and • Choose only a restraint with a label certi- restraint. fying that it complies with Federal Motor Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian • Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. Your vehicle is equipped with special an- Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. chor points that are used with LATCH sys- • Check the child restraint in your vehicle to All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or tem compatible child restraints. This sys- be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's territories require that infants and small tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX seat and seat belt system. children be restrained in an approved or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- child restraint at all times while the ve- tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat hicle is being operated. Canadian law re- belt to secure the child restraint unless the quires the top tether strap on forward- combined weight of the child and child re- facing child restraints be secured to the straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- designated anchor point on the vehicle. bined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to 1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system install the child restraint. Be sure to follow – Inspect the lower anchors by insert- the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- ing your fingers into the lower an- tions for installation. chor area. Feel to make sure there The LATCH anchor points can be used to are no obstructions over the an- install child restraints in either of the rear chors such as seat belt webbing or outboard seating positions or in the center seat cushion material. The child re- rear seating position. Please refer to the straint will not be secured properly if following section of this Owner’s Manual for the lower anchors are obstructed. specific information about installing a child Child restraint anchorages are de- restraint in the center rear seating position signed to withstand only those loads using the LATCH anchors. imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are LATCH lower anchor they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to WARNING the vehicle. Doing so could damage the LRS3036 child restraint anchorages. The child LATCH lower anchor location Failure to follow the warnings and in- restraint will not be properly installed LATCH lower anchor location structions for proper use and installa- using the damaged anchorage, and a tion of child restraints could result in child could be seriously injured or killed The LATCH lower anchors are located as serious injury or death of a child or in a collision. shown. A label is attached to the seatback other passengers in a sudden stop or to help you locate the LATCH lower collision: anchors. – Only attach LATCH system compatible child restraints to the Lower An- chors shown in the illustration. For additional information, refer to the following sections of this Owner’s Manual for installation guidance.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 (These are sometimes referred to as “shared anchors” or “borrowed anchors.”) CRS with rigid lower attachments cannot be installed in the center seat. This type of CRS should only be installed in the outboard seating positions.

WARNING Never attach two CRS attachments to the same LATCH anchor. This may overload the anchor in a collision, which could increase the risk of the occupant’s serious injury or death. LRS3269 When installing the CRS in the center LRS0661 LATCH in the center rear seating rear seating position with the inboard LATCH webbing-mounted attachment position LATCH anchors, be careful to ensure any Installing child restraint LATCH occupant or CRS in the outboard seat- lower anchor attachments There are no LATCH anchors dedicated to ing positions is properly restrained us- the center rear seating position. However, ing the vehicle seat belt and there is no LATCH compatible child restraints include the inboard LATCH anchors belonging to interference with the center CRS instal- two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- the two outboard seating positions (indi- lation. If the outboard occupants can- ments that can be connected to two an- cated by the arrows) can be used together not be properly restrained, consider us- chors located at certain seating positions to secure a CRS in the center rear seating ing the vehicle seat belt to restrain the in your vehicle. With this system, you do not position. These anchors are separated by a CRS in the center seating position, or have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the distance OA of 16 in (404 mm). Before at- moving the CRS to another position child restraint. Check your child restraint for tempting to secure a CRS in this seating instead. a label stating that it is compatible with position, ensure that the CRS manufactur- LATCH. This information may also be in the er’s instructions permit the use of LATCH instructions provided by the child restraint anchors with the spacing indicated above. manufacturer.

1-26 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts. For additional information, see “Installing top tether strap” (P. 1-34). If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Anchor points O1 are located on the rear parcel shelf. REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

LRS0662 LRS3284 INSTALLATION USING LATCH LATCH rigid-mounted attachment Top tether anchor point locations For additional information, see all Warnings When installing a child restraint, carefully and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20) read and follow the instructions in this WARNING and “Child restraints” (P. 1-22) before installing a child restraint. manual and those supplied with the child Child restraint anchorages are de- restraint. signed to withstand only those loads Do not use the lower anchors if the com- imposed by correctly fitted child re- bined weight of the child and the child restraints. Under no circumstances are straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- they to be used to attach adult seat bined weight of the child and the child belts, or other items or equipment to restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle. Doing so could damage the the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an- child restraint anchorages. The child chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure restraint will not be properly installed to follow the child restraint manufacturer's using the damaged anchorage, and a instructions for installation. child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

LRS2997 LRS2996 Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

1-28 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4. REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING The three-point seat belt with Auto- LRS0673 LRS0674 matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 used when installing a child restraint. 3. For child restraints that are equipped 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it Failure to use the ALR mode will result with webbing-mounted attachments, before you place the child in it. Push it in the child restraint not being properly remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child secured. The restraint could tip over or anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment be loose and cause injury to a child in a and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not sudden stop or collision. child restraint with your hand to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from press the vehicle seat cushion and seat- side to side. Try to tug it forward and back while tightening the webbing of check to see if the LATCH attachment the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20) and “Child restraints” (P. 1-22) before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing WRS0256 WRS0761 child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2 the rear seats: 1. Child restraints for infants must be 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the used in the rear-facing direction and child restraint and insert it into the therefore must not be used in the front buckle until you hear and feel the latch seat. Position the child restraint on the engage. Be sure to follow the child re- seat. Always follow the child restraint straint manufacturer’s instructions for manufacturer’s instructions. belt routing.

1-30 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2395 LRS2396 WRS0762 Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 5. Remove any additional slack from the extended. At this time, the seat belt re- the shoulder belt to remove any slack in seat belt; press downward and rearward tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint the belt. firmly in the center of the child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when to compress the vehicle seat cushion the seat belt is fully retracted. and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20) LRS2397 and “Child restraints” (P. 1-22) before install- LRS2995 Rear-facing – step 6 ing a child restraint. Forward-facing webbing-mounted – 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it Do not use the lower anchors if the com- step 2 before you place the child in it. Push it bined weight of the child and the child re- 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- from side to side while holding the child straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- tachments to the LATCH lower anchors. restraint near the seat belt path. The bined weight of the child and the child Check to make sure the LATCH attach- child restraint should not move more restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use ment is properly attached to the lower than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- anchors. chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to tug it forward and check to see if the If the child restraint is equipped with a to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s belt holds the restraint in place. If the top tether strap, route the top tether instructions for installation. restraint is not secure, tighten the seat strap and secure the tether strap to the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in Follow these steps to install a forward-facing tether anchor point. For additional infor- another seat and test it again. You may child restraint using the LATCH system: mation, see “Installing top tether strap” need to try a different child restraint. Not (P. 1-34). all child restraints fit in all types of 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. vehicles. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. 1-32 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system straint is removed. For additional information, see “Head restraints/headrests” (P. 1-7). If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

LRS2994 LRS0671 Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Forward-facing – step 4 Do not install child restraints that require 4. For child restraints that are equipped the use of a top tether strap in seating with webbing-mounted attachments, positions that do not have a top tether remove any additional slack from the anchor. anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the 3. The back of the child restraint should be child restraint with your knee to com- secured against the vehicle seatback. press the vehicle seat cushion and seat- If necessary, adjust or remove the head back while tightening the webbing of restraint/headrest to obtain the correct the anchor attachments. child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure 5. Tighten the tether strap according to place. Be sure to reinstall the head the manufacturer's instructions to re- restraint/headrest when the child remove any slack.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

WRS0697 LRS3283 Forward-facing – step 6 Rear seats 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it ᭺1 Top tether strap from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment ᭺2 Anchor point path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from Installing top tether strap side to side. Try to tug it forward and The child restraint top tether strap must be check to see if the LATCH attachment used when installing the child restraint with holds the restraint in place. If the re- the LATCH lower anchor attachments. straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the re- First, secure the child restraint with the straint in another seat and test it again. LATCH lower anchors. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-34 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Rear bench seat FORWARD-FACING CHILD OUTBOARD AND CENTER SEATING RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING POSITIONS THE SEAT BELTS 1. Position the top tether strap O1 over the seatback. WARNING 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an- The three-point seat belt with Auto- chor point O2 as shown. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. 3. Tighten the tether strap according to Failure to use the ALR mode will result the manufacturer’s instructions to rein the child restraint not being properly move any slack. secured. The restraint could tip over or If you have any questions when install- be loose and cause injury to a child in a ing a top tether strap, it is recommended sudden stop or collision. Also, it can that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this change the operation of the front pas- WRS0699 service. senger air bag. For additional informa- Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – tion, see “Front passenger air bag and step 1 WARNING status light” (P. 1-54). For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20) Child restraint anchorages are de- and “Child restraints” (P. 1-22) before install- signed to withstand only those loads ing a child restraint. imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are Do not use the lower anchors if the com- they to be used to attach adult seat bined weight of the child and the child re- belts, or other items or equipment to straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- the vehicle. Doing so could damage the bined weight of the child and the child child restraint anchorages. The child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use restraint will not be properly installed the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- using the damaged anchorage, and a chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure child could be seriously injured or killed to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in a collision. instructions for installation. Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 Follow these steps to install a forward- If the seating position does not have an facing child restraint using the vehicle seat adjustable head restraint/headrest and belt in the rear seats or in the front passen- it is interfering with the proper child re- ger seat: straint fit, try another seating position or 1. If you must install a child restraint in a different child restraint. the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat. 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manu- WRS0680 facturer’s instructions. Forward-facing – step 3 The back of the child restraint should be 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the secured against the vehicle seatback. child restraint and insert it into the If necessary, adjust or remove the head buckle until you hear and feel the latch restraint/headrest to obtain the correct engage. Be sure to follow the child re- child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ straint manufacturer’s instructions for headrest is removed, store it in a secure belt routing. place. Be sure to reinstall the head If the child restraint is equipped with a restraint/headrest when the child re- top tether strap, route the top tether straint is removed. For additional infor- strap and secure the tether strap to the mation, see “Head restraints/headrests” tether anchor point. For additional infor- (P. 1-7). mation, see “Installing top tether strap” (P. 1-39).

1-36 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

LRS0667 LRS0668 Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 5 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on extended. At this time, the seat belt re- the shoulder belt to remove any slack in tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint the belt. mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

WRS0681 WRS0698 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8 6. Remove any additional slack from the 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it seat belt; press downward and rear- before you place the child in it. Push it ward firmly in the center of the child re- from side to side while holding the child straint with your knee to compress the restraint near the seat belt path. The vehicle seat cushion and seatback while child restraint should not move more pulling up on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the belt holds the restraint in place. If the manufacturer's instructions to remove restraint is not secure, tighten the seat any slack. belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-38 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Rear bench seat OUTBOARD AND CENTER SEATING POSITIONS 1. Position the top tether strap O1 over the seatback. 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point O2 as shown. 3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended LRS0865 LRS3283 that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this Forward-facing — step 10 Rear seats service. 10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition WARNING ᭺1 Top tether strap switch in the ON position. The front Child restraint anchorages are de- ᭺2 Anchor point passenger air bag status light signed to withstand only those loads should illuminate. If this light is not illu- Installing top tether strap imposed by correctly fitted child re- minated, see “Front passenger air bag straints. Under no circumstances are The child restraint top tether strap must be and status light” (P.1-54). Move the child they to be used to attach adult seat used when installing the child restraint with restraint to another seating position. belts, or other items or equipment to seat belts. Have the system checked. It is recom- the vehicle. Doing so could damage the mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer First, secure the child restraint with the seat child restraint anchorages. The child for this service. belt. restraint will not be properly installed After the child restraint is removed and the using the damaged anchorage, and a seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode child could be seriously injured or killed (child restraint mode) is canceled. in a collision.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 BOOSTER SEATS For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section. Precautions on booster seats

WARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases: – Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child's face LRS2479 LRS0453 and neck and the lap portion of the A. Low back booster seat • Make sure the child’s head will be properly belt does not cross the stomach. supported by the booster seat or vehicle B. High back booster seat – Make sure the shoulder belt is not seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, behind the child or under the child's Booster seats of various sizes are offered if a low back booster seat is chosen, the arm. by several manufacturers. When selecting vehicle seatback must be at or above the – A booster seat must only be installed any booster seat, keep the following points center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is in a seating position that has a lap/ in mind: shoulder belt. lower than the center of the child’s ears, a • Choose only a booster seat with a label high back booster seat should be used. certifying that it complies with Federal • If the booster seat is compatible with Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Ca- your vehicle, place the child in the booster nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. seat and check the various adjustments • Check the booster seat in your vehicle to to be sure the booster seat is compatible be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s with the child. Always follow all recom- seat and seat belt system. mended procedures.

1-40 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Booster seat installation WARNING To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20), “Child restraints” (P. 1-22) and “Booster seats” (P. 1-40) before installing a child restraint.

LRS0464 WRS0699 All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or Follow these steps to install a booster seat territories require that infants and small in the rear seat or in the front passenger children be restrained in an approved seat: child restraint at all times while the ve- 1. If you must install a booster seat in the hicle is being operated. front seat, move the seat to the rear- The instructions in this section apply to most position. booster seat installation in the rear seats 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. or the front passenger seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 LRS0454 LRS0451 LRS0452 Front passenger position Rear center position Rear outboard position 3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, see “Head restraints/headrests” (P. 1-7).

1-42 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

If the seating position does not have an PRECAUTIONS ON SRS adjustable head restraint/headrest and This SRS section contains important infor- it is interfering with the proper booster mation concerning the following systems: seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. • Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt Air Bag System) low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure • Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- to follow the booster seat manufactur- mental air bag er’s instructions for adjusting the seat • Rear outboard seat-mounted side- belt routing. impact supplemental air bag system 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat • Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and belt toward the retractor to take up ex- rollover supplemental air bag tra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is • Driver and front passenger supplemental positioned across the top, middle por- LRS0865 knee air bag tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front follow the booster seat manufacturer’s • Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats passenger seat, place the ignition switch instructions for adjusting the seat belt and rear outboard seats) in the ON position. The front passenger routing. Supplemental front-impact air bag air bag status light may or may not system 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- illuminate, depending on the size of the structions for properly fastening a seat child and the type of booster seat being The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt used. For additional information, see help cushion the impact force to the head with retractor” (P. 1-15). “Front passenger air bag and status and chest of the driver and front passenger light” (P. 1-54). in certain frontal collisions.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the mental air bag system curtain air bags are designed to inflate and This system can help cushion the impact remain inflated for a short time. force to the chest area of the driver and The SRS is designed to supplement the front passenger in certain side-impact col- crash protection provided by the driver and lisions. The side air bags are designed to front passenger seat belts and is not a inflate on the side where the vehicle is substitute for them. Seat belts should al- impacted. ways be correctly worn and the occupant Rear outboard seat-mounted side- seated a suitable distance away from the impact supplemental air bag system steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, see This system can help cushion the impact “Seat belts” (P. 1-11). force to the chest area of the rear seat passengers in certain side-impact colli- The supplemental air bags operate only sions. The side air bags are designed to when the ignition switch is placed in the inflate on the side where the vehicle is ON position. impacted. After placing the ignition switch in the Driver and front passenger supplemen- ON position, the supplemental air bag tal knee air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off This system can help cushion the impact after about 7 seconds if the system is force to the driver’s and front passenger’s operational. knees in certain collisions. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where

1-44 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system • The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away WRS0031 as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly WARNING • The front passenger air bag and front use the seat belts. passenger supplemental knee air • The front air bags ordinarily will not bag will not inflate if the passenger • The driver and front passenger seat inflate in the event of a side impact, air bag status light is lit. For addi- belt buckles are equipped with sen- rear impact, rollover, or lower sever- tional information, see “Front pas- sors that detect if the seat belts are ity frontal collision. Always wear your senger air bag and status light” fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air seat belts to help reduce the risk or (P. 1-54). Bag System monitors the severity of severity of injury in various kinds of a collision and seat belt usage, then accidents inflates the air bags as needed. Fail- ure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 • The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Fail- ure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, see “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P. 1-54). • Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside ARS1133 the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

1-46 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043

WARNING WARNING • Never let children ride unrestrained • Children may be severely injured or or extend their hands or face out of killed when the front air bags, side air the window. Do not attempt to hold bags or curtain air bags inflate if they them in your lap or arms. Some ex- are not properly restrained. Pre- amples of dangerous riding posi- teens and children should be prop- tions are shown in the illustrations. erly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046

WARNING • Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-22).

1-48 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING • The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend WRS0431 LRS3119 their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of WARNING dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof- mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags: • The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 WRS0032 SSS0162 SSS0159

WARNING • When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. • Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

1-50 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag 4. Head restraints/headrests 5. Front seat belts 6. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side shown; front passenger side similar) 7. Supplemental front-impact air bags 8. Front crash zone sensor 9. Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bags 10. Front seats 11. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) 12. Satellite sensor (passenger side shown; driver’s side similar) 13. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats shown; rear outboard seats similar) 14. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag LRS3248 15. Rear seats 1. Top tether anchor NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System 16. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for (front seats) 2. Rear seat belts CHildren) system

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 17. Rear outboard seat-mounted side- • If a forward-facing child restraint is • Do not position the front passenger impact supplemental air bag installed in the front passenger seat, seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the 18. Satellite sensor (passenger side do not position the front passenger front seat does contact the rear seat, shown; driver’s side similar) seat so the child restraint contacts the air bag system may determine a the instrument panel. If the child re- sensor malfunction has occurred WARNING straint does contact the instrument and the front passenger air bag sta- panel, the system may determine the tus light may illuminate and the To ensure proper operation of the pas- seat is occupied and the passenger supplemental air bag warning light senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air bag Sys- air bag and the front passenger may flash. tem, please observe the following items. supplemental knee air bag may de- This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ploy in a collision. Also the front pas- • Do not allow a passenger in the rear Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and senger air bag status light may not seat to push or pull on the seatback front passenger seats. This system is de- illuminate. For additional informa- pocket (if so equipped). signed to meet certification requirements tion, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-22). • Do not place heavy loads heavier under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, • Confirm the operating condition with Canada. All of the information, cautions head restraint/headrest or in the the front passenger air bag status and warnings in this manual must be seatback pocket (if so equipped). light. followed. • If you notice that the front passenger • Make sure that there is nothing The driver supplemental front-impact air air bag status light is not operating pressing against the rear of the seat- bag is located in the center of the steering as described in this section, get the back, such as a child restraint in- wheel. The front passenger supplemental occupant classification system stalled in the rear seat or an object front-impact air bag is mounted in the checked. It is recommended that you stored on the floor. dashboard above the glove box. The front visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • Make sure that there is no object air bags are designed to inflate in higher placed under the front passenger • Until you have confirmed with a severity frontal collisions, although they seat. dealer that your passenger seat oc- may inflate if the forces in another type of • Make sure that there is no object cupant classification system is work- collision are similar to those of a higher placed between the seat cushion and ing properly, position the occupants severity frontal impact. They may not in- center console or between the seat in the rear seating positions. flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle cushion and the door.

1-52 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- If you have any questions about your air Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat cation of proper front air bag system bag system, it is recommended that you belts should be correctly worn and the operation. visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information driver and front passenger seated upright The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System about the system. If you are considering as far as practical away from the steering monitors information from the crash zone modification of your vehicle due to a dis- wheel or instrument panel. The front air sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Infla- ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- bags inflate quickly in order to help protect tor operation is based on the severity of a tact information is contained in the front of the front occupants. Because of this, the collision and seat belt usage for the driver. this Owner's Manual. force of the front air bag inflating can in- For the front passenger, the occupant clas- When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud crease the risk of injury if the occupant is sification sensor is also monitored. Based noise may be heard, followed by the re- too close to, or is against, the front air bag on information from the sensor, only one lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful module during inflation. front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend- and does not indicate a fire. Care should be The front air bags deflate quickly after a ing on the crash severity and whether the taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita- collision. front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad- tion and choking. Those with a history of a The front air bags operate only when the ditionally, the front passenger air bag and breathing condition should get fresh air ignition switch is placed in the ON front passenger supplemental knee air promptly. position. bag may be automatically turned off under Front air bags, along with the use of seat some conditions, depending on the weight After placing the ignition switch in the belts, help to cushion the impact force on ON position, the supplemental air bag detected on the front passenger seat and the face and chest of the front occupants. how the seat belt is used. If the front pas- warning light illuminates. The supple- They can help save lives and reduce seri- mental air bag warning light will turn off senger air bag and front passenger ous injuries. However, an inflating front air supplemental knee air bag are OFF, the after about 7 seconds if the system is bag may cause facial abrasions or other operational. passenger air bag status light will be illumi- injuries. Front air bags, other than the knee nated. For additional information, see air bags, do not provide restraint to the “Front passenger air bag and status light” lower body. (P.1-54). One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 WARNING Status light The front passenger seat is equipped with The front passenger air bag and front an occupant classification sensor (weight passenger supplemental knee air bag sensor) that turns the front passenger air are designed to automatically turn OFF bag and front passenger supplemental under some conditions. Read this sec- knee air bag on or off depending on the tion carefully to learn how it operates. weight applied to the front passenger seat. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and The status of the front passenger air bag child restraints is necessary for most and front passenger supplemental knee effective protection. Failure to follow all air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front instructions in this manual concerning passenger air bag status light which the use of seats, seat belts and child is located on the instrument panel. restraints can increase the risk or se- After the ignition switch is placed in the verity of injury in an accident. "ON" position, the front passenger air bag LRS0865 status light on the instrument panel illumi- Front passenger air bag and status nates for about 7 seconds and then turns light off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows: PASSENGER AIR BAG FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND FRONT PASSENGER CONDITION DESCRIPTION STATUS LIGHT ( ) SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG STATUS Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Nobody/Somebody ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Small Adult in front passenger seat Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED In addition to the above, certain objects For additional information, see “Normal op- placed on the front passenger seat may eration” (P.1-56) and “Troubleshooting” (P.1-57). also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.

1-54 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front passenger air bag the child’s weight can be detected and ing to properly secure child restraints and The front passenger air bag and front pas- cause the air bag to turn OFF. to use the ALR mode may allow the re- senger supplemental knee air bag are de- Front passenger seat adult occupants who straint to tip or move in a collision or sud- signed to automatically turn OFF when the are properly seated and using the seat belt den stop. This can also result in the passen- vehicle is operated under some conditions as outlined in this manual should not ger air bag and front passenger as described below in accordance with U.S. cause the front passenger air bag and supplemental knee air bag inflating in a regulations. If the front passenger air bag front passenger supplemental knee air crash instead of being OFF. For additional and front passenger supplemental knee bag to be automatically turned OFF. For information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-22). air bag are OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. small adults it may be turned OFF, however If the front passenger seat is not occupied, The driver air bag and other air bags in your if the occupant takes his/her weight off the the front passenger air bag and front pas- vehicle are not part of this system. seat cushion (for example, by not sitting senger supplemental knee air bag are de- The purpose of the regulation is to help upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or signed not to inflate in a crash. However, reduce the risk of injury or death from an by otherwise being out of position), this heavy objects placed on the seat could re- inflating air bag to certain front passenger could cause the sensor to turn the front sult in air bag inflation, because of the ob- seat occupants, such as children, by requir- passenger air bag and front passenger ject’s weight detected by the occupant ing the air bag to be automatically turned supplemental knee air bag OFF. Always be classification sensor. Other conditions OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt could also result in air bag inflation, such as requirements. properly for the most effective protection if a child is standing on the seat, or if two by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. children are on the seat, contrary to the The occupant classification sensor in this instructions in this manual. Always be sure vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear that you and all vehicle occupants are detect an occupant and objects on the seated and restrained properly. seat by weight. For example, if a child is in seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- propriate child restraints and booster Using the front passenger air bag status vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If light, you can monitor when the front pas- the front passenger air bag and front pas- this is not possible, the occupant classifica- senger air bag and front passenger senger supplemental knee air bag OFF in tion sensor is designed to operate as de- supplemental knee air bag are automati- accordance with the regulations. Also, if a scribed above to turn the front passenger cally turned OFF. child restraint of the type specified in the air bag and front passenger supplemental regulations is on the seat, its weight and knee air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Fail-

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55 If an adult occupant is in the seat but the If the front passenger air bag status light Normal operation front passenger air bag status light is illu- will not illuminate even though you believe In order for the occupant classification minated (indicating that the front passen- that the child restraint, the seat belts and sensor system to classify the front passenger air bag and front passenger supple- the occupant are properly positioned, it is ger based on weight, please follow the pre- mental knee air bag are OFF), it could be recommended that you take your vehicle cautions and steps outlined below: that the person is a small adult, or is not to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can sitting on the seat properly or not using the check system status by using a special Precautions seat belt properly. tool. However, until you have confirmed • Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on If a child restraint must be used in the front with a dealer that your air bag is working the seat or placed in the seatback pocket seat, the front passenger air bag status properly, reposition the occupant or child (if so equipped). light may or may not be illuminated, de- restraint in a rear seat. pending on the size of the child and the The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and • Make sure that a child restraint or other type of child restraint being used. If the air front passenger air bag status light will object is not pressing against the rear of bag status light is not illuminated (indicat- take a few seconds to register a change in the seatback. ing that the front passenger air bag and the front passenger seat status. This is nor- • Make sure that a rear passenger is not front passenger supplemental knee air mal system operation and does not indi- pushing or pulling on the back of the front bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that cate a malfunction. passenger seat. the child restraint or seat belt is not being If a malfunction occurs in the front passen- • Make sure that the front passenger seat used properly. Make sure that the child re- ger air bag system, the supplemental air or seatback is not forced back against an straint is installed properly, the seat belt is bag warning light , located in the me- object on the seat or floor behind it. used properly and the occupant is posi- ter and gauges area of the instrument • Make sure that there is no object placed tioned properly. If the air bag status light is panel, will be illuminated (blinking or under the front passenger seat. still not illuminated, reposition the occu- steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is pant or child restraint in a rear seat. recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

1-56 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Steps NOTE: However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following 1. Adjust the seat as outlined in “Seats” This vehicle’s occupant classification (P. 1-2). Sit upright, leaning against the conditions that may be interfering with the sensor system generally keeps the clas- weight sensors: seatback, and centered on the seat sification locked during driving, so it is cushion with your feet comfortably ex- important that you confirm that the • Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning tended to the floor. front passenger is properly classified against the seatback, and centered on prior to driving. However, the occupant the seat cushion with his/her feet com- 2. Make sure there are no objects on your fortably extended to the floor. lap. classification sensor may recalculate the weight of the occupant under some con- • A child restraint or other object pressing 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in “Seat ditions (both while driving and when against the rear of the seatback. belts” (P. 1-11). Front passenger seat belt stopped), so front passenger seat occu- • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on buckle status is monitored by the occupants should continue to remain seated the back of the front passenger seat. pant classification system, and is used as outlined above. • Forcing the front seat or seatback as an input to determine occupancy against an object on the seat or floor be- status. So, it is highly recommended that Troubleshooting hind it. the front passenger fasten their seat belt. If you think the front passenger air bag • An object placed under the front passen- status light is incorrect: ger seat. 4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds 1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying • An object placed between the seat cush- allowing the system to classify the front the front passenger seat: ion and center console or between the passenger before the vehicle is put into seat cushion and the door. motion. • Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front If the vehicle is moving, please come to a 5. Ensure proper classification by checking passenger air bag and front passenger stop when it is safe to do so. Check and the front passenger air bag status light. supplemental knee air bag are correct any of the above conditions. Re- suppressed. start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57 NOTE: • A child restraint or other object pressing 3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger against the rear of the seatback. and no objects on the front passenger A system check will be performed during seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is which the front passenger air bag status • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat. recommended that you visit a NISSAN light will remain lit for about 7 seconds dealer as soon as possible. initially. • Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor be- If the light is still ON after this, the person hind it. Other supplemental front-impact air should be advised not to ride in the front bag precautions passenger seat and the vehicle should be • An object placed under the front passenger seat. checked as soon as possible. It is recom- WARNING mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for • An object placed between the seat cush- this service. ion and center console. • Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instru- 2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and ment panel. Also, do not place any or child restraint occupying the front objects between any occupant and passenger seat. correct any of the above conditions. Re- start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. the steering wheel or instrument This may be due to the following condi- panel. Such objects may become tions that may be interfering with the NOTE: dangerous projectiles and cause in- weight sensors: jury if the front air bags inflate. A system check will be performed during • Small adult or child is not sitting upright, which the front passenger air bag status • Immediately after inflation, several leaning against the seatback, and cen- light will remain lit for about 7 seconds front air bag system components will tered on the seat cushion with his/her initially. be hot. Do not touch them; you may feet comfortably extended to the floor. severely burn yourself. • The child restraint is not properly in- If the light is still OFF after this, the small • No unauthorized changes should be stalled, as outlined in “Child restraints” adult, child or child restraint should be re- made to any components or wiring (P. 1-22). positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle of the supplemental air bag system. should be checked as soon as possible. It is • An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) This is to prevent accidental inflation recommended that you visit a NISSAN of the supplemental air bag or dam- hanging on the seat or placed in the seat- dealer for this service. back pocket (if so equipped). age to the supplemental air bag system.

1-58 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system • Do not make unauthorized changes • Modifying or tampering with the • It is recommended that you visit a to your vehicle's electrical system, front passenger seat may result in NISSAN dealer for work on and suspension system or front end serious personal injury. For example, around the front air bag. It is also rec- structure. This could affect proper do not change the front seats by ommended that you visit a NISSAN operation of the front air bag system. placing material on the seat cushion dealer for installation of electrical • Tampering with the front air bag sys- or by installing additional trim mate- equipment. The Supplemental Re- tem may result in serious personal rial, such as seat covers, on the seat straint System (SRS) wiring har- injury. Tampering includes changes that are not specifically designed to nesses* should not be modified or to the steering wheel and the instru- assure proper air bag operation. Ad- disconnected. Unauthorized electri- ment panel assembly by placing ma- ditionally, do not stow any objects cal test equipment and probing de- terial over the steering wheel pad under the front passenger seat or the vices should not be used on the air and above the instrument panel or seat cushion and seatback. Such ob- bag system. by installing additional trim material jects may interfere with the proper • A cracked windshield should be re- around the air bag system. operation of the occupant classifica- placed immediately by a qualified re- • Removing or modifying the front tion sensor (weight sensor). pair facility. A cracked windshield passenger seat may affect the func- • No unauthorized changes should be could affect the function of the tion of the air bag system and result made to any components or wiring supplemental air bag system. of the seat belt system. This may af- in serious personal injury. *The SRS wiring harness connectors are fect the front air bag system. Tam- yellow and orange for easy identification. pering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59 though they may inflate if the forces in an- outboard seating positions. They can help other type of collision are similar to those of save lives and reduce serious injuries. How- a higher severity impact. They are de- ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain air signed to inflate on the side where the ve- bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in Side air bags and curtain air bags do not certain side collisions. provide restraint to the lower body. Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate The seat belts should be correctly worn in certain types of rollover collisions or near and the driver, front passenger and rear rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- outboard occupants seated upright as far ments (for example, during severe off- as practical away from the side air bag. roading) may cause the curtain air bags to Rear seat passengers should be seated as inflate. far away as practical from the door finish- Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always ers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to LRS3142 an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation. help protect the occupants. Because of Front and rear outboard this, the force of the side air bag and curtain When the side air bags and curtain air bags seat-mounted side-impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, injury if the occupant is too close to, or is supplemental air bag and followed by the release of smoke. This against, these air bag modules during in- roof-mounted curtain smoke is not harmful and does not indi- flation. The side air bag will deflate quickly side-impact and rollover cate a fire. Care should be taken not to after the collision is over. supplemental air bag systems inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a The side air bags are located in the outside ing condition should get fresh air promptly. short time. of the seatback of the front and rear out- Side air bags, along with the use of seat The side air bags and curtain air bags board seats. The curtain air bags are lo- belts, help to cushion the impact force on operate only when the ignition switch is cated in the side roof rails. All of the infor- the chest and pelvic area of the front and placed in the ON position. mation, cautions and warnings in this rear outboard occupants. Curtain air bags manual must be followed. The side air help to cushion the impact force to the bags and curtain air bags are designed to head of occupants in the front and rear inflate in higher severity side collisions, al- 1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system After placing the ignition switch in the • Do not make unauthorized changes When selling your vehicle, we request that ON position, the supplemental air bag to your vehicle's electrical system, you inform the buyer about the side air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- suspension system or side panel. and curtain air bag systems and guide the mental air bag warning light will turn off This could affect proper operation of buyer to the appropriate sections in this after about 7 seconds if the system is the side air bag and curtain air bag Owner's Manual. operational. systems. • Tampering with the side air bag sys- WARNING tem may result in serious personal • Do not place any objects near the injury. For example, do not change seatback of the front and rear seats. the front and rear seats by placing Also, do not place any objects (an material near the seatbacks or by in- umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front stalling additional trim material, and rear door finisher and the front such as seat covers, around the side and rear seat. Such objects may be- air bag. come dangerous projectiles and • It is recommended that you visit a cause injury if a side air bag inflate. NISSAN dealer for work on and • Right after inflation, several side air around the side air bag and curtain bag and curtain air bag system com- air bag. It is also recommended that ponents will be hot. Do not touch you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa- them; you may severely burn tion of electrical equipment. The SRS yourself. wiring harnesses* should not be • No unauthorized changes should be modified or disconnected. Unauthor- made to any components or wiring ized electrical test equipment and of the side air bag and curtain air bag probing devices should not be used systems. This is to prevent damage on the side air bag or curtain air bag to or accidental inflation of the side system. air bag and curtain air bag or dam- * The SRS wiring harness connectors are age to the side air bag and curtain air yellow and orange for easy identification. bag systems.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61 The knee air bag helps to cushion the impact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body. The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for LRS3270 LRS3271 a short time. Driver’s side Passenger’s side The knee air bag operates only when the Driver and front passenger Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always ignition switch is placed in the ON supplemental knee air bag an indication of proper knee air bag position. operation. The knee air bag is located in the knee After placing the ignition switch in the bolster, on the driver’s and passenger’s When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud ON position, the supplemental air bag side. All of the information, cautions and noise may be heard, followed by release of warning light illuminates. The supple- warnings in this manual apply and must smoke. This smoke is not harmful and mental air bag warning light will turn off be followed. The knee air bag is designed does not indicate a fire. Care should be after about 7 seconds if the system is to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita- operational. although it may inflate if the forces in an- tion and choking. Those with a history of a other type of collision are similar to those of breathing condition should get fresh air a higher severity frontal impact. It may not promptly. inflate in certain collisions.

1-62 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING • It is recommended that you visit a • If the vehicle becomes involved in a NISSAN dealer for work on and collision but pretensioner(s) are not • Do not place any objects between the around the knee air bag. It is also rec- activated, be sure to have the preten- knee bolster and the driver’s or pas- ommended that you visit a NISSAN sioner system checked and, if neces- senger’s seat. Such objects may be- dealer for installation of electrical sary, replaced. It is recommended come dangerous projectiles and equipment. The SRS wiring har- that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this cause injury if a knee air bag inflates. nesses* should not be modified or service. • Right after inflation, the knee air bag disconnected. Unauthorized electri- • No unauthorized changes should be system components will be hot. Do cal test equipment and probing de- made to any components or wiring not touch them; you may severely vices should not be used on the knee of the pretensioner system. This is to burn yourself. air bag system. prevent damage to or accidental ac- • No unauthorized changes should be *The SRS wiring harness or connectors are tivation of the pretensioner(s). Tam- made to any components or wiring yellow or orange for easy identification. pering with the pretensioner system of the knee air bag system. This is to may result in serious personal injury. When selling your vehicle, we request that prevent damage to or accidental in- • It is recommended that you visit a you inform the buyer about the knee air flation of the knee air bag system. NISSAN dealer for work on and bag system and guide the buyer to the • Do not make unauthorized changes around the pretensioner system. It is appropriate sections in this manual. to your vehicle's electrical system or also recommended that you visit a suspension system. This could affect NISSAN dealer for installation of elec- proper operation of the knee air bag Seat belt with pretensioner(s) trical equipment. Unauthorized elec- system. (front and rear outboard seats) trical test equipment and probing • Tampering with the knee air bag sys- devices should not be used on the tem may result in serious personal WARNING pretensioner system. injury. For example, do not change • The pretensioner(s) cannot be re- • If you need to dispose of the preten- the driver or passenger knee bolster used after activation. They must be sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec- or install additional trim material replaced together with the retractor ommended that you visit a NISSAN around the knee air bag. and buckle as a unit. dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63 The pretensioner system may activate The supplemental air bag warning light with the supplemental air bag system in is used to indicate malfunctions in the certain types of collisions. Working with the pretensioner system. For additional infor- seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help mation, see "Supplemental air bag warning tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- light" (P.1-65). If the operation of the supple- comes involved in certain types of colli- mental air bag warning light indicates sions, helping to restrain front and rear out- there is a malfunction, have the system board seat occupants. checked. It is recommended that you visit a The pretensioner(s) are encased within the NISSAN dealer for this service. seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an- When selling your vehicle, we request that chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. you inform the buyer about the preten- These seat belts are used the same way as sioner system and guide the buyer to the conventional seat belts. appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual. When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re- WRS0897 leased and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indi- 1. SRS Air bag warning labels cate a fire. Care should be taken not to The warning labels are located on the inhale it, as it may cause irritation and surface of the sun visor. choking. Those with a history of a breath- SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING ing condition should get fresh air promptly. LABELS After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load Warning labels about the supplemental limiters allow the seat belt to release web- front-impact air bag system are placed in bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the vehicle as shown in the illustration. the chest. WARNING Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death. 1-64 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If any of the following conditions occur, the Repair and replacement front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, procedure knee air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing: The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air •The supplemental air bag warning light re- bags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) are mains on after approximately 7 seconds. designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the • The supplemental air bag warning light supplemental air bag warning light re- flashes intermittently. mains illuminated after inflation has oc- • The supplemental air bag warning light curred. These systems should be repaired does not come on at all. and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is Under these conditions, the front air bag, recommended that you visit a NISSAN side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner dealer for this service. systems may not operate properly. They When maintenance work is required on the LRS0100 must be checked and repaired. It is recom- vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING curtain air bags, knee air bags, pretension- this service. er(s) and related parts should be pointed LIGHT out to the person performing the mainte- The supplemental air bag warning light, WARNING nance. The ignition switch should always displaying in the instrument panel, be placed in the LOCK position when work- If the supplemental air bag warning monitors the circuits for the air bag sys- ing under the hood or inside the vehicle. light is on, it could mean that the front tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, When the ignition switch is placed in the ON knee air bag and/or pretensioner sys- position, the supplemental air bag warning tems will not operate in an accident. To light illuminates for about 7 seconds and help avoid injury to yourself or others, then turns off. This means the system is have your vehicle checked as soon as operational. possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65 WARNING • If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant • Once a front air bag, side air bag, cur- Classification Sensor (OCS) should be tain air bag or knee air bag has in- checked to verify it is still functioning flated, the air bag module will not correctly. It is recommended that you function again and must be replaced. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Additionally, the activated preten- The OCS should be checked even if no sioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bags deploy as a result of the im- air bag module and pretensioner(s) pact. Failure to verify proper OCS should be replaced. It is recom- function may result in an improper mended that you visit a NISSAN air bag deployment resulting in in- dealer for this service. However, the jury or death. air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired. • The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

1-66 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system MEMO

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67 2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...... 2-2 Resetting the drive computer ...... 2-32 Meters and gauges ...... 2-3 Settings ...... 2-32 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-3 Vehicle information display warnings Tachometer ...... 2-4 and indicators...... 2-39 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-5 Security systems ...... 2-46 Fuel gauge ...... 2-6 Vehicle security system (if so equipped) .....2-46 Distance To Empty (DTE) ...... 2-6 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 2-47 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-48 reminders ...... 2-7 Switch operation ...... 2-48 Checking lights ...... 2-8 Rear window and outside mirror Warning/Indicator lights (red) ...... 2-8 (if so equipped) defroster switch ...... 2-49 Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) ...... 2-10 Headlight and turn signal switch ...... 2-50 Warning/Indicator lights (other) ...... 2-15 Headlight control switch ...... 2-50 Audible reminders ...... 2-15 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) system (if so equipped) ...... 2-54 TYPE A (if so equipped) ...... 2-16 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-55 How to use the vehicle information Turn signal switch ...... 2-55 display ...... 2-16 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-56 Startup display ...... 2-17 Horn ...... 2-56 Settings ...... 2-17 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ...... 2-57 Vehicle information display warnings Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-58 and indicators...... 2-24 E-call (SOS) button (if so equipped) ...... 2-59 Vehicle information display– 7 inch (18 cm) Rear Door Alert ...... 2-59 Type B (if so equipped) ...... 2-30 How to use the vehicle information Power outlet ...... 2-61 display ...... 2-31 Extended storage switch ...... 2-61 Startup display ...... 2-31 Storage...... 2-62 Front-door pockets ...... 2-62 Power windows ...... 2-66 Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ...... 2-63 Moonroof (if so equipped) ...... 2-69 Storagetrays...... 2-63 Power moonroof ...... 2-69 Glovebox...... 2-64 Interior lights ...... 2-71 Console box ...... 2-64 Map lights ...... 2-72 Overhead sunglasses storage ...... 2-64 Personal lights ...... 2-72 Cup holders ...... 2-65 Trunk light...... 2-72 Windows ...... 2-66 INSTRUMENT PANEL

5. Cruise control switches (P. 5-61) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-63) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P. 4-65) 6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-48) 7. Vents (P. 4-30) 8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-43) 10. Audio system (P. 4-43) 11. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) 12. Glove box (P. 2-64) 13. Front passenger supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-43) 14. Shift lever (P. 5-18) 15. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-11) 16. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-38) 17. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-43) 18. Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-26) 19. Hood release (P. 3-21) 20. Fuel filler door release (P. 3-23) 21. ECO mode switch (P. 5-26) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-50) Trunk release (P. 3-22) LII2638 Trip reset switch (P. 2-4) 1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/ 3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) For additional information, refer to the turn signal switch (P. 2-50) Horn (P. 2-56) separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. 2. Steering wheel switch (P. 2-16) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) Refer to the page number indicated in Audio controls (P. 4-43) Warning and indicators lights (P. 2-7) Vehicle information display (P. 2-16) parentheses for operating details. 2-2 Instruments and controls METERS AND GAUGES

LIC2218 Speedometer The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

LIC4212 1. Tachometer SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER 2. Warning and indicator lights 3. Vehicle information display This vehicle is equipped with a speedom- 4. Speedometer eter and odometer. The speedometer is 5. Fuel gauge located on the right side of the meter clus- 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge ter. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-3 LIC4056 LIC4416 LIC4365 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A (if so equipped) 7 inch (18 cm) Type B (if so equipped) 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A (if so equipped) Odometer/Twin trip odometer Changing the display TACHOMETER The odometer O2 and the twin trip odom- Push the TRIP/RESET switch (located on The tachometer indicates engine speed in eter O1 are displayed when the ignition the instrument panel) to change the dis- revolutions per minute (rpm). switch is placed in the ON position. play as follows: The odometer records the total distance TRIP A→ TRIP B → ODO → TRIP A the vehicle has been driven. Resetting the trip odometer The twin trip odometer records the dis- Press the OK button on the steering wheel tance of individual trips. for more than 1 second to reset the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

2-4 Instruments and controls The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION If the gauge indicates a coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously dam- LIC4602 LIC3427 age the engine. For additional information, see “If your vehicle overheats” 7 inch (18 cm) Type B (if so equipped) ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (P. 6-11). Do not rev the engine into the red zone O1 . GAUGE CAUTION NOTE: When engine speed approaches the The ignition switch must be placed in the red zone, shift to a higher gear or re- ON position for the gauge to give a duce engine speed. Operating the en- reading. gine in the red zone may cause serious The gauge indicates the engine coolant engine damage. temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the reading is within the zone OA shown in the illustration.

Instruments and controls 2-5 Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- DTE display will change to “---” when the isters 0 (Empty). fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to The arrow on the fuel pump symbol the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty). indicates the fuel-filler location. NOTE: • The DTE value after refill is estimated CAUTION based on recent fuel economy and • If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the amount of fuel added. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may • If a small amount of fuel is added, or come on. Refuel as soon as possible. the ignition is on during refueling, the After a few driving trips. the light display may not be updated. should turn off. If the light remains on • Conditions that affect the fuel after a few driving trips, have the ve- economy will also affect the estimated hicle inspected. It is recommended DTE value (city/highway driving, idle LIC2222 that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this time, remote start time, terrain, sea- FUEL GAUGE service. sonal weather, added vehicle weight, • For additional information, see “Mal- added deflectors, roof racks, etc.). NOTE: function Indicator Light (MIL)” (P.2-9). The ignition switch must be placed in the DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE) ON position for the gauge to give a Displays the estimated distance the ve- reading. hicle can be driven before refueling. The The gauge indicates the approximate fuel value is calculated based on recent fuel level in the tank. economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel The gauge may move slightly during brak- consumption. ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, The low fuel warning light comes on when the value displayed may differ from the ac- the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. tual distance that can be driven.

2-6 Instruments and controls WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Warning/Indicator light (red) Warning/Indicator light (yellow) Warning/Indicator light (other)

or Brake warning light or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ECO mode indicator light (green) warning light

Charge warning light Automatic Emergency Braking with Pedes- Front fog light indicator light (if so trian Detection system warning light equipped) (green)

Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light High Beam Assist indicator light (green)

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

Master warning light Master warning light Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Seat belt warning light and chime Power steering warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)

Supplemental air bag warning light Rear Automatic Braking OFF warning light

Slip indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

Instruments and controls 2-7 CHECKING LIGHTS “Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) WARNING Type B” (P. 2-30). With all doors closed, apply the parking • Your brake system may not be work- brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ing properly if the warning light is on. ignition switch in the ON position without or Brake warning Driving could be dangerous. If you starting the engine. The following lights (if light judge it to be safe, drive carefully to so equipped) will come on: This light functions for both the parking the nearest service station for re- brake and the foot brake systems. , , , , , or pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle The following lights (if so equipped) will Parking brake indicator towed because driving it could be come on briefly and then go off: When the ignition switch is placed in the ON dangerous. • Pressing the brake pedal with the en- , or , , , , position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. gine stopped and/or a low brake If any light does not come on or operate in fluid level may increase your stop- Low brake fluid warning light a way other than described, it may indicate ping distance and braking will re- a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON quire greater pedal effort as well as function. Have the system checked. It is position, the light warns of a low brake fluid pedal travel. recommended that you visit a NISSAN level. If the light comes on while the engine • If the brake fluid level is below the dealer for this service. is running with the parking brake not ap- MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake plied, stop the vehicle and perform the Some indicators and warnings are also dis- fluid reservoir, do not drive until the following: played on the vehicle information display brake system has been checked. It is between the speedometer and tachom- 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake recommended that you visit a eter. For additional information, see “Ve- fluid as necessary. For additional infor- NISSAN dealer for this service. hicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) mation, see “Brake fluid” (P. 8-10). Type A” (P. 2-16) or “Vehicle information dis- 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the play 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-30). warning system checked. It is recom- WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information on warnings and indicators, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” (P. 2-16) or

2-8 Instruments and controls Charge warning light CAUTION test. For additional information, see “Readi- ness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” (P. 10-24). If this light comes on while the engine is Running the engine with the engine oil running, it may indicate the charging sys- pressure warning light on could cause Operation serious damage to the engine almost tem is not functioning properly. Turn the The MIL will come on in one of two ways: immediately. Such damage is not cov- engine off and check the generator belt. If • MIL on steady — An emission control sys- the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so. tem malfunction has been detected. light remains on, have your vehicle serviced Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel immediately. It is recommended that you Malfunction Indicator Light Cap warning appears in the vehicle infor- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. mation display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose (MIL) or missing, tighten or install the cap and CAUTION If this indicator light comes on steady or continue to drive the vehicle. The blinks while the engine is running, it may Do not continue driving if the generator light should turn off after a few driving indicate a potential emission control belt is loose, broken or missing. trips. If the light does not turn off malfunction. after a few driving trips, have the vehicle Engine oil pressure The MIL may also come on steady if the inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You warning light fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure do not need to have your vehicle towed This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed to the dealer. the light flickers or comes on during nor- tightly, and that the vehicle has at least • MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. detected which may damage the emis- stop the engine immediately and call a sion control system. To reduce or avoid After a few driving trips, the light NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair emission control system damage: should turn off if no other potential emis- shop. – do not drive at speeds above 45 mph sion control system malfunction exists. The engine oil pressure warning light is (72 km/h). not designed to indicate a low oil level. If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 – avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds – avoid steep uphill grades. For additional information, see “Engine oil” when the engine is not running, it indicates – if possible, reduce the amount of cargo (P. 8-6 ). that the vehicle is not ready for an emission being hauled or towed. control system inspection/maintenance

Instruments and controls 2-9 The MIL may stop blinking and come on Seat belt warning light and It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- chime dealer for these services. Unless checked ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer and repaired, the supplemental restraint for this service. You do not need to have The light and chime remind you to fasten system (air bag system) and/or the preten- your vehicle towed to the dealer. the driver and front passenger seat belts. sioners may not function properly. For ad- The rear seats are also equipped with a ditional information, see “Supplemental re- CAUTION seat belt warning light. straint system (SRS)” (P. 1-43). For additional information, see “Seat belts” Continued vehicle operation without WARNING having the emission control system (P. 1-11). checked and repaired as necessary If the supplemental air bag warning could lead to poor driveability, reduced Supplemental air bag light is on, it could mean that the front fuel economy, and possible damage to warning light air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag sys- the emission control system. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON tems and/or pretensioner systems will position, the supplemental air bag warning not operate in an accident. To help Master warning light light illuminates for about 7 seconds and avoid injury to yourself or others, have then turns off. This means the system is your vehicle checked as soon as pos- When the ignition switch is in the ON posi- operational. sible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. tion, the master warning light illuminates if If any of the following conditions occur, the any of the following are displayed on the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, vehicle information display: WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS and pretensioner seat belt systems need (yellow) • Parking brake release warning servicing. For additional information on warnings • Door open (when vehicle is moving) warning • The supplemental air bag warning light and indicators, see “Vehicle information • Service CVT Stop safely warning remains on after approximately 7 display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” (P. 2-16) or seconds. • Shift to P (Park) position warning “Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) For additional information, see “Vehicle in- • The supplemental air bag warning light Type B” (P. 2-30). formation display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” flashes intermittently. (P. 2-16) or “Vehicle information display 7 • The supplemental air bag warning light inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-30). does not come on at all.

2-10 Instruments and controls or Anti-lock Braking This light illuminates when the AEB with After the ignition switch is placed in the ON System (ABS) Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF position, this light illuminates for about 1 warning light in the vehicle information display. second and turns off. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON If the light illuminates when the AEB with Low tire pressure warning position, the ABS warning light illuminates Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may If the vehicle is being driven with low tire and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is indicate that the system is unavailable. For pressure, the warning light will illumi- operational. additional information, see “Automatic nate. The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian appears in the vehicle information If the ABS warning light illuminates while Detection” (P. 5-93) and “Intelligent Forward display. the engine is running or while driving, it Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-105). may indicate the ABS is not functioning When the low tire pressure warning light properly. Have the system checked. It is Front passenger air bag illuminates, you should stop and adjust recommended that you visit a NISSAN status light the tire pressure of all four tires to the dealer for this service. recommended COLD tire pressure shown The front passenger air bag status light will on the Tire and Loading Information la- If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock be lit and the passenger front air bag will be bel located in the driver’s door opening. function is turned off. The brake system off depending on how the front passenger The low tire pressure warning light does then operates normally but without anti- seat is being used. not automatically turn off when the tire lock assistance. For additional information, pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- see “Brake system” (P. 5-129). For additional information, see “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P. 1-54). flated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds Automatic Emergency above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the Braking (AEB) with Low tire pressure warning light TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure Pedestrian Detection warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge system warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres- to check the tire pressure. sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni- This light comes on when the ignition tors the tire pressure of all tires except the The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning switch is placed in the ON position. It turns spare. appears each time the ignition switch is off after the engine is started. placed in the ON position as long as the low The low tire pressure warning light warns tire pressure warning light remains of low tire pressure or indicates that the illuminated. TPMS is not functioning properly. Instruments and controls 2-11 For additional information, see “Vehicle in- WARNING • If the light illuminates while driving, formation display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” avoid sudden steering maneuvers or (P. 2-16) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- • Radio waves could adversely affect abrupt braking, reduce vehicle tem (TPMS)” (P. 5-5). electric medical equipment. Those speed, pull off the road to a safe loca- TPMS malfunction who use a pacemaker should contact tion and stop the vehicle as soon as the electric medical equipment possible. Driving with under-inflated If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the manufacturer for the possible influ- tires may permanently damage the low tire pressure warning light will flash for ences before use. tires and increase the likelihood of approximately 1 minute when the ignition • If the light does not illuminate with tire failure. Serious vehicle damage switch is placed in the ON position. The the ignition switch placed in the ON could occur and may lead to an acci- light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the position, have the vehicle checked as dent and could result in serious per- system checked. It is recommended that soon as possible. It is recommended sonal injury or death. Check the tire you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this pressure for all four tires. Adjust the The “Tire Pressure Low— Add Air” warning service. tire pressure to the recommended does not appear if the low tire pressure COLD tire pressure show on the Tire warning light illuminates to indicate a and Loading Information label lo- TPMS malfunction. cated in the driver’s door opening to For additional information, see “Tire Pres- turn the low tire pressure warning sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and light off. If the light still illuminates “Tire pressure” (P. 8-28). while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-12 Instruments and controls • When using a wheel without the Master warning light • Traffic Sign Recognition warnings (if so TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS equipped) will not function and the low tire When the ignition switch is in the ON posi- • I-Key system warnings pressure warning light will flash for tion, the master warning light illuminates if For additional information, see “Vehicle in- approximately 1 minute. The light will any of the following are displayed on the formation display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” remain on after 1 minute. Have your vehicle information display: (P. 2-16) or “Vehicle information display 7 tires replaced and/or TPMS system • Low washer fluid warning inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-30). reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN • Loose fuel cap warning • Low tire pressure warning Power steering warning dealer for these services. light • Replacing tires with those not origi- • Emergency brake warning nally specified by NISSAN could af- • Lock warning WARNING fect the proper operation of the • Shipping mode warning TPMS. • Door/Trunk open warning (when vehicle • If the engine is not running or is is moving) turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. CAUTION • LED Headlight system warning (if so Steering will be harder to operate. equipped) • The TPMS is not a substitute for the • When the power steering warning • Chassis Control system fault warning (if regular tire pressure check. Be sure light illuminates with the engine run- so equipped) to check the tire pressure regularly. ning, there will be no power assist for • Service CVT warnings • If the vehicle is being driven at the steering.You will still have control speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), • Service engine warnings of the vehicle but the steering will be the TPMS may not operate correctly. • Rear emergency braking warning (If so harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recom- • Be sure to install the specified size of equipped) mended that you visit a NISSAN tires to the four wheels correctly. • Parking sensor error warning dealer for this service. • Driver Attention Alert warning (if so equipped) • ITS system malfunction warning

Instruments and controls 2-13 When the ignition switch is placed in the ON This light illuminates when the RAB system Vehicle Dynamic Control position, the power steering warning light is turned off in the vehicle information (VDC) OFF indicator light illuminates. After starting the engine, the display. power steering warning light turns off. This This indicator light comes on when the If the light illuminates when the RAB sys- VDC is turned off in the vehicle information indicates the power steering system is tem is on, it may indicate that the system is operational. display. This indicates the VDC has been unavailable. For additional information, see turned off. If the power steering warning light illumi- “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-86). nates while the engine is running, it may Turn the VDC on using the vehicle informa- indicate the power steering system is not Slip indicator light tion display, or by restarting the engine. For functioning properly and may need servic- additional information, see “Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-131). ing. Have the power steering system This indicator will blink when the Vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operat- The VDC light also comes on when the ig- NISSAN dealer for this service. ing, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing nition switch is placed in the ON position. When the power steering warning light illu- its traction limits. The road surface may be The light will turn off after a period of time if minates with the engine running, there will slippery. the system is operational. If the light stays be no power assist for the steering but you on or comes on along with the indica- You may feel or hear the system working; tor light while you are driving, have the VDC will still have control of the vehicle. At this this is normal. time, greater steering effort is required to system checked. It is recommended that operate the steering wheel, especially in The light will blink for a few seconds after you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. sharp turns and at low speeds. the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin. WARNING For additional information, see “Power The indicator light also comes on steering” (P. 5-128). when you place the ignition switch in the VDC should remain on unless freeing a ON position. The light will turn off after ap- vehicle from mud or snow. proximately 2 seconds if the system is op- Rear Automatic Braking While the VDC system is operating, you (RAB) OFF warning light erational. If the light does not come on have the system checked. it is recom- might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys- This light comes on when the ignition mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for tem working when starting the vehicle or switch is placed in the ON position. It turns this service. accelerating, but this is normal. off after the engine is started.

2-14 Instruments and controls WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS beams selected. This indicates that the AUDIBLE REMINDERS high beam assist is operational. (other) Brake pad wear warning For additional information on warnings For additional information, see “Headlight The disc brake pads have audible wear and indicators, see “Vehicle information and turn signal switch” (P. 2-50). warnings. When a disc brake pad requires display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” (P. 2-16) or replacement, it makes a high pitched “Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) High beam indicator light scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo- Type B” (P. 2-30). (blue) tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de- This blue light comes on when the head- pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon ECO mode indicator light light high beams are on and goes out when as possible if the warning sound is heard. (green) (if so equipped) the low beams are selected. This light comes on when the ECO mode The high beam indicator light also comes Light reminder chime has been selected. For additional informa- on when the passing signal is activated. With the ignition switch placed in the OFF tion, see “ECO mode switch” (P. 5-26). position, a chime sounds when the driver's Side light and headlight door is opened if the headlights or parking Front fog light indicator indicator light (green) lights are on. light (green) (if so The side light and headlight indicator light Turn the headlight control switch off before equipped) illuminates when the side light or headlight leaving the vehicle. The front fog light indicator light illumi- position is selected. For additional informa- nates when the front fog lights are on. For tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” NISSAN Intelligent Key® door additional information, see “Fog light (P. 2-50). buzzer switch” (P. 2-56). Turn signal/hazard The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if High Beam Assist indicator indicator lights (green) any one of the following improper opera- light (green) tions is found. The appropriate light flashes when the turn • The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle This indicator light illuminates when the signal switch is activated. when locking the doors and trunk. headlights come on while the headlight Both lights flash when the hazard switch is switch is in the AUTO position with the high • The Intelligent Key is taken outside the turned on. vehicle when operating the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-15 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 4.2 INCH (11 cm) TYPE A (if so equipped)

• Any doors are not closed securely when locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, see “NISSAN In- telligent Key®” (P. 3-2). Parking brake reminder chime A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to zero.

LIC2630 LIC3566 The vehicle information display is located HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE to the left of the speedometer. It displays INFORMATION DISPLAY such items as: The vehicle information display can be • Vehicle settings changed using the , • Trip computer information , and OK buttons located on the steer- • Drive system warnings and settings ing wheel. • Cruise control system information ᭺1 - Use these buttons • NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation to navigate the vehicle information information display. • Indicators and warnings ᭺2 OK - Change or select an item in the vehicle information display.

᭺3 — Returns to the previous menu.

2-16 Instruments and controls The OK, and buttons also STARTUP DISPLAY SETTINGS control audio and control panel functions When the vehicle in placed in the ON posi- The setting mode allows you to change the in some conditions. Most screens and tion the screens that display in the vehicle information displayed in the vehicle infor- menus offer instruction prompts of the information include: mation display: steering switch buttons to indicate how to control the vehicle information display. The • Active system status (if so equipped) • VDC Setting OK button changes the audio source and • Trip computer • Driver Assistance the buttons also control voice • Fuel economy • ECO Mode Setting recognition manual mode. The OK button • Warnings • TPMS Settings can be used to change the audio source • Outside air temperature when the audio screen is displayed. The • Clock buttons can be used when con- • Odometer/Twin Trip Odometer • Vehicle Settings trolling voice recognition prompts manu- Warnings will only display if there are any • Maintenance ally. For additional information, refer to the present. For additional information, see • Customize Display separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. “Vehicle information display warnings and • Unit indicators” (P. 2-24). • Language • Factory Reset VDC Setting The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

Menu item Explanation System Allows the user turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-131).

Instruments and controls 2-17 Driver Assistance The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Emergency Brake Displays available emergency braking options. Front Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-93) and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-105). Rear Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-86). Lane Displays available lane options. Lane Departure Warning Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Lane De- parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-31). Blind Spot Displays available blind spot options. Blind Spot (BSW) Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38). Speed Limit Sign Allows user to turn the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system on or off. For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)” (P. 5-27). Parking Aids Displays available parking aids. Display Allows user to auto display the sonar. For additional information, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P. 5-136). Rear Sensor Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off. Distance Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short. Volume Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low. Rear Cross Traffic Alert Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-50). Driver Attention Alert Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) on or off. For additional information, see “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” (P. 5-120). Chassis Control Displays available chassis control options.

2-18 Instruments and controls ECO Mode Setting The ECO mode setting menu allows the user to change the settings for the ECO mode. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation ECO Customize Displays available ECO mode settings. Cruise Control Allows user to set the Cruise Control mode to Normal or ECO. For additional information, see “Cruise Control” (P. 5-61). Air Conditioning Allows user to set the Air Conditioning mode to Normal or ECO. For additional information, see “Heater and air conditioner” (P. 4-31). ECO Info Settings Displays available ECO information settings. ECO Indicator Allows user to turn the ECO indicator on or off. ECO Drive Report Allows user to turn the ECO Drive Report on or off. View History Displays the history report for the vehicle. TPMS Settings The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Explanation TPMS Setting Displays available TPMS settings. Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display. Clock Menu item Explanation Clock Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include automatically setting the time, 12H/24H format and manually setting the time. If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Instruments and controls 2-19 Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allow the user to change the lighting and locking settings. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Lighting Displays the available option for lighting. Locking Displays the available locking options. Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Auto Door Unlock Displays the auto door unlock options. Shift to Park Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). IGN OFF Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked. Horn beeps on lock Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Wipers Displays the various wipers settings. For additional information, see “Wiper and washer switch” (P. 2-48) Speed Dependent Allows the user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. Rear Door Alert Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. For additional information, see “Rear Door Alert” (P. 2-59). Horn & Alert When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds. Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed. OFF When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

2-20 Instruments and controls Maintenance The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items. WARNING The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, see “Changing wheels and tires” (P.8-36). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Menu item Explanation Maintenance Displays various maintenance reminder options. Oil Control System Allows user to reset the current interval. This should only be done after completing oil change maintenance. Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Instruments and controls 2-21 Customize Display The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Main menu selection Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Speed Allows user to turn the speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Blank Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display. Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display. ECO Pedal Guide Allows user to turn the ECO pedal guide on or off in the vehicle information display. Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. TPMS Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display. TSR Allows user to turn the TSR screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Driving Aids Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Welcome Effect Displays the available welcome effect settings. Gauges Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Animation Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off. Light/Wiper Displays the available light and wiper guidance settings. Headlights mode guidance Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off. Wiper mode guidance Allows user to turn the wiper mode guidance on or off.

2-22 Instruments and controls Unit The unit menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Explanation Mileage/Fuel Displays the available mileage display units. Tire Pressure Displays the available mileage display units. Temperature Displays the available temperature display units. Language The language menu allows the user to change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Explanation Language Displays available language options for the vehicle information display. Factory Reset The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Menu item Explanation Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, Factory Reset the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-23 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Key ID Incorrect No Key Detected WARNINGS AND INDICATORS This warning appears when the ignition This warning appears when the Intelligent The following messages may appear in switch is placed from the OFF position and Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni- your vehicle information display. the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the tion switch in the ON position. Make sure system. You cannot start the engine with the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Engine start operation for an unregistered key. Intelligent Key system (if For additional information, see “NISSAN In- I-Key battery level is low) For additional information, see “NISSAN In- telligent Key®” (P. 3-2). telligent Key®” (P. 3-2). This indicator appears when the battery of No Key Press and hold to the Intelligent Key is low and when the In- Key System Error: See Stop Engine telligent Key system and the vehicle are not Owner’s Manual This message appears when the Intelligent communicating normally. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON key is not detected and the engine should If this appears, touch the ignition switch position, this warning appears for a period be turned off. with the Intelligent Key while depressing of time and then turns off. Rotate Steering Wheel and the brake pedal. For additional information, The Key System Error message warns of a Push Start Switch see “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis- malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- This indicator appears when the steering charge” (P. 5-13) tem. If the warning appears while the en- lock cannot be released. gine is stopped, it may be impossible to Key Battery Low start the engine. If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering This indicator appears when the Intelligent If the warning appears while the engine is wheel right and left. Key battery is running out of power. running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It Rear Door Alert is activated If this indicator appears, replace the bat- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN When the system is enabled, this message tery with a new one. For additional infor- dealer for this service. appears when the Rear Door Alert system mation, see “Battery replacement” (P. 8-22). is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.

2-24 Instruments and controls • Using the steering wheel switch, a driver For additional information, see “Rear Door can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the Alert” (P. 2-59). Drive sport mode indicator display for a period of time. If no selection Check Rear Seat For All Articles A small “S” appears to the right of the Trans- is made, this message automatically mission Shift Position indicator in the ve- turns off after a period of time. If this mes- When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a com- hicle information display when the drive sage does not automatically turn off, it is sport mode is engaged. not a malfunction. plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from • Using the steering wheel switch, a driver the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, Activate the drive sport mode by pushing can select “Disable Alert” to disable the and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes- the switch on the shift lever while the shift selected alert for the remainder of the sage alerts the driver, after a period of time, lever is in the D (Drive) position. to check for items in the rear seat after the current trip. For additional information, see “Drive sport audible alert has been provided. mode switch” (P. 5-21) WARNING NOTE: Headlight System Error: See Owner’s Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a This system is disabled until a driver en- Manual stop within a trip temporarily dis- ables it using the vehicle information This warning appears when the LED head- misses the message for that stop with- display. For additional information, see lights are not functioning properly. out turning the system off. Alerts can “How to use the vehicle information dis- If this warning appears, have your system be provided for other stops during the play” (P. 2-31). checked. It is recommended that you visit a trip. Selecting “Disable Alert” turns off For additional information, see “Rear Door NISSAN dealer for this service. the Rear Door Alert system for the re- Alert” (P. 2-59). mainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided. Illumination indicator Door/Trunk Open This indicator appears when the vehicle NOTE: This warning appears when a door has information display screen brightness is This system is disabled until a driver en- been opened. being adjusted. ables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see “How to use the vehicle information display” (P. 2-16).

Instruments and controls 2-25 Power turned off to save the battery Loose Fuel Cap Low Outside Temperature This message appears after the ignition This warning appears when the fuel-filler This warning appears if the outside tem- switch is automatically turned off. For addi- cap is not tightened correctly after the ve- perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera- tional information, see “Push-button igni- hicle has been refueled. For additional in- ture can be changed to display in Celsius or tion switch positions” (P. 5-12). formation, see “Fuel-filler cap” (P. 3-23) Fahrenheit. For additional information, see “Settings” (P. 2-17). Push brake and start Low Fuel switch to drive Low Washer Fluid This indicator appears when the shift lever This warning appears when the fuel level in is in the P (Park) position. the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon This warning appears when the as it is convenient, preferably before the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. This indicator means that the engine will fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. start by pushing the ignition switch with a small reserve of fuel in the tank when For additional information, see the brake pedal depressed. You can start the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty). “Windshield-washer fluid” (P. 8-11). the engine from any position of the ignition switch. Low Oil Pressure: See Outside Temperature Owner’s Manual Push clutch and start Display switch to drive This warning appears in the message area The outside temperature display appears of the vehicle information display if low oil This indicator appears when the shift lever in the center region of the vehicle informa- is in the N (Neutral) position. pressure is detected. This gauge is not de- tion display. signed to indicate low oil level. The low oil This indicator means that the engine will pressure warning is not designed to indi- Power will turn off to save the battery start by pushing the ignition switch with cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to This message appears in the vehicle infor- the clutch and brake pedal depressed. You check the oil level. For additional informa- mation display after a period of time if the can start the engine from any position of tion, see “Engine oil” (P. 8-6). ignition switch is in the ON position and if the ignition switch. the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, see “Push-button ignition switch positions” (P. 5-12).

2-26 Instruments and controls Loading Information label. For additional Rear seat belt reminder Shift to Park information, see “Low tire pressure warning This warning appears for 35 seconds after This warning appears when the ignition light” (P. 2-11) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring the ignition is placed in the ON position and switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5). the engine is started. and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual position. Also, a chime sounds when the This warning message shows the status of This warning appears when there is an er- the three rear seat belts. When one of the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position. ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes rear seat belts are buckled, the corre- on, have the system checked. It is recom- sponding rear seat belt indicator will ap- If this warning appears, move the shift lever mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for pear grey. When one of the rear seat belts to the P (Park) position and start the engine. this service. are unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear red. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse Transmission Shift Position indicator After a change in buckle status, a chime will This warning may appear if the extended sound and the warning will appear for an- storage switch is not pushed in. When this This indicator shows the transmission shift other 35 seconds. warning appears, push in the extended position. storage switch to turn off the warning. For Release Parking Brake additional information, see “Extended stor- CVT Malfunction Service This warning appears when the parking age switch” (P. 2-61), and/or “Fuses” (P. 8-19). now brake is set and the vehicle is driven. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air This warning appears when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warn- Reminder: Turn OFF This warning appears when the low tire ing comes on, have the system checked. It Headlights pressure warning light in the meter illumi- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN This warning appears when the headlights nates and low tire pressure is detected. The dealer for this service. warning appears each time the ignition are left in the ON position when exiting the Engine Oil Service due vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the switch is placed in the ON position as long in–––km OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor- as the low tire pressure warning light re- mation, see “Headlight and turn signal mains illuminated. If this warning appears, This distance to oil change is displayed if switch” (P. 2-50). stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres- the distance to oil change is less than sures of all four tires to the recommended 100 km (62 miles). COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Instruments and controls 2-27 Automatic Emergency Driver Attention Alert Braking with Pedestrian Cruise control indicator Malfunction Detection warning This indicator shows the cruise control sys- This warning appears when the Intelligent indicator tem status. Driver Alertness system is not functioning This indicator appears along, with an au- When cruise control is activated, a green properly. For additional information, see “In- dible warning, when the system detects circle will appear to indicate it is set. The telligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” (P. 5-120). the possibility of a forward collision. vehicle information display will also display Driver Attention Alert— For additional information, see “Automatic the speed the cruise control was set at. If TakeaBreak? Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian you accelerate past the set speed, the speed will blink until you either cancel This alert appears when the system has Detection” (P. 5-93) and “Intelligent Forward detected that the driver may be displaying Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-105). cruise control or go back to the set speed. If cruise control is on and canceled, the fatigue or a lack of attention. BSW/RCTA indicator speed will be displayed to show the speed Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled the vehicle will return to if the resume but- Front Sensor Blocked See Manual This indicator appears when the BSW sys- ton is activated. This message appears when the front ra- tem is engaged. Currently not available dar sensor may be obstructed due to: For additional information, see “Blind Spot This message may appear when the Intel- • mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc. Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38). ligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is • inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) BSW/RCTA System engaged. All forward driving aids are temporarily dis- Malfunction: See Owner’s Under the following conditions, the ICC sys- abled until the system detects that the Manual tem is automatically canceled: front radar sensor is no longer obstructed. This warning appears when the Blind Spot • When the VDC operates For additional information, see: Warning/Rear Cross Traffic Alert systems • When a wheel slips are not functioning properly. For additional • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with information, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” • When the VDC system is turned off Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-93) (P. 5-38) and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” The above system cannot be used in some • Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (P. 5-50). situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and (I-FCW) (P. 5-105) VDC system is off.)

2-28 Instruments and controls The above system cannot be used in some Rear Automatic Braking ECO mode indicator situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.) (RAB) system warning This indicator appears when the ECO Not Available System Malfunction indicator mode is engaged. This warning appears when one or more of This indicator appears to indicate the sta- For additional information, see “ECO mode the following systems (if so equipped) is tus of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) switch” (P. 5-26). not functioning properly. system. For additional information, see “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-86). Intelligent Cruise Control • Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (ICC) indicators • Blind Spot Warning (BSW) Side Radar Obstruction These indicators show the Intelligent • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) This message appears when the Blind Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The sta- Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic tus is shown by color. For additional infor- If one or more of these warnings appear, Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable mation, see “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” have the system checked. It is recom- because a radar blockage is detected. For (P. 5-63). mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information, see “Blind Spot this service. Lane Departure Warning Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38) and “Rear Cross For additional information, see "Intelligent Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-50). (LDW) indicator Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-63), “Blind Spot This indicator appears when the LDW sys- Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38) or “Lane Departure Speed Limit Sign indicator tem is engaged. Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-31). This message may appear when the Traffic For additional information, see “Lane De- Parking Sensor Error: See Sign Recognition system is engaged. parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-31). Owner’s Manual For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Not Available Poor Road Conditions This warning appears when there is an er- Recognition (TSR)” (P. 5-27). ror with the system. For additional informa- This message may appear when the Intel- System Fault ligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is tion, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-136). engaged. This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) Under the following conditions, the ICC sys- system. For additional information, see tem is automatically canceled: “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-86). • When the VDC operates • When a wheel slips Instruments and controls 2-29 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY– 7 INCH (18 cm) TYPE B (if so equipped)

Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature • Driving Aids This message appears when the camera • Odometer/twin trip odometer detects an interior temperature of more • Distance to empty than approximately 104°F (40°C). For addi- • Clock and outside temperature tional information, see “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-31). Unavailable: High Camera Temperature This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than 104°F (40°C). For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)” (P. 5-27). Vehicle ahead detection LIC3224 indicator The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays This indicator appears when the following such items as: systems are engaged and have detected a vehicle: • Vehicle settings • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with • Drive computer information Pedestrian Detection • Drive system warnings and settings • Intelligent Forward Collision Warning • Cruise control system information (I-FCW) • NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation For additional information, see “Automatic information Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian • Indicators and warnings Detection” (P. 5-93) and “Intelligent Forward • Tire pressure information Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-105). • Audio information • Bluetooth® Hands-free Phone information

2-30 Instruments and controls The OK, and buttons also • Digital speed and average speed control audio and control panel functions • Instant fuel economy/ average fuel in some conditions. Most screens and economy menus offer instruction prompts of the • Tire Pressure steering switch buttons to indicate how to control the vehicle information display. • Audio/telephone Dots on the right side of the vehicle infor- • Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) mation display may appear if there is more • Speed Limit Sign than one page of menu items or warning • Driving Aids messages, depending on the type of me- • Settings ter. The OK button changes the audio source and the buttons also con- • Warnings* trol voice recognition manual mode. The *Warnings will only display if there are any OK button can be used to change the au- present. For additional information, see LIC3566 dio source when the audio screen is dis- “Vehicle information display warnings and played. The buttons can be used indicators” (P. 2-39). HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE when controlling voice recognition To control what items display in the vehicle INFORMATION DISPLAY prompts manually. For additional informa- information display, see “How to use the tion, refer to the separate NissanConnect® The vehicle information display can be vehicle information display” (P. 2-31). changed using the , Owner’s Manual. , and OK buttons located on the steer- STARTUP DISPLAY ing wheel. When the vehicle in placed in the ON posi- ᭺1 - Use these buttons tion the vehicle information display may to navigate the vehicle information display the following screens (if so display. equipped): ᭺2 OK - Change or select an item in the • Home vehicle information display. • Drive Computer — Speed, Fuel Economy, ᭺3 — Returns to the previous menu. Trip Distance & Time • Convenience

Instruments and controls 2-31 RESETTING THE DRIVE COMPUTER NOTE: • Driver Assistance The drive computer is divided across three If you wish to reset all drive computer • ECO Mode Setting screens: values at once, press and hold the OK • TPMS Settings • Average Speed button for approximately 3 seconds until • Clock • Average Fuel Economy a reset menu appears; and follow the • Vehicle Settings instructions. • Trip Distance & Time • Maintenance 1. Press the buttons SETTINGS • Customize Display until you reach the desired drive com- The setting mode allows you to change the • Unit/Language puter mode. information displayed in the vehicle infor- • Factory Reset 2. Press and hold the OK button for ap- mation display. It also allows you to change proximately 1 second to reset the infor- vehicle functions: mation on the currently displayed • VDC Setting screen.

VDC Setting The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

Menu item Explanation System Allows the user turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-131).

2-32 Instruments and controls Driver Assistance The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle. Menu item Explanation Lane Displays available lane options. Lane Departure Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Lane Departure Warning Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-31). Blind Spot Displays available blind spot options. Blind Spot Warning Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38). Emergency Brake Displays available emergency braking options. Front Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-93) and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-105). Rear Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-86). Speed Limit Sign Allows user to turn the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system on or off. For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)” (P. 5-27). Parking Aids Displays available parking aids. Auto Show Sonar Allows user to auto display the sonar. For additional information, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P. 5-136). Rear Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off. Distance Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short. Volume Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low. Rear Cross Traffic Alert Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-50). Driver Attention Alert Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) on or off. For additional information, see “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” (P. 5-120). Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert. Low Temperature Alert Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off. Chassis Control Displays available chassis control options.

Instruments and controls 2-33 ECO Mode Setting The ECO mode setting menu allows the user to change the settings for the ECO mode.

Menu item Explanation ECO Mode Customize Displays available ECO mode settings. Cruise Control Allows user to turn the Cruise Control mode on or off. For additional information, see “Cruise Control” (P. 5-61). Air Conditioning Allows user to turn the Air Conditioning mode on or off. For additional information, see “Heater and air conditioner” (P. 4-31). ECO Drive Assist Displays available ECO information settings. ECO Indicator Allows user to turn the ECO indicator on or off. ECO Drive Report Allows user to turn the ECO Drive Report on or off. View History Displays the history report for the vehicle. TPMS Setting The TPMS settings menu allows the user to view or change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Explanation TPMS Setting Displays available tire pressure settings. Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display. Clock Menu item Explanation Clock Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include manually setting the time, 12H/24H format, and time zone (if so equipped). The clock can also be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

2-34 Instruments and controls Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Lighting Displays the available lighting options. Welcome Headlight Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off. Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Turn indicator Displays the available turn indicator options. 3 Flashes Allows user to turn 3 flash pass feature on or off. Continuous Allows user to adjust the continuous feature. Locking Displays the available locking options. Ext. Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Auto Door Unlock Displays the auto door unlock options. Shift to Park Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into Park. IGN OFF Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked. Horn beeps on lock Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Wipers Displays the available wiper options. Speed Dependent Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off. Rear Door Alert Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. Horn & Alert When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds. Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed. OFF When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

Instruments and controls 2-35 Maintenance The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items. WARNING The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, see “Changing wheels and tires” (P.8-36). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

2-36 Instruments and controls Customize Display The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Explanation Main Menu Selection Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Speed Allows user to turn the speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Blank Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display. Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display. ECO Pedal Guide Allows user to turn the ECO Pedal guide screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. TPMS Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Speed Limit Sign Allows user to turn the TSR screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Audio Allows user to turn the audio controls screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Driving Aids Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Cruise Allows user to turn the cruise control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Chassis Control Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Cruise Screen Transition Allow user to turn the cruise screen transition on or off. Welcome Effect Displays the available welcome effect settings. Gauges Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Animation Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off. Light/Wiper Guidance Displays the available light and wiper guidance settings. Lights mode guidance Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off. Wiper mode guidance Allows user to turn the wiper mode guidance on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-37 Unit/Language The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Explanation Mileage/Fuel Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Tire Pressure Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Temperature Allows user to select the temperature display units. Language Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display. Factory Reset The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Menu item Explanation Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, Factory Reset the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

2-38 Instruments and controls VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Key ID Incorrect No Key Detected WARNINGS AND INDICATORS This warning appears when the ignition This warning appears when the Intelligent The following messages may appear in switch is placed from the OFF position and Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni- your vehicle information display. the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the tion switch in the ON position. Make sure system. You cannot start the engine with the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Engine start operation for an unregistered key. Intelligent Key system (if For additional information, see “NISSAN In- I-Key battery level is low) For additional information, see “NISSAN In- telligent Key®” (P. 3-2). telligent Key®” (P. 3-2). This indicator appears when the battery of No Key Press and hold to the Intelligent Key is low and when the In- Key System Error: See Stop Engine telligent Key system and the vehicle are not Owner’s Manual This message appears when the Intelligent communicating normally. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON key is not detected and the engine should If this appears, touch the ignition switch position, this warning appears for a period be turned off. with the Intelligent Key while depressing of time and then turns off. the brake pedal. For additional information, The Key System Error message warns of a Brightness indicator see “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis- malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- This indicator appears when the vehicle charge” (P. 5-13) tem. If the warning appears while the en- information display screen brightness is gine is stopped, it may be impossible to being adjusted. Key Battery Low start the engine. Chassis Control System Error: See This indicator appears when the Intelligent If the warning appears while the engine is Owner’s Manual Key battery is running out of power. running, you can drive the vehicle. However, This warning appears if there is an error in in these cases, have the system checked. It If this indicator appears, replace the bat- the Chassis Control system. Have the sys- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN tem checked. It is recommended that you tery with a new one. For additional infor- dealer for this service. mation, see “Battery replacement” (P. 8-22). visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, see “Chassis Con- trol” (P. 5-134).

Instruments and controls 2-39 Rear Door Alert is activated NOTE: Door/Trunk Open When the system is enabled, this message This system is disabled until a driver en- appears when the Rear Door Alert system ables it using the vehicle information This warning appears when a door has is active and can remind the driver to check display. For additional information, see been opened. the back seat. “How to use the vehicle information dis- • Using the steering wheel switch, a driver play” (P. 2-16). Drive sport mode indicator can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the For additional information, see “Rear Door A small “S” appears to the right of the Trans- display for a period of time. If no selection Alert” (P. 2-59). mission Shift Position indicator in the ve- is made, this message automatically hicle information display when the drive turns off after a period of time. If this mes- Check Rear Seat For All Articles sport mode is engaged. sage does not automatically turn off, it is When the system is enabled, this message not a malfunction. appears when the vehicle comes to a com- Activate the drive sport mode by pushing • Using the steering wheel switch, a driver plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the switch on the shift lever while the shift can select “Disable Alert” to disable the the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, lever is in the D (Drive) position. selected alert for the remainder of the and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes- For additional information, see “Drive sport current trip. sage alerts the driver, after a period of time, mode switch” (P. 5-21) to check for items in the rear seat after the Headlight System Error See Owner’s WARNING audible alert has been provided. Manual Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a NOTE: This warning appears when there is an er- stop within a trip temporarily dis- This system is disabled until a driver en- ror with the system. For additional informa- misses the message for that stop with- ables it using the vehicle information tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” out turning the system off. Alerts can display. For additional information, see (P. 2-50). be provided for other stops during the “How to use the vehicle information dis- trip. Selecting “Disable Alert” turns off play” (P. 2-31). Loose Fuel Cap the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert For additional information, see “Rear Door This warning appears when the fuel-filler will be provided. Alert” (P. 2-59). cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional information, see “Fuel-filler cap” (P. 3-23)

2-40 Instruments and controls Power will turn off to save the battery To turn off the Push warning, place the ig- Low Fuel This message appears in the vehicle infor- nition switch in the ON position and then in This warning appears when the fuel level in mation display after a period of time if the the LOCK position. the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or the ON as it is convenient, preferably before the position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For Rear seat belt reminder fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be additional information, see “Push-button This warning appears for 35 seconds after a small reserve of fuel in the tank when ignition switch positions” (P. 5-12). the ignition is placed in the ON position and the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty). Push brake and start the engine is started. switch to drive This warning message shows the status of Low Outside Temperature This indicator appears when the shift lever the three rear seat belts. When one of the This warning appears if the outside tem- is in the P (Park) position. rear seat belts are buckled, the corre- perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera- sponding rear seat belt indicator will ap- ture can be changed to display in Celsius or This indicator also appears when the ve- pear grey. When one of the rear seat belts Fahrenheit. For additional information, see hicle has been started using the Remote are unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat “Settings” (P. 2-32). Engine Start (if so equipped) function. belt indicator will appear red. This indicator means that the engine will After a change in buckle status, a chime will Low Washer Fluid start by pushing the ignition switch with sound and the warning will appear for an- This warning appears when the the brake pedal depressed. You can start other 35 seconds. the engine from any position of the ignition windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Release Parking Brake Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. switch. For additional information, see This warning appears when the parking “Windshield-washer fluid” (P. 8-11). Push Ignition to OFF brake is set and the vehicle is driven. Power turned off to save the battery After the Push Ignition to OFF warning ap- Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights This message appears after the ignition pears, the warning will appear if the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For addi- switch is placed in the AUTO ACC position This warning appears when the headlights tional information, see “Push-button igni- when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) are left in the ON position when exiting the tion switch positions” (P. 5-12). position. vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the

Instruments and controls 2-41 OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor- Timer Alert — Time for a mation, see “Headlight and turn signal break? CVT (AT) hot Power reduced switch” (P. 2-50). This indicator appears when the set time is This transmission has a high fluid tem- Rotate Steering Wheel and reached. The time can be set up to six perature protection mode. If the fluid tem- Push Start Switch hours. For additional information, see “Set- perature becomes too high (for example, climbing steep grades in high tempera- This indicator appears when the steering tings” (P. 2-32). tures with heavy loads, such as when tow- lock cannot be released. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air ing a trailer), engine power and, under If this indicator appears, push the ignition This warning appears when the low tire some conditions, vehicle speed will be de- switch while lightly turning the steering pressure warning light in the meter illumi- creased automatically to reduce the wheel right and left. nates and low tire pressure is detected. The chance of transmission damage. Vehicle warning appears each time the ignition speed can be controlled with the accelera- Shift to Park switch is placed in the ON position as long tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed as the low tire pressure warning light re- may be reduced. This warning appears when the ignition mains illuminated. If this warning appears, switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres- WARNING and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) sures of all four tires to the recommended position. Also, a chime sounds when the COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and When the high fluid temperature pro- ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF Loading Information label. For additional tection mode operation occurs, vehicle position. information, see “Low tire pressure warning speed may be gradually reduced. The If this warning appears, move the shift lever light” (P. 2-11) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring reduced speed may be lower than to the P (Park) position and start the engine. System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5). other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially Transmission Shift Position Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse careful when driving. If necessary, pull indicator This warning may appear if the extended to the side of the road at a safe place storage switch is not pushed in. When this This indicator shows the transmission shift and allow the transmission to return to warning appears, push in the extended position. normal operation; or have it repaired if storage switch to turn off the warning. For necessary. additional information, see “Extended storage switch” (P. 2-61), and/or “Fuses” (P. 8-19).

2-42 Instruments and controls CVT (AT) Malfunction WARNING Engine Oil Service due Service now in–––km This warning appears when there is a When the high fluid temperature pro- This distance to oil change is displayed if problem with the CVT system. If this warn- tection mode operation occurs, vehicle the distance to oil change is less than ing comes on, have the system checked. It speed may be gradually reduced. The 100 km (62 miles). reduced speed may be lower than is recommended that you visit a NISSAN Engine Stalled: Stop safely dealer for this service. other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially This message appears 30 seconds before Engine hot Power reduced careful when driving. If necessary, pull the vehicle is shut down due to an above This engine has a high fluid temperature to the side of the road at a safe place normal operating exhaust temperature. protection mode. If the fluid temperature and allow the engine to return to nor- The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and becomes too high (for example, climbing mal operation; or have it repaired if malfunction warning (red) will illuminate. steep grades in high temperatures with necessary. Have the system checked. It is recom- heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), Engine Malfunction: Power Reduced mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer im- engine power and, under some conditions, Service now mediately for this service. vehicle speed will be decreased automati- Automatic Emergency cally to reduce the chance of engine dam- This warning appears when the engine is Braking with Pedestrian age. Vehicle speed can be controlled with not operating under normal conditions. If the accelerator pedal, but the engine and this warning comes on, have the system Detection warning vehicle speed may be reduced. checked. It is recommended that you visit a indicator NISSAN dealer for this service. This indicator appears along, with an au- Engine Malfunction Service now dible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision. This warning appears when there is a problem with the engine. If this warning For additional information, see “Automatic appears, have the system checked. It is rec- Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer Detection” (P. 5-93) and “Intelligent Forward for this service. Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-105).

Instruments and controls 2-43 Driver Attention Alert— Intelligent Cruise Control BSW/RCTA indicator TakeaBreak? (ICC) indicators This indicator appears when the BSW sys- This alert appears when the system has These indicators show the Intelligent tem is engaged. detected that the driver may be displaying Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The sta- For additional information, see “Blind Spot fatigue or a lack of attention. tus is shown by color. For additional infor- Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38). Forward Driving Aids Temporarily mation, see “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-63). Currently not available Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Lane Departure Warning This message may appear when the Intel- Owner’s Manual (LDW) indicator ligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is This message appears when the front ra- engaged. dar sensor may be obstructed due to: This indicator appears when the LDW system is engaged. Under the following conditions, the ICC sys- • mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc. tem is automatically canceled: • inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) For additional information, see “Lane De- parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-31). • When the VDC operates All forward driving aids are temporarily dis- • When a wheel slips abled until the system detects that the Malfunction • When the VDC system is turned off front radar sensor is no longer obstructed. This warning appears when the Automatic The above system cannot be used in some For additional information, see the follow- Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detec- situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and ing (if so equipped): tion system or Intelligent Forward Collision VDC system is off.) • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Warning (I-FCW) system is not functioning Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-93) properly. Driver Attention Alert If one or more of these warnings appears, Malfunction • Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (P. 5-63) • Intelligent Forward Collision Warning have the system checked. It is recom- This warning appears when the Intelligent (I-FCW) (P. 5-105) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Driver Alertness system is not functioning this service. properly. For additional information, see “In- telligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” (P. 5-120). For additional information, see “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-93) or “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-105).

2-44 Instruments and controls Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual If one or more of these warnings appear, System Fault This warning appears when one or more of have the system checked. It is recom- This warning appears if there is a malfunc- the following systems are not functioning mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for tion in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) properly: this service. system. For additional information, see • Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) For additional information, see "Intelligent “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-86). • Blind Spot Warning (BSW) Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-63), “Blind Spot Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38) or “Lane Departure If one or more of these warnings appear, Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-31). This message appears when the camera have the system checked. It is recom- detects an interior temperature of more mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s than approximately 104°F (40°C). For addi- this service. Manual tional information, see “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-31). Not Available Poor Road Conditions This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional informa- Unavailable: High Camera This message may appear when the Intelli- tion, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-136). gent Cruise Control (ICC) system is engaged. Temperature Rear Automatic Braking This message appears when the camera Under the following conditions, the ICC sys- (RAB) system warning tem is automatically canceled: detects an interior temperature of more indicator than 104°F (40°C). For additional informa- • When the VDC operates This indicator appears to indicate the station, see “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)” • When a wheel slips tus of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (P. 5-27). The above system cannot be used in some system. For additional information, see Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.) “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-86). This message appears when the Blind Not Available System Malfunction Speed Limit Sign indicator Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert This warning appears when one or more of (RCTA) systems become unavailable be- the following systems (if so equipped) is This message may appear when the Traffic cause a radar blockage is detected. For not functioning properly. Sign Recognition system is engaged. additional information, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38) or “Rear Cross Traf- • Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) For additional information, see “Traffic Sign fic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-50). • Blind Spot Warning (BSW) Recognition (TSR)” (P. 5-27). • Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Instruments and controls 2-45 SECURITY SYSTEMS

Vehicle ahead detection The system helps detect vehicle theft but indicator cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the This indicator appears when the following theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo- systems are engaged and have detected a nents in all situations. Always secure your vehicle: vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, and • Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with always lock the vehicle when unattended. Pedestrian Detection Be aware of your surroundings, and park in • Intelligent Forward Collision Warning secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. (I-FCW) Many devices offering additional protec- For additional information, see “Automatic tion, such as component locks, identifica- Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian tion markers, and tracking systems, are Detection” (P. 5-93) and “Intelligent Forward available at auto supply stores and spe- Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-105). cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer LIC0301 such equipment. Check with your insur- Your vehicle may have two types of security ance company to see if you may be eligible systems: for discounts for various theft protection • Vehicle security system (if so equipped) features. • NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System How to arm the vehicle security VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so system equipped) 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if The vehicle security system provides visual so equipped). The system can be and audible alarm signals if someone armed even if the windows and moon- opens the doors when the system is roof are open. armed. It is not, however, a motion detec- 2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the tion type system that activates when a ve- vehicle. hicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

2-46 Instruments and controls 3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all • The alarm automatically turns off after a mated toll road device or automatic pay- doors. The doors can be locked with the period of time. However, the alarm reacti- ment device on the key ring), restart the Intelligent Key, door handle request vates if the vehicle is tampered with engine using the following procedures: switch (if so equipped) or power door again. The alarm can be shut off by un- 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- lock switch. locking the driver's door or trunk lid with tion for approximately 5 seconds. the key, or by pressing the button on 4. Wait 30 seconds for the system to com- the Intelligent Key. 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or plete the pre-armed phase. LOCK position and wait approximately The alarm is activated by: If during the pre-armed phase one of 10 seconds. the following occurs, the system will not • opening the door or trunk lid without us- arm: ing the key or Intelligent Key (even if the 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. • Any door is unlocked with the Intelli- door is unlocked by releasing the door 4. Restart the engine while holding the de- gent Key or door request switch (if so inside lock switch). vice (which may have caused the inter- equipped). ference) separate from the registered • The ignition switch is placed in the How to stop an activated alarm key. AUTO ACC or ON position. The alarm stops only by unlocking a door If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN • Even when the driver and/or passen- or the trunk, pressing the button on recommends placing the registered key on gers are in the vehicle, the system will the Intelligent Key, or pushing the request a separate key ring to avoid interference activate when all the doors, hood and switch (if so equipped) on the driver's or from other devices. trunk are locked with the ignition passenger's door with the Intelligent Key in switch placed in the LOCK position. range of the door handle. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. When placing the ignition switch in the FCC Notice: ON position, the system will be NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER For USA: released. SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System This device complies with Part 15 of the Vehicle security system activation will not allow the engine to start without FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device The vehicle security system will give the the use of a registered key. may not cause harmful interference, and following alarm: If the engine fails to start using a registered (2) this device must accept any interfer- • The headlights blink and the horn sounds key (for example, when interference is ence received, including interference intermittently. caused by another registered key, an auto- that may cause undesired operation. Instruments and controls 2-47 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

NOTE: CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party respon- • Do not operate the washer continu- sible for compliance could void the us- ously for more than 30 seconds. er's authority to operate the • Do not operate the washer if the equipment. windshield-washer fluid reservoir is For Canada Type A (if so equipped): empty. • Do not fill the windshield-washer This device complies with Industry fluid reservoir with windshield- Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). washer fluid concentrates at full Operation is subject to the following two strength. Some methyl alcohol conditions: (1) this device may not cause based windshield-washer fluid con- interference, and (2) this device must ac- centrates may permanently stain the cept any interference, including interfer- grille if spilled while filling the ence that may cause undesired opera- LIC4182 windshield-washer fluid reservoir. tion of the device. SWITCH OPERATION • Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid For Canada Type B (if so equipped): WARNING concentrates with water to the This device contains licence-exempt manufacturer's recommended lev- transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply In freezing temperatures the washer els before pouring the fluid into the with Innovation, Science and Economic solution may freeze on the windshield windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Development Canada’s licence-exempt and obscure your vision which may Do not use the windshield-washer RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol- lead to an accident. Warm the wind- fluid reservoir to mix the windshield- lowing two conditions: (1) This device shield with the defogger before you washer fluid concentrate and water. may not cause interference. (2) This de- wash the windshield. vice must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

2-48 Instruments and controls REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH NOTE: Pull the lever toward you O5 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several If the windshield wiper operation is in- times. terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this NOTE: occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that The Wiper with Speed feature may be is on and around the wiper arms. In ap- disabled. For additional information, see proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch again to operate the wiper. (11 cm) Type A” (P. 2-16) or “Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” The windshield wiper and washer operates (P. 2-30). when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed: LIC4039 ᭺1 Intermittent — intermittent operation To defrost the rear window glass and out- can be adjusted by turning the knob side mirror (if so equipped), start the engine toward OA (faster) or OB (slower). Also, and push the rear window defroster switch the intermittent operation speed varies on. The rear window defroster indicator in accordance with the vehicle speed. light on the switch comes on. Push the (For example, when the vehicle speed is switch again to turn the defroster off. high, the intermittent speed will be The rear window defroster automatically faster.) turns off after approximately 15 minutes. ᭺2 Low — continuous low speed operation

᭺3 High — continuous high speed operation Push the lever up O4 to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Instruments and controls 2-49 HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

CAUTION • Use the defroster when the engine is running to avoid discharging the battery. • When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

LIC2634 LIC2635 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CAUTION Lighting ᭺1 Rotate the switch to the position, Use the headlights with the engine run- and the front parking, tail, license plate, ning to avoid discharging the vehicle and instrument panel lights will come battery. on. The will illuminate in the meter.

᭺2 Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

2-50 Instruments and controls To turn on the autolight system: 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position O1 . 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset. LIC2636 To turn the autolight system off, turn the LIC4417 switch to the OFF, ,or position. Autolight system Be sure you do not put anything on top The headlights will turn on automatically at of the autolight sensor located in the top The autolight system allows the headlights twilight or in rainy weather (when the wind- side O1 of the instrument panel. The au- to turn on and off automatically. The auto- shield wiper is operated continuously). tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it light system can: is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF • Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, if it is dark out and the headlights will position and one of the doors is opened illuminate. If this occurs while parked license plate and instrument panel lights and this condition is continued, the head- automatically when it is dark. with the engine off and the ignition lights will remain on for 5 minutes. switch placed in the ON position, your • Turn off all the lights when it is light. vehicle's battery could become • Keep all the lights on for a period of time discharged. after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

Instruments and controls 2-51 High Beam Assist vehicle are turned off, when the The High Beam Assist system will operate color of the light is affected due to when the vehicle is driven at speeds of ap- foreign materials on the lights, or proximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If when the light beam is out of an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle ap- position. pears in front of your vehicle when the – When there is a sudden, continu- headlight high beam is on, the headlight ous change in brightness. will be switched to the low beam – When driving on a road that automatically. passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences. WARNING – When driving on a road with many • The High Beam Assist system is a curves. convenience but it is not a substitute – When a sign or mirror-like surface LIC2637 for safe driving operation. The driver is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle. Headlight beam select should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and – When the container, etc. being ᭺1 To select the high beam function, push switch the high beams and low beam towed by a leading vehicle is re- the lever forward. The high beam lights manually when necessary. flecting intense light. come on and the light illuminates • The high beam or low beam may not – When a headlight on your vehicle in the meter. switch automatically under the fol- is damaged or dirty. ᭺2 Pull the lever back to select the low lowing conditions. Switch the high – When the vehicle is leaning at an beam. beam and low beam manually. angle due to a punctured tire, be- – During bad weather (rain, fog, ing towed, etc. ᭺3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes snow, wind, etc.). the headlight high beams on and off. • The timing of switching the low – When a light source similar to a beam and high beam may change headlight or tail light is in the vi- under the following situations. cinity of the vehicle. – The brightness of the headlights – When the headlights of the on- of the oncoming vehicle or leading coming vehicle or the leading vehicle. 2-52 Instruments and controls – The movement and direction of When the vehicle speed lowers to less than the oncoming vehicle and the approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the head- leading vehicle. light uses the low beam. – When only one light on the on- To turn off the High Beam Assist system, coming vehicle or the leading ve- turn the headlight switch to the posi- hicle is illuminated. tion or select the low beam position by – When the oncoming vehicle or the placing the lever in the N (Neutral) position. leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle. – Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.). – The number of passengers and the amount of luggage. LIC3696 High Beam Assist operation To activate the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position O1 and push the lever forward O2 (high beam position). The High Beam Assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the headlights are turned on. If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-53 If the ambient image sensor is damaged LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS due to an accident, it is recommended that (DRL) SYSTEM (if so equipped) you visit a NISSAN dealer. The LED DRL automatically illuminate at Battery saver system (if so 100% intensity when the engine is started and the parking brake released. The LED equipped) DRL operate with the headlight switch in The light reminder chime will sound if the the OFF position. When you turn the head- headlight switch is in either the or light switch to the position for full position and when the driver’s door is illumination, the LED lights switch from LED opened with the ignition switch in the OFF DRL to the park function. or LOCK position. If the parking brake is applied before the If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi- LOCK position while the headlight switch is nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the LSD3484 in the or position, the battery parking brake is released. The LED DRL will saver function will turn off the lights after a remain on until the ignition switch is placed Ambient image sensor maintenance period of time to prevent the battery from in the OFF position. The ambient image sensor O1 for the High being discharged. Beam Assist system is located in front of It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight the inside mirror. To maintain the proper Be sure to turn the headlight switch to the switch on for interior controls and switches operation of the high beam assist system OFF or AUTO position when you leave the to illuminate, as those remain off while the and prevent a system malfunction, be sure vehicle. switch is in the OFF position. to observe the following: CAUTION WARNING • Always keep the windshield clean. • Do not attach a sticker (including trans- Do not leave the lights on when the en- When the LED DRL system is active, tail parent material) or install an accessory gine is not running for extended peri- lights on your vehicle are not on. It is near the ambient image sensor. ods of time to prevent the battery from necessary at dusk to turn on your head- • Do not strike or damage the areas being discharged. lights. Failure to do so could cause an around the ambient image sensor. Do accident injuring yourself and others. not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor. 2-54 Instruments and controls Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times. Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions. NOTE: If the turn signal light bulb malfunctions, the turn signal indicator will flash at a higher frequency when the turn signal is activated. LIC3176 LIC2638 NOTE: INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled. CONTROL Turn signal For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” Press the “+” button to increase the bright- ᭺1 Move the lever up or down to signal the (P. 2-30). ness of instrument panel lights. turning direction. When the turn is com- Press the “-” button to decrease the bright- pleted, the turn signal cancels ness of instrument panel lights. automatically. Lane change signal ᭺2 Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

Instruments and controls 2-55 HORN

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

LIC2639 LIC3568

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so WARNING equipped) Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight could affect proper operation of the position, then turn the switch to the supplemental front air bag system. fog light switch to the position. Tampering with the supplemental To turn the fog lights on with the headlight front air bag system may result in seri- switch in the AUTO position, the headlights ous personal injury. must be on, then turn the fog light switch to To sound the horn, push near the horn icon the position. on the steering wheel. To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

2-56 Instruments and controls HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

CAUTION The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. • The battery could run down if the 1. Start the engine. seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. 2. To turn on, push the switch one time for • Do not use the seat heater for ex- the HI position and one indicator light tended periods or when no one is us- will illuminate or twice for the LO posi- ing the seat. tion and both indicators will illuminate. • Do not put anything on the seat The heater is controlled by a thermostat, which insulates heat, such as a blan- automatically turning the heater on and ket, cushion or seat cover, etc. Other- off. The indicator light will remain on as wise, the seat may become long as the switch is on. overheated. 3. When the seat is warmed or before you • Do not place anything hard or heavy LIC3973 leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the on the seat or pierce it with a pin or switch off. WARNING similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. Do not use or allow occupants to use • Any liquid spilled on the heated seat the seat heater if you or the occupants should be removed immediately with cannot monitor elevated seat tem- a dry cloth. peratures or have an inability to feel • When cleaning the seat, never use pain in body parts that contact the gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any seat. Use of the seat heater by such similar materials. people could result in serious injury. • If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-57 HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off. NOTE: If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

LIC4030 The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C). Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on.

2-58 Instruments and controls E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so REAR DOOR ALERT equipped)

The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle. The Rear Door Alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” (P. 2-16) or “Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-30). When the system is enabled: LIC4213 • The system is activated when a rear door is opened and closed. When the vehicle is The E-call (SOS) button is used in combina- started and the system is activated, a vi- tion with a NissanConnect® Services sub- sual message appears in the vehicle in- scription to call for assistance in case of an formation display. For additional informa- emergency. tion, see “Rear Door Alert is activated” The E-call button is under a cover. Press the (P. 2-40). cover once O1 . The cover will drop down, • If a rear door is opened and closed but exposing the E-call button. the vehicle is not driven, the system will Pressing the button O2 will (with a paid not be activated. A rear door must be subscription) reach a response specialist opened and closed and the car driven for that will provide assistance based on the the system to activate. situation described by the vehicle’s occu- • The time interval to activate the system pant. For additional information, or to enroll between when the rear door is opened your vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/ and closed and the vehicle is started is connect or call 855–426–6628. about 10 minutes. A longer interval does not indicate a malfunction. Instruments and controls 2-59 When the Rear Door Alert system is acti- NOTE: For additional information, see “Rear Door vated: Alert is activated” (P. 2-40). If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the • When after driving the driver puts the ve- message alert will still be shown in the hicle in the P (Park) position, a notification vehicle information display but the horn message appears in the vehicle informa- will not sound. tion display with the options to “Dismiss Message” or “Disable Alert” if desired. WARNING – Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily disable for that stop. • If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no – No selection or ‘Dismiss Message” will audible alert will be provided regard- keep the alert enabled for that stop. less of rear door open/close status. • If the alert is enabled when a driver exits • There may be times when there is an the vehicle, a message will appear in the object or passenger in the rear vehicle information display that states seat(s) but the audible alert does not “Check Rear Seat for All Articles.” sound. For example, this may occur if If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected: rear seat passengers enter or exit the –– An audible horn sound will occur after vehicle during a trip. a short time unless a rear door is • The system does not directly detect opened and closed within a short time objects or passengers in the rear to deactivate the alert. seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a ––If the doors are locked before the alert rear door is opened and closed, indi- is deactivated by opening a rear door, cating that there may be something the horn will sound. in the rear seat(s). ––If the trunk is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until NOTE: after the trunk is closed. There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or passengers in the rear seat(s).

2-60 Instruments and controls POWER OUTLET EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

• Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information. • Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. • Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. • Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. LIC4337 • Avoid using power outlets when the LIC4391 The power outlet is for powering electrical air conditioner, headlights or rear The extended storage switch is used when accessories such as cellular telephones. It window defroster is on. the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. • Before inserting or disconnecting a located in the fuse panel to the left of the plug, be sure the electrical accessory steering wheel on the instrument panel. If The power outlet is powered only when the being used is turned off. ignition switch is in the ON position. any electrical equipment does not operate, • Push the plug in as far as it will go. If ensure the extended storage switch is good contact is not made, the plug pushed fully in place, as shown. CAUTION may overheat or the internal tem- • The outlet and plug may be hot dur- perature fuse may open. ing or immediately after use. • When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

Instruments and controls 2-61 STORAGE

LIC4392 LIC4393 LIC4088 Pulled position Pushed position Front door pockets FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

2-62 Instruments and controls WARNING To ensure proper operation of the driver’s and/or front passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (if so equipped), please observe the following items: • Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest. • Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest, or in the seatback pocket. LIC1328 LIC4338 SEATBACK POCKETS (if so Storage Trays (if so equipped) equipped) STORAGE TRAYS The seatback pockets are located on the WARNING back of the passenger's seat. The pockets Do not place sharp objects in the trays can be used to store maps. to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

Instruments and controls 2-63 LIC4551 LIC1026 LIC4034 GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES Open the glove box by pulling the handle. To open the console box, press in on the STORAGE lever O1 and raise the lid O2 . To open the sunglasses holder, push and WARNING To close, push the lid down until the lock release. Keep glove box lid closed while driving latches. Only store one pair of sunglasses in the to help prevent injury in an accident or holder. a sudden stop. WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s view and to help prevent an accident.

2-64 Instruments and controls CAUTION • Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. • Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

LIC4339 LIC2656 Front cup holders Rear cup holders (if so equipped) CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION • Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. • Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

Instruments and controls 2-65 WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS WARNING • Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. • To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not LIC4089 LIC4090 leave children, people who require Front bottle holder Rear bottle holder the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, Soft bottle holder the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly be- CAUTION come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people • Do not use bottle holder for any other and pets. objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure The power windows operate when the ig- people during sudden braking or an nition switch is placed in the ON position or accident. for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's • Do not use bottle holder for open liq- door is opened during this period of time, uid containers. the power to the windows is canceled.

2-66 Instruments and controls To open a window, push the switch and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached. Locking passengers' windows When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver's side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

LIC3208 LIC2309 1. Window lock button Front passenger's power window 2. Power door lock switch switch 3. Front passenger side switch The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's win- 4. Right rear passenger side dow. To open the window, push the switch 5. Left rear passenger side and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached O1 .To 6. Driver side automatic switch close the window, pull the switch and con- Driver's side power window tinue to hold it up until the desired window switch position is reached O2 . The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-67 Auto-reverse function The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING There are some small distances immediately before the closed position LIC2663 LIC4340 which cannot be detected. Make sure Rear power window switch Automatic operation that all passengers have their hands, The rear power window switches open or To fully open a window equipped with au- etc., inside the vehicle before closing close only the corresponding windows. To tomatic operation, push the window the window. open the window, push the switch and hold switch down to the second detent and re- If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, re- it down O1 . To close the window, pull the lease it; it need not be held. The window placed, or jump started, the power window switch up O2 . automatically opens all the way. To stop auto-reverse function may not operate the window, lift the switch up while the win- properly. Have the power window auto- dow is opening. reverse system re-initialized. It is recom- To fully close a window equipped with au- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for tomatic operation, pull the switch up to the this service. second detent and release it; it need not be If the control unit detects something held. The window automatically closes all caught in a window equipped with auto- the way. To stop the window, push the matic operation as it is closing, the window switch down while the window is closing. will be immediately lowered.

2-68 Instruments and controls MOONROOF (if so equipped)

When power window switch does If the power window function does not op- not operate erate properly after performing the above procedure have the system checked and If the power window automatic function repaired. It is recommended that you visit a (closing only) does not operate properly, NISSAN dealer for this service. perform the following procedure to initial- ize the power window system: 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch. 3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the LIC4249 window is closed. POWER MOONROOF 4. Release the power window switch. Op- The moonroof will only operate when the erate the window by the automatic ignition switch is placed in the ON position. function to confirm the initialization is The power moonroof is operational for a complete. The power window automati- period of time, even if the ignition switch is cally opens or closes depending on if the placed in the AUTO ACC or OFF position. If automatic down or up function is the driver's door is opened during this pe- selected. riod of time, the power to the moonroof is 5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for canceled. other windows. Sliding the moonroof To fully open or close the moonroof, push the switch to the open O1 or closed O2 position and release it; it need not be held.

Instruments and controls 2-69 The roof will automatically open or close all 5. Release the switch after the moonroof WARNING the way. To stop the roof, push the switch completes one full cycle from the tilt up once more while it is opening or closing. position to the closed position, then to There are some small distances imme- the open position, and again to the fully diately before the closed position Tilting the moonroof closed position. which cannot be detected. Make sure To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then 6. Check if the moonroof switch operates that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing push the switch O3 and release it; it need normally. not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, the moonroof. If the moonroof does not operate properly push the switch to the tilt down position after performing the procedure above, 2 . When closing O have your vehicle serviced. It is recom- If the control unit detects something mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for caught in the moonroof as it moves to the Resetting the moonroof switch this service. If the moonroof does not operate properly, front, the moonroof will immediately open perform the following procedure to initial- Auto-reverse function (when backward. ize the moonroof operation system. closing or tilting down the When tilting down 1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by moonroof) If the control unit detects something repeatedly pushing the moonroof caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the The auto-reverse function can be acti- switch to the closed position 2 . moonroof will immediately tilt up. O vated when the moonroof is closed or 2. Push and hold the switch to the closed tilted down by automatic operation when If the auto-reverse function malfunctions position O2 for approximately 15 the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- and repeats opening or tilting up the seconds. sition or for a period of time after the igni- moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down tion switch is placed in the OFF position. switch within 5 seconds after it happens; 3. Release the switch after the moonroof the moonroof will fully close gradually. Depending on the environment or driv- moves up, down, then back to the full tilt Make sure nothing is caught in the ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- up position. moonroof. tion may be activated if an impact or 4. Push and hold the switch to the closed load similar to something being caught position O2 . in the moonroof occurs.

2-70 Instruments and controls INTERIOR LIGHTS

WARNING NOTE: The step lights (if so equipped) illumi- • In an accident you could be thrown nate when the driver and passenger from the vehicle through an open doors are opened regardless of the inte- moonroof. Always use seat belts and rior light switch position. These lights child restraints. will turn off automatically after a period • Do not allow anyone to stand up or of time while doors are open to prevent extend any portion of their body out the battery from becoming discharged. of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the CAUTION moonroof is closing. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- CAUTION sult in a discharged battery. • Remove water drops, snow, ice or LIC4033 sand from the moonroof before ᭺1 The interior light can be turned on re- opening. gardless of door position. The light will • Do not place heavy objects on the go off after a period of time unless the moonroof or surrounding area. ignition switch is placed in the ON position when any door is opened.

Sunshade ᭺2 The interior lights can be set to operate Open and close the sunshade by sliding it when the doors are opened. To turn off forward or backward. the interior lights when a door is open, push the switch; the interior lights will If the moonroof does not close not illuminate, regardless of door position. Have your moonroof checked and re- The lights will go off when the ignition paired. It is recommended that you visit a switch is placed in the ON position, or NISSAN dealer for this service. the driver's door is closed and locked.

Instruments and controls 2-71 TRUNK LIGHT

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off. The light will go off after a period of time if the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, see “Exterior and interior lights” (P. 8-26).

LIC4035 LIC4041 MAP LIGHTS PERSONAL LIGHTS To turn the map lights on, push the To turn the rear personal lights on, push the switches. To turn them off, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch switches again. again.

CAUTION CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. sult in a discharged battery.

2-72 Instruments and controls 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys...... 3-2 Canceling a Remote Engine Start ...... 3-19 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System notwork...... 3-20 keys...... 3-3 Hood ...... 3-21 Doors ...... 3-4 Trunk lid ...... 3-22 Locking with key ...... 3-5 Trunk lid release switch ...... 3-22 Locking with inside lock knob ...... 3-5 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-22 Locking with power door lock switch ...... 3-6 Interior trunk access ...... 3-23 Automatic door locks ...... 3-6 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-23 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Opener operation ...... 3-23 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-7 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-24 Operating range ...... 3-9 Steering wheel ...... 3-26 Door locks/unlocks precaution ...... 3-9 Tilt operation ...... 3-26 NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation ...... 3-10 Telescopic operation ...... 3-26 How to use the remote keyless entry Sun visors ...... 3-26 function ...... 3-13 Vanity mirrors ...... 3-27 Warning signals ...... 3-15 Card holder ...... 3-27 Troubleshooting guide (Continuously Mirrors ...... 3-28 Variable Transmission only) ...... 3-16 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror Troubleshooting guide (if so equipped) ...... 3-28 (Manual Transmission only) ...... 3-17 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...... 3-18 (if so equipped) ...... 3-28 Remote Engine Start operating range ...... 3-18 Outside mirrors ...... 3-29 Remote starting the vehicle ...... 3-19 Extending engine run time ...... 3-19 KEYS

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number. LPD2874 LPD2875 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) CAUTION 1. Intelligent Keys (two sets) Never leave the keys in the vehicle. Listed below are conditions or occur- 2. Mechanical key As many as four Intelligent Keys can be rences which will damage the Intelli- registered and used with one vehicle. The gent Key: 3. Key number plate (one plate) new keys must be registered prior to use • Do not allow the Intelligent Key, with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® which contains electrical compo- Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is rec- nents, to come into contact with wa- Your vehicle can only be driven with the ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ter or salt water. This could affect the Intelligent Keys which are registered to for this service. Since the registration pro- system function. your vehicle’s Intelligent Key components cess requires erasing all memory in the and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Intelligent Key components, when register- • Do not drop the Intelligent Key. components. ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent • Do not strike the Intelligent Key Keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer. sharply against another object. • Do not change or modify the Intelli- gent Key. 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments • Wetting may damage the Intelligent CAUTION Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is com- Always carry the mechanical key in- pletely dry. stalled in the Intelligent Key slot. • Do not place the Intelligent Key for an NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). SYSTEM KEYS • Do not attach the Intelligent Key with Additional or replacement keys: a key holder that contains a magnet. If you still have a key, the key number is not • Do not place the Intelligent Key near necessary when you need extra NISSAN equipment that produces a magnetic Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex- field, such as a TV, audio equipment isting key can be duplicated without know- and personal computers. ing the key number. As many as four If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, SPA1951 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys NISSAN recommends erasing the ID can be used with one vehicle. You should code of that Intelligent Key from the Mechanical key bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- vehicle. This may prevent the unau- tem keys that you have to the NISSAN The Intelligent Key contains the mechani- dealer for registration. This is because the thorized use of the Intelligent Key to cal key. operate the vehicle. For information re- registration process will erase the memory garding the erasing procedure, it is rec- To remove the mechanical key, release the of all key codes previously registered into ommended that you visit a NISSAN lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af- ter the registration process, these compo- dealer. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it nents will only recognize keys coded into into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System returns to the lock position. during registration. Any key that is not Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock given to the dealer at the time of registra- the driver's door. tion will no longer be able to start your For additional information, see “Doors” vehicle. (P. 3-4).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 DOORS

CAUTION When the doors are locked using one of the • To help avoid risk of injury or death following methods, the doors cannot be through unintended operation of the Do not allow the immobilizer system opened using the inside or outside door vehicle and/or its systems, including key, which contains an electrical tran- handles. The doors must be unlocked to entrapment in windows or inadver- sponder, to come into contact with wa- open the doors. tent door lock activation, do not ter or salt water. This could affect sys- leave children, people who require tem function. WARNING the assistance of others or pets unat- • Always have the doors locked while tended in your vehicle. Additionally, driving. Along with the use of seat the temperature inside a closed ve- belts, this provides greater safety in hicle on a warm day can quickly be- the event of an accident by helping to come high enough to cause a signifi- prevent persons from being thrown cant risk of injury or death to people from the vehicle. This also helps keep and pets. children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. • Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments For additional information, see “Security systems” (P. 2-46).

LPD2919 LPD2862 Driver's side Inside lock LOCKING WITH KEY LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door using the mechanical key, To lock the door without the key, move the turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle inside lock knob to the lock position O1 , O1 . This will only lock the corresponding then close the door. door and will not activate the security sys- To unlock the door without the key, move tem. To arm the security system, press the the inside lock knob to the unlock position button on the Intelligent Key. O2 . To unlock the corresponding door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle O2 . This will only unlock the corresponding door and will not disarm the security system.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 Lockout protection NOTE: When any door is open and the power door The automatic door unlock function can lock switch is moved to the lock position, all be changed using the “Vehicle Settings” doors will lock. If the Intelligent Key is left in of the vehicle information display. the vehicle after all the doors are closed, all For additional information, see “Vehicle doors will unlock automatically and a information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) chime will sound. Type A” (P. 2-16) or “Vehicle information These functions help to prevent the Intelli- display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-30). gent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS • All doors lock automatically when the ve- LPD2309 hicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Driver’s and passenger’s side • Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR – All doors unlock automatically when LOCK SWITCH the transmission is placed in the P To lock all the doors without a key, push the (Park) or OFF position. door lock switch (driver's or front passen- • Manual transmission (if so equipped) ger's side) to the lock position O1 . When – All doors unlock automatically when locking the door this way, be certain not to the ignition is placed in the OFF leave the key inside the vehicle. position. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) to the unlock position O2 .

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

WARNING CAUTION • Radio waves could adversely affect • Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key electric medical equipment. Those with you when operating the vehicle. who use a pacemaker should contact • Never leave the Intelligent Key in the the electric medical equipment vehicle when you leave the vehicle. manufacturer for the possible influences before use. The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio • The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves. The Intelligent Key system trans- waves when the buttons are pressed. mits weak radio waves. Environmental The FAA advises the radio waves may conditions may interfere with the opera- affect aircraft navigation and com- tion of the Intelligent Key system under the munication systems. Do not operate following operating conditions: the Intelligent Key while on an air- LPD3085 plane. Make sure the buttons are not • When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight. as a TV tower, power station and broad- Child safety locks help prevent the rear casting station. doors from being opened accidentally, es- The Intelligent Key system can operate all • When in possession of wireless equip- pecially when small children are in the the door locks using the remote control ment, such as a cellular telephone, trans- vehicle. function or pushing the request switch (if ceiver or a CB radio. so equipped) on the vehicle without taking The child safety lock levers are located on the key out from a pocket or purse. The • When the Intelligent Key is in contact with the edge of the rear doors. operating environment and/or conditions or covered by metallic materials. • When any type of radio wave remote con- When the lever is in the unlock position O2 , may affect the Intelligent Key system the door can be opened from the outside operation. trol is used nearby. or the inside. Be sure to read the following before using • When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal When the lever is in the LOCK position 1 , the Intelligent Key system. O computer. the door can be opened only from the outside. • When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 In such cases, correct the operating condi- CAUTION If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN tions before using the Intelligent Key func- recommends erasing the ID code of that tion or use the mechanical key. Listed below are conditions or occur- Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may Although the life of the battery varies de- rences which will damage the Intelli- prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- pending on the operating conditions, the gent Key: gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- battery’s life is approximately two years. If • Do not allow the Intelligent Key, mation regarding the erasing procedure, it the battery is discharged, replace it with a which contains electrical compo- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN new one. nents, to come into contact with wa- dealer. ter or salt water. This could affect the Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re- system function. ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio • Do not drop the Intelligent Key. waves, such as signals from a TV and per- • Do not strike the Intelligent Key sonal computer, the battery life may be- sharply against another object. come shorter. • Do not change or modify the Intelli- For information regarding replacement of gent Key. a battery, see “Battery replacement” • Wetting may damage the Intelligent (P. 8-22). Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is com- As many as four Intelligent Keys can be pletely dry. registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of • Do not place the Intelligent Key for an additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom- extended period in an area where mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). • Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet. • Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch (if so equipped) O1 . If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches (if so equipped) may not function. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelli- LPD2554 gent Key, to push the request switch (if so DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS equipped) to lock/unlock the doors. PRECAUTION • Do not push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will LPD2402 cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent OPERATING RANGE Key is outside the vehicle. The Intelligent Key functions can only be • After locking with the door handle reused when the Intelligent Key is within the quest switch (if so equipped), verify the specified operating range from the request doors are securely locked by testing switch (if so equipped) O1 . them.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 • To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors. • Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped). The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD3086 LPD3087 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® Locking doors OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors and trunk lid without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag. When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors and trunk lid by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) within the range of operation.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 5. The hazard warning lights flash twice CAUTION and the outside chime sounds twice. • When locking the doors using the re- NOTE: quest switch, make sure to have the • Doors and trunk lid lock with the door Intelligent Key in your possession handle request switch (if so equipped) before operating the request switch while the ignition switch is not in the (if so equipped) to prevent the Intelli- LOCK position. gent Key from being left in the • Doors and trunk lid lock by pushing the vehicle. door handle request switch (if so • The request switch is operational equipped) while any door is open. Only only when the Intelligent Key has driver door lock with mechanical key been detected by the Intelligent Key even if any door is open. system. • Doors do not lock with the door handle LPD2401 request switch (if so equipped) with Lockout protection 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle; a To prevent the Intelligent Key from being tion (Continuously Variable Transmis- beep sounds to warn you. However, accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout sion only) or the N (Neutral) position and when an Intelligent Key is inside the protection is equipped with the Intelligent apply the parking brake (manual trans- vehicle, doors can be locked with an- Key system. other Intelligent Key. mission only), place the ignition switch in When the driver’s side door is open, the the LOCK position and make sure you WARNING doors are locked and then the Intelligent carry the Intelligent Key with you. Key is put inside the vehicle and all the 2. Close all doors. After locking the doors using the re- doors are closed; the lock will automati- quest switch, make sure that the doors cally unlock. A chime will sound to warn 3. Push any door handle request switch (if have been securely locked by operat- you. However, if an Intelligent Key is inside so equipped) 1 while carrying the Intel- O ing the door handles. Failure to follow the vehicle with all the doors closed, the ligent Key with you. these instructions may result in inad- doors can be locked with another Intelli- 4. All doors and the trunk will lock. vertently unlocking the doors, which gent Key. may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 NOTE: The doors may not lock when the Intelli- gent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intel- ligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions: • When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel. LPD3087 LPD2165 • When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf. Unlocking doors If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. • When the Intelligent Key is placed in- 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. side the glove box or a storage bin. Returning the door handle to its original 2. Push the door handle request switch (if position will unlock the door. If the door • When the Intelligent Key is placed in- so equipped) O1 . does not unlock after returning the door side the door pockets. handle, push the door handle request • When the Intelligent Key is placed on 3. The hazard warning lights flash once switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door. or under the spare tire area. and the outside chime sounds once. All doors and trunk lid will be locked auto- • When the Intelligent Key is placed in- 4. Push the door handle request switch matically unless one of the following op- side or near metallic materials. (if so equipped) O1 again within 30 sec- erations is performed within 30 seconds • When the Intelligent Key battery is onds to unlock all doors and the trunk after pushing the request switch (if so discharged. lid. equipped): • Opening any door or the trunk lid. • Pushing the ignition switch.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Using the interior lights HOW TO USE THE REMOTE The interior lights illuminate for a period of KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION time when a door is unlocked and the inte- The remote keyless entry function can op- rior lights switch is not in the OFF position. erate all door locks using the remote key- The interior lights can be turned off without less function of the Intelligent Key. The re- waiting by performing one of the following mote keyless function can operate at a operations: distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve- • Placing the ignition switch in the ON hicle. The operating distance depends position. upon the conditions around the vehicle. • Locking the doors with the request The remote keyless entry function will not switch (if so equipped) or the Intelligent function under the following conditions: Key. • The Intelligent Key is not within the opera- • Switching the interior light switch to the tional range. OFF position. LPD3088 • The doors or the trunk are open or not For additional information, see “Interior Opening the trunk lid closed securely. lights” (P. 2-71). 1. Push the trunk opener request switch (if • The Intelligent Key battery is discharged. so equipped) OA while carrying the Intel- ligent Key with you. CAUTION 2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will When locking the doors using the Intel- sound three times. ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 3. Press the button on the Intelligent Key. 4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once. 5. All doors and the trunk will be locked.

WARNING After locking the doors using the Intel- ligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently LPD3601 LPD3603 unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) vehicle. 1. (remote engine start) button 1. (lock) button Unlocking doors 2. (lock) button 2. (unlock) button 1. Press the button on the Intelligent 3. (unlock) button 3. (trunk) button Key to unlock the driver’s door. 4. (trunk) button 4. (panic) button 2. The hazard warning lights flash once. 5. (panic) button 3. Press the button again within 30 seconds to unlock all doors and trunk. Locking doors 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. 2. Close all doors.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments All doors and trunk lid will be locked auto- Releasing the trunk lid To activate: Press and hold the and matically unless one of the following op- buttons for at least 2 seconds once Press the button for 0.5 seconds to erations is performed within 30 seconds more. open the trunk lid. The trunk release button after pressing the button: will not operate when the ignition switch is The hazard warning lights will flash once • Opening any doors or trunk lid. placed in the ON position. and the horn will sound once to confirm • Pushing the ignition switch. that the horn beep feature has been Using the panic alarm reactivated. Using the interior lights If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- Deactivating the horn beep feature does The interior lights illuminate for a period of ened, you may activate the panic alarm to not silence the horn if the alarm is time when a door is unlocked and the inte- call attention by pressing and holding the triggered. rior lights switch is not in the OFF position. button on the Intelligent Key for lon- WARNING SIGNALS The interior lights can be turned off without ger than 0.5 seconds. To help prevent the vehicle from moving waiting by performing one of the following The panic alarm and headlights will stay on unexpectedly by erroneous operation of operations: for a period of time. the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the • Placing the ignition switch in the ON The panic alarm stops when: vehicle from being stolen, a chime or position. • It has run for a period of time. buzzer sounds from inside and outside the • Locking the doors with the request • (unlock) button is pressed on the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the switch (if so equipped) or the Intelligent Intelligent Key. instrument panel. Key. When a chime or beep sounds or a warning • Switching the interior light switch to the Silencing the horn beep feature is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle OFF position. If desired, the horn beep feature can be and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, see “Interior deactivated using the Intelligent Key. For additional information, see “Trouble- lights” (P. 2-71). To deactivate: Press and hold the shooting guide” (P. 3-16) and “Vehicle infor- and buttons for at least 2 seconds. mation display” (P. 2-16). The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that (Continuously Variable are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve- Transmission only) hicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The Shift to Park warning light in the When pushing the ignition switch to The shift lever is not in the P (Park) po- Make sure that the shift lever is in the instrument panel illuminates and the stop the engine sition. P (Park) position. inside chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC posi- Place the ignition switch in the OFF When opening the driver's door A warning chime sounds continuously. tion. position. When pushing the door handle re- The outside chime sounds for a few The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with quest switch (if so equipped) to lock seconds. or the trunk. you. the door The Shift to Park warning light in the The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Make sure that the shift lever is in the instrument panel illuminates and the position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position and place the ignition outside chime sounds continuously. P (Park) position. switch in the OFF position. Few seconds after closing the driver’s door, the Rear Door Alert warning mes- Check the back seat for all articles, sage appears on the display, the horn When closing the doors The Rear Door Alert is activated. press the OK button to clear the Rear sounds six times, or a Check Back Seat Door Alert warning message. For All Articles warning appears on the display. The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with mately 3 seconds and all the doors or the trunk. you. unlock. The outside chime sounds for few sec- Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with When closing the trunk lid The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. onds and the trunk lid opens. you. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with When pushing the button on The outside chime sounds for a few or the trunk. you. the Intelligent Key to lock the door seconds and all the doors unlock. A door is not closed securely. Close the doors securely.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Manual Transmission only) Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The inside warning chime sounds con- The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF When the parking brake is fully applied tinuously. position. position. When pushing the door handle re- The outside chime sounds for a few The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle quest switch (if so equipped) to lock Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with seconds. or the trunk. the door The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. or the trunk. The Key System Error warning mes- When closing the doors sage in the vehicle information display appears, the outside chime sounds The ignition switch is in the ACC posi- Place the ignition switch in the OFF three times and the inside warning tion. position. chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

• Vehicles with an automatic climate con- REMOTE ENGINE START trol system will default to either a heating OPERATING RANGE or cooling mode depending on outside and cabin temperatures. For additional WARNING information, see “Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control” (P. 4-40). • To help avoid risk of injury or death Laws in some local communities may re- through unintended operation of the strict or prohibit the use of the Remote vehicle and/or its systems, including Engine Start, or the amount of time a entrapment in windows or inadver- parked engine may idle. For example, some tent door lock activation, do not laws require a person using Remote Engine leave children, people who require Start to have the vehicle in view or may the assistance of others or pets unat- restrict idling time except in freezing tem- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, peratures. Check local regulations for any the temperature inside a closed ve- LPD2995 requirements. hicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a signifi- The button will be on the NISSAN Other conditions may affect the function of cant risk of injury or death to people Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi- and pets. Engine Start. This feature allows the engine tional information, see “Conditions the Re- to start from outside the vehicle. • Do not use Remote Engine Start in mote Engine Start will not work” (P. 3-20). closed spaces such as a garage. Do The following features may be affected Other conditions can affect the perfor- not breathe exhaust gases; they con- when the Remote Engine Start feature is mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. tain colorless and odorless carbon used: For additional information, see “NISSAN In- monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan- • Vehicles with a manual climate control telligent Key®” (P. 3-7). gerous. It can cause unconscious- system will default to the last used heat- ness or death. ing or cooling mode.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments CAUTION The following events will occur when the • The second 10 minutes will start after the engine starts: first Remote Engine Start request ends. When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- • The parking lights will turn on and remain For example, if the engine has been run- charged or other strong radio wave on as long as the engine is running. ning for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are sources are present near the operating • The doors will be locked and the climate added, the engine will run for a total of 20 location, the Intelligent Key operating control system may come on. minutes. range becomes narrower, and the Intel- • The engine will continue to run for 10 min- • Extending engine run time will bring you ligent Key may not function properly. utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time to the two Remote Engine Start limit. The Remote Engine Start function can only for an additional 10 minutes. For addi- A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, be used when the Intelligent Key is within tional information, see “Extending engine or a single start with an extension, are al- the specified operating range from the run time” (P. 3-19). lowed between ignition cycles. vehicle. Press and hold the brake then push the The ignition switch must be cycled to the The Remote Engine Start operating range push-button ignition switch to the ON po- ON position and then back to the OFF po- is approximately 295 ft (90 m) from the sition before driving. For additional infor- sition before the Remote Engine Start pro- vehicle. mation, see “Driving the vehicle” (P. 5-16). cedure can be used again. REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE To use the Remote Engine Start feature to The Remote Engine Start feature can be START start the engine perform the following: extended one time by performing the To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” 1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle. one of the following: (P. 3-19). Run time will be calculated as • Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and 2. Press the button to lock all doors. follows: press until the parking lights turn off. 3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the • The first 10-minute run time will start • Turn on the hazard warning flashers. when the Remote Engine Start function is button until the turn signal lights • Cycle the ignition switch on and then off. flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the performed. • The extended engine run time has vehicle is not within view press and hold expired. the button for at least 2 seconds. • The first 10 minute timer has expired. • The engine hood has been opened.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 • The shift lever is moved out of park. • The doors are not closed and locked. • The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into • The trunk is open. the vehicle. • The I-Key System Error warning or any • The ignition switch is pushed without an engine-related warning shows in the ve- Intelligent Key in the vehicle. hicle information display. • The ignition switch is pushed with an In- • The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into telligent Key in the vehicle but the brake the vehicle. pedal is not depressed. • Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE have already been used. START WILL NOT WORK • The vehicle is not in P (Park). The Remote Engine Start will not operate if • There is a detected registered key already any of the following conditions are present: inside of the vehicle. • The ignition switch is placed in the ON The Remote Engine Start may display a position. warning or indicator in the vehicle informa- • The hood is not securely closed. tion display. For additional information, see • The hazard indicator lights are on. “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) • The engine is still running. The engine Type A” (P. 2-16) or “Vehicle information dis- must be completely stopped. Wait at play 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-30). least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time. • The button is not pressed and held for at least 2 seconds. • The button is not pressed and held within 5 seconds of pressing the lock button. • The brake is pressed.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments HOOD

WARNING • Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. • If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD3084 1. Pull the hood lock release handle O1 lo- Hold the coated parts when removing or cated on the lower door pillar until the resetting the support rod. Avoid direct hood springs up slightly. contact with the metal parts, as they may be hot immediately after the engine 2. Locate the lever 2 in between the hood O has been stopped. and grille and push the lever sideways with your fingertips. When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower the hood 3. Raise the hood O3 . to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the 4. Remove the support rod O4 and insert it latch and release it. This allows proper en- into the slot marked by an arrow. gagement of the hood latch. NOTE: Do not place the support rod in a location other than the designated slot.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 TRUNK LID

• Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys. To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch. To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

LPD2868 NOTE: LPD2081 Instrument panel You can open the trunk lid with the Intel- INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH ligent Key. For additional information, see “Releasing the trunk lid” (P. 3-15). WARNING WARNING Closely supervise children when they • Do not drive with the trunk lid open. are around cars to prevent them from This could allow dangerous exhaust playing and becoming locked in the gases to be drawn into the vehicle. trunk where they could be seriously in- For additional information, see “Ex- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear haust gas (carbon monoxide)” seatback and trunk lid securely latched (P. 5-4). when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys. The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk. 3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the WARNING illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The • Never allow anyone to ride in the release handle is made of a material that cargo area or on the rear seat when it glows in the dark after a brief exposure to is in the fold-down position. Use of ambient light. these areas by passengers without The handle is located inside the trunk com- proper restraints could result in seri- partment on the interior of the trunk lid. ous injury or death in an accident or sudden stop. INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS • Properly secure all cargo with ropes The trunk can be accessed from the driv- or straps to help prevent it from slid- er’s side or the passenger side of the rear ing or shifting. Do not place cargo seat. higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured 1. Move the front seat to the most forward cargo could cause personal injury. LPD3090 position. • When returning the seatbacks to the OPENER OPERATION 2. Pull up on the knob on the rear seatback. upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched The fuel-filler door release is located below 3. Fold down the driver’s or passenger’s position. If they are not completely the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler side seatback. secured, passengers may be injured door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel- For additional information, see “Folding in an accident or sudden stop. filler door securely. rear seat” (P. 1-6). • Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 FUEL-FILLER CAP • Do not fill a portable fuel container in • The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes- WARNING the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity sage will appear if the fuel-filler cap can cause an explosion of flammable is not properly tightened. It may take • Gasoline is extremely flammable and liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or a few driving trips for the message to highly explosive under certain condi- trailer. To reduce the risk of serious be displayed. Failure to tighten the tions. You could be burned or seri- injury or death when filling portable fuel-filler cap properly after the ously injured if it is misused or mis- fuel containers: LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message handled. Always stop the engine and – Always place the container on the appears may cause the Mal- do not smoke or allow open flames or ground when filling. function Indicator Light (MIL) to sparks near the vehicle when illuminate. refueling. – Do not use electronic devices when filling. • Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap • Do not attempt to top off the fuel – Keep the pump nozzle in contact properly may cause the Mal- tank after the fuel pump nozzle function Indicator Light (MIL) to illu- shuts off automatically. Continued with the container while you are filling it. minate. If the light illuminates refueling may cause fuel overflow, because the fuel-filler cap is loose or resulting in fuel spray and possibly a – Use only approved portable fuel missing, tighten or install the cap and fire. containers for flammable liquid. continue to drive the vehicle. The • Use only an original equipment type light should turn off after a few fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has CAUTION driving trips. If the light does not a built-in safety valve needed for turn off after a few driving trips, have proper operation of the fuel system • Do not use E–15 or E–85 fuel in your the vehicle inspected. It is recom- and emission control system. An in- vehicle. For additional information, mended that you visit a NISSAN correct cap can result in a serious see “Fuel recommendation” (P. 10-4). dealer for this service. malfunction and possible injury. It • For additional information, see “Mal- could also cause the Malfunc- function Indicator Light (MIL)” (P.2-9). tion Indicator Light (MIL) to come on. • If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, • Never pour fuel into the throttle body flush it away with water to avoid to attempt to start your vehicle. paint damage.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3. Press the OK button on the steering wheel to turn off the Loose Fuel Cap warning after tightening the fuel-filler cap.

LPD3091 LPD3029 To remove the fuel-filler cap: LOOSE FUEL CAP warning 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in to remove. the vehicle information display when the 2. Loop the tether strap around the hook fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may 1 while refueling. O take a few driving trips for the message to To install the fuel-filler cap: be displayed. To turn off the warning, do the 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the following: fuel-filler tube. 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a previously described as soon as single click is heard. possible. 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS

WARNING • Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. • Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious LPD3092 or fatal injuries from the air bag if you TILT OPERATION are up against it when it inflates. Al- ways sit back against the seatback Pull the lock lever down O1 and adjust the and as far away as practical from the steering wheel up or down O2 to the de- steering wheel. Always use the seat sired position. belts. Push the lock lever up O1 firmly lock the steering wheel in place. LPD2154 TELESCOPIC OPERATION 1. To block glare from the front, swing Pull the lock lever down O1 and adjust the down the main sun visor O1 . steering wheel forward or backward O3 to 2. To block glare from the side, remove the the desired position. main sun visor from the center mount Push the lock lever up O1 firmly to lock the and swing the visor to the side O2 . steering wheel in place.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out as needed O3 .

CAUTION • Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position. • Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

LPD3093 LPD3156 VANITY MIRRORS Driver’s and passenger’s side To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun CARD HOLDER visor down and flip open the mirror cover. To use the card holder, slide card into the Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and clip. Do not view information while operat- turn on when the mirror cover is open. ing the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 MIRRORS

NOTE: Do not hang any objects over the sensors O1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation. With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the button as described: • To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the button. The indicator light will turn off. • To turn on the anti-glare feature, press the button again. The indicator light WPD0126 WPD0446 will turn on. MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE MIRROR (if so equipped) REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) Use the night position O1 to reduce glare The inside mirror is designed so that it au- from the headlights of vehicles behind you tomatically dims during night time condi- at night. tions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The Use the day position O2 when driving in daylight hours. automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. WARNING The indicator light O2 will illuminate when Use the night position only when nec- the automatic anti-glare feature is essary, because it reduces rear view operating. clarity.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments WARNING • Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. • Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

LPD2452 LPD2112 OUTSIDE MIRRORS Manual folding outside mirrors The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the Pull the outside mirror toward the door to ON position. fold it. Move the small switch O1 to select the right Heated mirrors (if so equipped) or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de- Some outside mirrors can be heated to sired position using the large switch O2 . Move the switch to the center (neutral) po- defog, defrost or de-ice for improved visibil- sition to prevent accidentally moving the ity. For additional information, see “Rear mirror. window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” (P. 2-49).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual ...... 4-2 How to park with predicted course Control panel buttons ...... 4-3 lines ...... 4-21 How to use the touch-screen ...... 4-4 How to switch the display ...... 4-22 How to use the MENU button ...... 4-5 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-23 (brightness control) button ...... 4-7 Intelligent Around View Monitor system How to use the VOL (volume) knob / limitations ...... 4-23 PUSH (power)button...... 4-7 System maintenance ...... 4-25 Selecting menu from launch bar ...... 4-7 Moving Object Detection (MOD) RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...... 4-8 (if so equipped) ...... 4-26 RearView Monitor system operation ...... 4-9 MOD system operation ...... 4-27 How to read the displayed lines ...... 4-9 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) .....4-28 Difference between predicted and MOD system limitations ...... 4-29 actual distances ...... 4-10 System maintenance ...... 4-30 How to park with predicted course Vents ...... 4-30 lines (if so equipped) ...... 4-11 Heater and air conditioner (manual) Adjusting the screen ...... 4-13 (if so equipped) ...... 4-31 How to turn on and off predicted Controls ...... 4-32 course lines (if so equipped) ...... 4-13 Heater operation ...... 4-32 RearView Monitor system limitations ...... 4-13 Air conditioner operation ...... 4-33 System maintenance ...... 4-14 Air flow charts ...... 4-34 Intelligent Around View Monitor Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) ...... 4-15 (if so equipped) ...... 4-38 Intelligent Around View Monitor system Automatic operation ...... 4-39 operation ...... 4-16 Manual operation ...... 4-40 Difference between predicted and Operating tips ...... 4-41 actual distances ...... 4-19 Servicing air conditioner...... 4-42 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-65 Audio system ...... 4-43 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ...... 4-65 Radio ...... 4-43 Regulatory information ...... 4-67 FM radio reception ...... 4-43 Using the system ...... 4-67 AM radio reception ...... 4-43 Indicators ...... 4-69 Audio operation precautions ...... 4-44 Control buttons ...... 4-69 FM/AM radio ...... 4-47 Bluetooth® connecting procedure ...... 4-70 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Voice commands ...... 4-71 Port...... 4-52 Phone display screen ...... 4-73 iPod®* player operation ...... 4-55 Making a call ...... 4-74 Bluetooth® streaming audio ...... 4-58 Receiving/Ending a call ...... 4-74 Steering wheel switch for audio control .....4-61 During a call ...... 4-75 Antenna...... 4-62 Text messaging (if so equipped) ...... 4-75 USB/iPod® charging port (if so equipped) ...... 4-62 Bluetooth® connections screen ...... 4-79 Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) ...... 4-62 Phone and text message settings ...... 4-80 Requirements ...... 4-63 Volume & beeps...... 4-82 Operating Siri® Eyes Free ...... 4-63 iPod®/iPhone® ...... 4-82 Troubleshooting guide ...... 4-64 NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s • In case you notice any foreign object Manual that includes the following infor- in the system hardware, spill liquid mation. on it, or notice smoke or smell com- • NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped) ing from it, stop using the system im- • Audio system mediately. Ignoring such conditions • Apple CarPlay® may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that • Android Auto TM you visit a NISSAN dealer for • Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system servicing. • Viewing information • Other settings • Voice recognition • General system information

WARNING • Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. • Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock. • Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS

* For additional information regarding the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control button, see “Bluetooth® Hands- Free Phone System” (P. 4-65). When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: “Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen.

LHA4960 1. Display screen 5. button* 2. TUNE·SCROLL knob / PUSH SOUND 6. MENU button button 7. (brightness control) button 3. BACK button 8. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) 4. DISP button button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving. CAUTION The on-screen functions that are not avail- • The glass display screen may break if able while driving will be “grayed out” or it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If muted. the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury. WARNING • To clean the display, never use a • ALWAYS give your full attention to rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner driving. or any kind of solvent or paper towel • Avoid using vehicle features that with a chemical cleaning agent. They could distract you. If distracted, you will scratch or deteriorate the panel. could lose control of your vehicle and • Do not splash any liquid such as wa- cause an accident. ter or car fragrance on the display. LHA5318 Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction. Touch-screen operation

Menu Item Result Selecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “ ”keyto return to the previous screen. Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “−” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time. Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters. 123 Touch to manually enter numbers. OK Completes the character input.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Touch-screen maintenance If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

LHA5319 LHA5318 HOW TO USE THE MENU BUTTON To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle: 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Touch the “Settings” key. 3. Touch the desired item.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 Menu item Result Settings Touch to change the following settings. Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional information, see “USB connections screen” (P. 4-53) and “Bluetooth® connections screen” (P. 4-79). Phone For additional information, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” (P. 4-65). Sound For additional information, see “Audio system” (P. 4-43). Volume & Beeps For additional information, see “Volume & beeps” (P. 4-82). Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings. On-screen Clock Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen. Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12 hour or 24 hour formats. Daylight Savings Time Touch to adjusts the daylight saving time to on or off. Set Clock Manually Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes. System Voice For additional information, see “Settings” (P. 4-73). Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings. Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear. Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, see “Adjusting the screen” (P. 4-13). Language Touch this key to change the language on the display. OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information. Return All Settings to Default Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems (brightness control) BUTTON The following menu items are available on To change the display brightness, press the the Launch Bar: button. Pressing the button again will • Phone change the display to the day or the night •AM display. •FM Press and hold the button for more • USB/iPod than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press • Bluetooth and hold the button again to turn the dis- •AUX play on. • Settings HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume) KNOB / PUSH (power) BUTTON Press the PUSH (power) button to turn LHA5380 audio function on and off. Turn the VOL SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH (volume) knob to adjust audio volume. BAR Various system functions can be accessed by touching the items on the Launch Bar O1 which is displayed on most of the main menu screens (the Launch Bar does not appear on some screens such as settings screens, camera screens, etc.) Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to display the corresponding menu screens.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA5320 1. CAMERA or DISP button • RearView Monitor is a convenience • The system is designed as an aid to feature and is not a substitute for the driver in showing large station- WARNING proper backing. Always turn and look ary objects directly behind the ve- • Failure to follow the warnings and in- out the windows and check mirrors hicle, to help avoid damaging the structions for proper use of the Rear- to be sure that it is safe to move be- vehicle. View Monitor system could result in fore operating the vehicle. Always serious injury or death. back up slowly. 4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera. LHA5321 LHA4805 The RearView Monitor system automati- To display the rear view, the RearView Moni- HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when tor system uses a camera located just the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) LINES above the vehicle’s license plate O1 . position. The radio can still be heard while Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle the RearView Monitor is active. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line OA are dis- OPERATION played on the monitor. With the ignition switch in the ON position, Distance guide lines move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor. Indicate distances from the vehicle body. • Red line O1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) • Yellow line O2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) • Green line O3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) Vehicle width guide lines O4 Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 Predicted course lines O5 (if so equipped) Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to LHA5322 LHA5323 the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, vehicle to view the positioning of objects distance guide lines and the vehicle width the distance guide lines and the vehicle behind the vehicle. guide lines are shown closer than the ac- width guide lines are shown farther than tual distance. Note that any object on the the actual distance. Note that any object hill is further than it appears on the on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor. monitor. 4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems object when backing up to the position OA if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so equipped)

WARNING • If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. • On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. • If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: – Turn the steering wheel from lock LHA4995 LHA5324 to lock while the engine is Backing up near a projecting Backing up behind a projecting running. object object – Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes. The predicted course lines OA (if so The position OC is shown farther than the • When the steering wheel is turned equipped) do not touch the object in the position OB in the display. However, the po- with the ignition switch in the ACC display. However, the vehicle may hit the sition OC is actually at the same distance as position, the predicted course lines object if it projects over the actual backing the position OA . The vehicle may hit the may be displayed incorrectly. up course. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel to the parking space OC while referring to the predicted course lines. 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

LHA5043 LHA4770 1. Visually check that the parking space is 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the safe before parking your vehicle. steering wheel so that the predicted course lines B enter the parking space 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed O OC . on the screen OA when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF • Underneath the bumper and the cor- PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so ner areas of the bumper cannot be equipped) viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limita- To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course tion. The system will not show small lines while in the P (Park) position: objects below the bumper, and may 1. Touch the “Settings” key. not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground. 2. Touch the “Camera” key. • Objects viewed in the RearView 3. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key Monitor differ from actual distance to turn the feature ON or OFF. because a wide-angle lens is used. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM • Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared LIMITATIONS to when viewed in the rearview and LHA3522 outside mirrors. WARNING ADJUSTING THE SCREEN • Use the displayed lines as a refer- 1. While on the main menu screen, touch Listed below are the system limitations ence. The lines are highly affected by the “Settings” key. for RearView Monitor. Failure to oper- the number of occupants, fuel level, ate the vehicle in accordance with vehicle position, road conditions and 2. Touch the “Camera” key. these system limitations could result in road grade. 3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, serious injury or death. • Make sure that the liftgate is securely “Color”, or “Black Level” key. • The system cannot completely elimi- closed when backing up. 4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” nate blind spots and may not show • Do not put anything on the rearview key on the touch-screen display. every object. camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate. NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 • When washing the vehicle with high • There may be a delay when switching pressure water, be sure not to spray it between views. around the camera. Otherwise, water • If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the may enter the camera unit causing camera, the RearView Monitor may not water condensation on the lens, a display objects clearly. Clean the camera. malfunction, fire or an electric shock. • Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe • Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- off any wax with a clean cloth dampened sion instrument. Otherwise, it may with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then malfunction or cause damage result- wipe with a dry cloth. ing in a fire or an electric shock. The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction: • When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display LHA5321 objects. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE • When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed CAUTION clearly. • Vertical lines may be seen in objects on • Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin- the screen. This is due to strong reflected ner to clean the camera. This will light from the bumper. cause discoloration. • The screen may flicker under fluorescent • Do not damage the camera as the moni- light. tor screen may be adversely affected. • The colors of objects on the RearView If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the Monitor may differ somewhat from the camera O1 , the RearView Monitor may not actual color of objects. display objects clearly. Clean the camera • Objects on the monitor may not be clear by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a in a dark environment. diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth. 4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

LHA5320 1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 WARNING The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in Failure to follow the warnings and in- situations such as slot parking or parallel structions for the proper use of the In- parking. telligent Around View Monitor system The monitor displays various views of the could result in serious injury or death position of the vehicle in a split screen for- • The Intelligent Around View Monitor mat. Not all views are available at all times. is a convenience feature and is not a Available views: substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where ob- • Front View jects cannot be viewed. The four cor- An approximately 150–degree view of the ners of the vehicle in particular, are front of the vehicle. areas where objects do not always • Rear View appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear An approximately 150–degree view of the views. Always check your surround- rear of the vehicle. LHA5325 ings to be sure that it is safe to move • Bird's-Eye View To display the multiple views, the Intelligent before operating the vehicle. Always The surrounding views of the vehicle Around View Monitor system uses cam- operate the vehicle slowly. from above. eras located in the front grille, on the vehi- • The driver is always responsible for • Front-Side View cle’s outside mirrors and one just above safety during parking and other The view around and ahead of the front the vehicle’s license plate O1 . maneuvers. passenger's side wheel. INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW • Full Screen Rear View MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION CAUTION The view to the rear of the vehicle (which is a little wider than the standard Rear With the ignition switch in the ON position, Do not scratch the camera lens when View). move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- cleaning dirt or snow from the front of sition or press the CAMERA button to oper- the camera. ate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The screen displayed on the Intelligent • When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob- Around View Monitor will automatically re- jects viewed in the monitor are fur- turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after ther than they appear. When driving the CAMERA button has been pressed with the vehicle down a hill, objects the shift lever in a position other than the R viewed in the monitor are closer than (Reverse) position. they appear. • Objects in the rear view will appear Available views visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside WARNING mirrors. • The distance guide lines and the ve- • Use the mirrors or actually look to hicle width lines should be used as a properly judge distances to other reference only when the vehicle is on objects. a paved, level surface. The apparent • On a snow-covered or slippery road, SAA1840 distance viewed on the monitor may there may be a difference between Front view be different than the actual distance the predicted course lines and the between the vehicle and displayed actual course line. Front and rear view objects. • The vehicle width and predicted Guiding lines that indicate the approximate • Use the displayed lines and the course lines are wider than the actual vehicle width and distance to objects with bird’s-eye view as a reference. The width and course. reference to the vehicle body line OA are lines and the bird’s-eye view are • The displayed lines will appear displayed on the monitor. greatly affected by the number of oc- slightly off to the right, because the Distance guide lines: cupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle po- rearview camera is not installed in sition, road condition and road the rear center of the vehicle. Indicate distances from the vehicle body: grade. • Red line O1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) • If the tires are replaced with different • Yellow line 2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) sized tires, the predicted course lines O and the bird's-eye view may be dis- • Green line O3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) played incorrectly. • Green line O4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). NOTE: When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight- ahead position, both the right and left predicted course lines O6 are displayed. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

LHA4992 LHA4264 Rear view Bird’s-eye view Vehicle width guide lines O5 : The bird's-eye view shows the overhead Indicate the approximate vehicle width view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the when backing up. vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space. Predicted course lines O6 : Indicate the predicted course when oper- The vehicle icon O1 shows the position of ating the vehicle. The predicted course the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis- lines will be displayed on the monitor when tance between objects viewed in the the steering wheel is turned. The predicted bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from course lines will move depending on how the actual distance to the vehicle. much the steering wheel is turned and will The areas that the cameras cannot cover not be displayed while the steering wheel is O2 are indicated in black. in the straight-ahead position.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems After the ignition switched is placed in the DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED ON position, the non-viewable area O2 is AND ACTUAL DISTANCES highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the birds-eye view is displayed. The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate In addition, the non-viewable corners are reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill displayed in red and will blink for the first 3 surfaces or projecting objects will be actu- seconds O3 to remind the driver to be ally located at distances different from cautious. those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When WARNING in doubt, turn around and view the objects • Objects in the bird's-eye view will ap- as you are backing up, or park and exit the pear further than the actual distance. vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle. • Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed LHA2652 at the seam of the views. Front-side view • Objects that are above the camera Guiding lines cannot be displayed. • The view of the bird's-eye view may Guiding lines that indicate the approximate be misaligned when the camera po- width and the front end of the vehicle are sition alters. displayed on the monitor. • A line on the ground may be mis- The front-of-vehicle line O1 shows the front aligned and is not seen as being part of the vehicle. straight at the seam of the views. The The side-of-vehicle line O2 shows the ap- misalignment will increase as the proximate vehicle width including the out- line proceeds away from the vehicle. side mirrors. The extensions O3 of both the front O1 and side O2 lines are shown with a green dotted line.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 LHA5322 LHA5323 LHA4995 Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, object distance guide lines and the vehicle width the distance guide lines and the vehicle The predicted course lines OA do not touch guide lines are shown closer than the ac- width guide lines are shown farther than the object in the display. However, the ve- tual distance. Note that any object on the the actual distance. Note that any object hicle may hit the object if it projects over hill is further than it appears on the on the hill is closer than it appears on the the actual backing up course. monitor. monitor. 4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems object when backing up to the position OA if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING • If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. • On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. • If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: – Turn the steering wheel from lock LHA5324 to lock while the engine is LHA5043 Backing up behind a projecting running. 1. Visually check that the parking space is object – Drive the vehicle on a straight road safe before parking your vehicle. for more than 5 minutes. 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed The position OC is shown farther than the • When the steering wheel is turned position OB in the display. However, the po- on the screen OA when the shift lever is with the ignition switch in the ACC moved to the R (Reverse) position. sition OC is actually at the same distance as position, the predicted course lines the position OA . The vehicle may hit the may be displayed incorrectly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel position, the available views are: to the parking space OC while referring • Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen to the predicted course lines. • Front view/front-side view split screen 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space The display will switch from the Intelligent completely, move the shift lever to the P Around View Monitor screen when: (Park) position and apply the parking • The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position brake. and the vehicle speed increases above HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) With the ignition switch in the ON position, • A different screen is selected. press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views. If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are: LHA4770 • Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the • Rear view/front-side view split screen steering wheel so that the predicted • Full screen rear view course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Intelligent Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

LHA3522 ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on the main menu screen, touch the “Settings” key. 2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the “Camera” key. 3. Touch the “Display Settings” key. LHA5326 4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW “Color”, or “Black Level” key. MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS 5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” key on the touch-screen display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 WARNING • Do not strike the cameras. They are • Objects on the Intelligent Around View precision instruments. Doing so Monitor may not be clear and the color of Listed below are the system limitations could cause a malfunction or cause the object may differ in a dark for Intelligent Around View Monitor. damage resulting in a fire or an elec- environment. Failure to operate the vehicle in accor- tric shock. • There may be differences in sharpness dance with these system limitations between each camera view of the bird's- could result in serious injury or death. There are some areas where the system eye view. will not show objects and the system does • Do not use the Intelligent Around not warn of moving objects. When in the • Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe View Monitor with the outside mir- front or rear view display, an object below off any wax with a clean cloth that has rors in the stored position, and make the bumper or on the ground may not be been dampened with a diluted mild sure that the trunk is securely closed cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry viewed 1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall when operating the vehicle using the O cloth. object near the seam O2 of the camera Intelligent Around View Monitor. viewing areas will not appear in the • The apparent distance between ob- monitor. jects viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor differs from the The following are operating limitations and actual distance. do not represent a system malfunction: • The cameras are installed on the • There may be a delay when switching front grille, the outside mirrors and between views. above the rear license plate. Do not • When the temperature is extremely high put anything such as a license plate or low, the screen may not display objects frame on the vehicle that covers or clearly. blocks the view of the cameras. • When strong light directly shines on the • When washing the vehicle with high camera, objects may not be displayed pressure water, be sure not to spray it clearly. around the cameras. Otherwise, wa- • The screen may flicker under fluorescent ter may enter the camera unit caus- light. ing water condensation on the lens, a • The colors of objects on the Intelligent malfunction, fire or an electric shock. Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects. 4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA3591 LHA3592 LHA5325 System temporarily unavailable When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE screen, the camera image may be receiv- When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, ing temporary electronic disturbances there are abnormal conditions in the Intel- CAUTION from surrounding devices. This will not hin- ligent Around View Monitor. This will not der normal driving operation but the sys- • Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin- hinder normal driving operation but the tem should be inspected if it occurs fre- ner to clean the camera. This will system should be inspected. It is recom- quently. It is recommended that you visit a cause discoloration. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN dealer for this service. • Do not damage the cameras as the moni- this service. tor screen may be adversely affected. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras O1 , the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

LHA5320 1. CAMERA button

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection (MOD) system could result in serious injury or death • The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver. • The system is deactivated at speeds LHA4190 LHA5171 above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reacti- Front and bird’s-eye views Rear and bird’s-eye views vated at lower speeds. MOD SYSTEM OPERATION The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is • The MOD system is not designed to The MOD system will turn on automatically displayed: detect surrounding stationary under the following conditions: • When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N objects. • When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) (Neutral) position and the vehicle is position. The MOD system can inform the driver of stopped, the MOD system detects mov- moving objects near the vehicle when • When the CAMERA button is pressed to ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The backing out of garages, maneuvering in activate the camera view on the display. MOD system will not operate if the out- parking lots and in other such instances. • When vehicle speed decreases below ap- side mirrors are moving in or out, in the The MOD system detects moving objects proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the stowed position, or if either front door is by using image processing technology on camera screen is displayed. opened. the image shown in the display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 NOTE: While the RCTA chime is beeping, the MOD system does not chime. In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame O1 is displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected. The yellow frame O2 is displayed on each view in the front view and rear view modes. A blue MOD icon O3 is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view where the LHA4997 LHA4998 MOD system is not operative. Rear and front-side views Full screen rear view If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD • When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) The MOD system does not detect moving icon O3 is not displayed. position and the vehicle speed is below objects in the front-side view. The MOD approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so system detects moving objects in the this view. equipped) front view. When the MOD system detects moving ob- Some vehicles include the option to allow • When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard the MOD system to be turned on or off. position and the vehicle speed is below when in front or rear view and a yellow To turn the MOD system on or off: approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD frame will be displayed on the view where 1. Touch the “Setting” key. system detects moving objects in the the objects are detected. While the MOD rear view. The MOD system will not oper- system continues to detect moving ob- 2. Touch the “Camera” key. ate if the trunk is open. jects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed. 3. Touch the “Moving Object Detection” key to switch between ON or OFF.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – When camera orientation is not in NOTE: WARNING its usual position, such as when a The blue MOD icon will change to orange mirror is folded. if one of the following has occurred: Listed below are the system limitations – When there is dirt, water drops or • When the system is malfunctioning. for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle snow on the camera lens. in accordance with these system limi- • When the component temperature – When the position of the moving tations could result in serious injury or reaches a high level (icon will blink). objects in the display is not death. • When the RearView camera has detected changed. • Do not use the MOD system when a blockage (icon will blink). • The MOD system might detect flow- towing a trailer. The system may not ing water droplets on the camera If the icon light continues to illuminate function properly. lens, white smoke from the muffler, orange, have the MOD system checked. It • Excessive noise (for example, audio moving shadows, etc. is recommended that you visit a NISSAN system volume or open vehicle win- dealer for this service. • The MOD system may not function dow) will interfere with the chime properly depending on the speed, di- sound, and it may not be heard. rection, distance or shape of the • The MOD system performance will be moving objects. limited according to environmental • If your vehicle sustains damage to conditions and surrounding objects the parts where the camera is in- such as: stalled, leaving it misaligned or bent, – When there is low contrast be- the sensing zone may be altered and tween background and the mov- the MOD system may not detect ob- ing objects. jects properly. – When there is a blinking source of • When the temperature is extremely light. high or low, the screen may not dis- – When strong light such as another play objects clearly. This is not a vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is malfunction. present.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 VENTS

LHA5325 LHA5328 LHA5329 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Side vents Center vents Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent CAUTION slides or vent knobs. For side vents: Move the slide toward • Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin- to close the vent and away from to ner to clean the camera. This will open it. cause discoloration. • Do not damage the camera as the moni- For center vents: Rotate the knob clock- tor screen may be adversely affected. wise to close the vent and counterclockwise to open it. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras O1 , the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth. 4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)

WARNING • The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. • Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. • Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. NOTE: LHA4783 • Odors from inside and outside the ve- 1. Fan speed control dial 5. Air recirculation button hicle can build up in the air conditioner 2. Heated seat switches (if so 6. MAX A/C / temperature control dial unit. Odor can enter the passenger equipped) 7. Air flow control buttons compartment through the vents. 3. Front defroster button 8. A/C (air conditioner) button • When parking, set the heater and air 4. Rear window and outside mirror conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the (if so equipped) defroster switch passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 CONTROLS Air recirculation button Rear window and outside mirror Fan speed control dial On position (Indicator light on): (if so equipped) defroster switch Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. The fan speed control dial turns the For additional information, see “Rear win- fan on and off and controls fan speed. Press the button to the on position dow and outside mirror (if so equipped) when: defroster switch” (P. 2-49). Air flow control buttons • driving on a dusty road. Heated seat switches (if so • to prevent traffic fumes from entering The air flow control buttons allow you to equipped) select the air flow outlets. passenger compartment. • for maximum cooling when using the air For additional information, see “Heated — Air flows from center and side conditioner. seat switches” (P. 2-57). vents. — Air flows from center and side Off position (Indicator light off): HEATER OPERATION vents and foot outlets. Outside air is drawn into the passenger — Air flows mainly from foot compartment and distributed through the Heating selected outlet. outlets. This mode is used to direct heated air to — Air flows from defroster outlets Use the off position for normal heater or air the foot outlets. Some air also flows from and foot outlets. conditioner operation. the defrost outlets and the side vent — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. outlets. A/C (air conditioner) button 1. Press the button to the off position Temperature control dial Start the engine, turn the fan speed for normal heating. The temperature control dial allows you to control dial to the desired position and button to turn on the air 2. Press the air flow control button. adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To press the conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, lower the temperature, turn the dial to the 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to press the button again. left. To increase the temperature, turn the the desired position. dial to the right. The air conditioner cooling function op- 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the erates only when the engine is running. Turn the dial to the MAX A/C position for desired position between the middle maximum cooling. Air will flow from center and the hot position. and side vents.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Ventilation • When the position is selected, the air 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to conditioner automatically turns on if the the desired position. This mode directs outside air to the side outside temperature is more than 36°F and center vents. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which desired position between the middle 1. Press the button to the off position. helps defog the windshield. The and the hot position. mode automatically turns off, allowing 2. Press the air flow control button. outside air to be drawn into the passen- • When the position is selected, the 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to ger compartment to further improve the air conditioner automatically turns on if the desired position. defogging performance. The recircula- the outside temperature is more than tion mode cannot be activated in the 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the position. helps defog the windshield. The desired position. mode automatically turns off, allowing Bi-level heating outside air to be drawn into the passen- Defrosting or defogging ger compartment to further improve the The bi-level mode directs warmed air to This mode directs the air to the defrost defogging performance. the side and center vents and to the front outlets to defrost/defog the windows. and rear floor outlets. Operating tips 1. Press the defrost/defog button . 1. Press the button to the off position. Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to 2. Press the air flow control button. and air inlet in front of the windshield. the desired position. This improves heater operation. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the the desired position. AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION desired position between the middle and the hot position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the Start the engine, turn the fan speed • To quickly remove ice or fog from the win- desired position. control dial to the desired position, and dows, turn the fan speed control dial press the button to activate the air to the highest setting and the tempera- Heating and defogging conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, ture control to the full HOT position. cooling and dehumidifying functions are This mode heats the interior and defogs added to the heater operation. the windshield. The air conditioner cooling function op- 1. Press the air flow control button. erates only when the engine is running.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 Cooling 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the • The air conditioning system should be desired position. operated for approximately 10 minutes at This mode is used to cool and dehumidify least once a month. This helps prevent the air. Dehumidified defogging damage to the system due to lack of 1. Press the button to the off position. lubrication. This mode is used to defog the windows 2. Press the air flow control button. and dehumidify the air. • A visible mist may be seen coming from 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the ventilators in hot, humid conditions 1. Press the air flow control button. the desired position. as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to indicate a malfunction. 4. Press the A/C button. The indicator light the desired position. • If the engine coolant temperature gauge comes on. • When the or are selected, the indicates engine coolant temperature 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the air conditioner automatically turns on if over the normal range, turn the air condi- desired position. the outside temperature is more than tioner off. For additional information, see 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which • For quick cooling when the outside tem- “If your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-11). helps defog the windshield. The perature is high, press the button to • When Remote Engine Start (if so mode automatically turns off, allowing the ON position. Be sure to return the equipped) is activated, the manual cli- outside air to be drawn into the passen- to the off position for normal cooling. mate control system will default to the ger compartment to further improve the MAX A/C may be used for quick cooling. last used heating or cooling mode. defogging performance. Dehumidified heating 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the AIR FLOW CHARTS desired position. This mode is used to heat and dehumidify The following charts show the button and the air. Operating tips dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air 1. Press the button to the off position. • Keep the windows closed while the air recirculation button should always be conditioner is in operation. 2. Press the air flow control button. in the off position for heating and • After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 min- defrosting. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to utes with the windows open to vent hot air the desired position. from the passenger compartment. Then, 4. Press the A/C (air conditioner) button. close the windows. This allows the air condi- The indicator light comes on. tioner to cool the interior more quickly. 4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA5330 LHA5331

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 LHA5332 LHA5333

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA5334

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)

10. Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch 11. Front defroster button 12. ON-OFF button WARNING • The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. • Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. • Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the inte- LHA4784 rior air to become stale and the win- 1. AUTO (automatic) climate control but- 4. SYNC button / temperature control dial dows to fog up. ton / temperature control dial (drivers (passenger’s side) side) 5. A/C (air conditioner) button Start the engine and operate the controls 2. Display screen 6. Air recirculation button to activate the air conditioner. 3. Heated seat switches (if so 7. Air flow control button equipped) 8. Fan speed control buttons 9. Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) 4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: • The temperature of the passenger com- • Do not set the temperature lower than • Odors from inside and outside the ve- partment will be maintained automati- the outside air temperature. Otherwise, hicle can build up in the air conditioner cally. Air flow distribution, air intake con- the system may not work properly. unit. Odor can enter the passenger trol and fan speed are also controlled • Not recommended if windows fog up. compartment through the vents. automatically. • When parking, set the heater and air • A visible mist may be seen coming from Dehumidified defrosting or conditioner controls to turn off air re- the vents in hot, humid conditions as the defogging air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate circulation to allow fresh air into the 1. Press the front defroster button on. passenger compartment. This should a malfunction. help reduce odors inside the vehicle. 3. You can individually set driver's and front 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set passenger's side temperature using the desired temperature. AUTOMATIC OPERATION each temperature control dial. To syn- • To quickly remove ice from the outside of chronize the driver’s and front passen- the windows, use the fan speed con- Cooling and/or dehumidified ger’s temperature settings, press the trol buttons to set the fan speed to heating (AUTO) SYNC button. maximum. This mode may be used all year round as • As soon as possible after the windshield the system automatically works to keep a Heating (A/C OFF) is clean, press the AUTO button to return constant temperature. Air flow distribution, The air conditioner does not activate. When to the automatic mode. air intake control, and fan speed are also you need to heat only, use this mode. • When the front defroster button is controlled automatically. pressed, the air conditioner will automati- 1. Press the AUTO button. 1. Press the AUTO button on. cally be turned on at outside tempera- 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set tures above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate 2. Turn the temperature control dial to the the desired temperature. mode automatically turns off, allowing left or right to set the desired • The temperature of the passenger com- outside air to be drawn into the passen- temperature. partment will be maintained automati- ger compartment to further improve the • Adjust the temperature display to about cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed defogging performance. 75°F (24°C) for normal operation. are also controlled automatically.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 Remote Engine Start with Temperature control dial control mode, press and hold the air recirculation button for about 2 seconds. Intelligent Climate Control (if so The temperature control dial allows you to The indicator light will flash twice, and then adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To equipped) the intake air will be controlled lower the temperature, turn the dial to the Vehicles equipped with automatic climate automatically. controls and Remote Engine Start function left. To increase the temperature, turn the may go into automatic heating or cooling dial to the right. Temperature can be ad- A/C (air conditioner) button mode when Remote Engine Start is acti- justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side. Start the engine, press the fan speed vated depending on outside and cabin control buttons to the desired position and temperatures. During this period, the cli- Air recirculation press the button to turn on the air mate control display and buttons will be Press the air recirculation button to conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, inoperable until the ignition switch is recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. press the button again. turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost- The indicator light on the button will ing mode, the rear window defroster (if so come on. The air conditioner cooling function op- equipped), heated seats (if so equipped) erates only when the engine is running. The air recirculation cannot be activated and heated steering wheel (if so equipped) when the air conditioner is in the front may be activated automatically. defrosting mode. Air flow control Pressing the button manually con- MANUAL OPERATION When the outside temperature exceeds trols air flow and selects the air outlet: 70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may Fan speed control buttons default to air recirculation mode automati- — Air flows from center and side Press the fan speed control buttons cally to reduce overall power consumption. vents. to manually control the fan speed. To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the — Air flows from center and side air recirculation button (indicator light will vents and foot outlets. Press the AUTO button to return to auto- turn off) to enter fresh air mode. — Air flows mainly from the foot matic control of the fan speed. outlets. Automatic intake air control — Air flows from defroster and foot In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be outlets. controlled automatically. To manually control the intake air, press the air recirculation button. To return to the automatic 4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Synchronize climate settings To turn system off Press the SYNC button to synchronize cli- Press the ON-OFF button. mate settings. The sync indicator will turn on. Rear window and outside mirror Pressing SYNC will synchronize driver's and defroster switch front passenger's climate settings. For additional information, see “Rear win- To change climate settings when SYNC is dow and outside mirror (if so equipped) active (the SYNC indicator is on): defroster switch” (P. 2-49). • The driver's side temperature control dial will control the driver and front passenger Heated seat switches (if so temperatures. equipped) • The fan speed control dial will control the For additional information, see “Heated fan speeds. seat switches” (P. 2-57). LHA5352 To exit SYNC: OPERATING TIPS • To remove the front passenger from Heated steering wheel switch (if SYNC, turn the passenger's side tem- so equipped) The sunload sensors, located on the top right and top left of the instrument panel, perature control dial. For additional information, see “Heated help the system maintain a constant tem- • Pressing SYNC multiple times will re- steering wheel switch (if so equipped)” perature. Do not put anything on or around activate SYNC. (P. 2-58). this sensor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

• When the climate system is in automatic • If you feel that the air flow mode you have The air conditioner system in your NISSAN operation and the engine coolant tem- selected and the outlets the air is coming vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de- perature and outside air temperature are out do not match, select the mode. signed with the environment in mind. low, the air flow outlet may default to de- • When you change the air flow mode, you This refrigerant does not harm the froster mode for a maximum of 2 min- may feel air flow from the foot outlets for earth's ozone layer. utes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunc- just a moment. This is not a malfunction. tion. After the engine coolant Special charging equipment and lubricant temperature warms up, the air flow outlet is required when servicing your NISSAN air will return to foot mode and operation will conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or continue normally. lubricants will cause severe damage to • When the outside and interior cabin tem- your air conditioner system. For additional peratures are moderate to high, the in- information, see “Air conditioner system take setting may default to turn off air refrigerant and oil recommendations” recirculation to allow fresh air into the (P. 10-8). passenger compartment. You may no- It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level dealer to service your “environmentally mode, or side demist vent outlets for a friendly” air conditioning system. maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when the previous climate setting was WARNING turned off. This is not a malfunction. After the initial warm air is expelled, the intake The air conditioner system contains re- will return to automatic control, the air frigerant under high pressure. To avoid flow outlet will return to previous settings, personal injury, any air conditioner ser- and operation will continue normally. To vice should be done only by an experi- exit, press any climate control button. enced technician with proper equipment. • Keep the moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems AUDIO SYSTEM

RADIO area and do not indicate any malfunction Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON in your NISSAN radio system. from a station transmitter, the signals will position and press the PUSH button Reception conditions will constantly tend to fade and/or drift. to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio change because of vehicle movement. Static and flutter: During signal interfer- with the engine not running, the ignition Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter- ence from buildings, large hills or due to switch should be placed in the ACC ference from other vehicles can work antenna position (usually in conjunction position. against ideal reception. Described below with increased distance from the station Radio reception is affected by station sig- are some of the factors that can affect your transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. nal strength, distance from radio transmit- radio reception. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other Some cellular phones or other devices may control to reduce treble response. external influences. Intermittent changes cause interference or a buzzing noise to Multipath reception: Because of the reflec- in reception quality normally are caused by come from the audio system speakers. tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and these external influences. Storing the device in a different location reflected signals reach the receiver at the Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- may reduce or eliminate the noise. same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss hicle may influence radio reception FM RADIO RECEPTION quality. of sound. Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – AM RADIO RECEPTION Radio reception 30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range AM signals, because of their low frequency, Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with than stereo FM. External influences may can bend around objects and skip along state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en- sometimes interfere with FM station re- the ground. In addition, the signals can be hance radio reception. These circuits are ception even if the FM station is within bounced off the ionosphere and bent back designed to extend reception range, and to 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal to earth. Because of these characteristics, enhance the quality of that reception. is directly related to the distance between AM signals are also subject to interference However, there are some general charac- the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol- as they travel from transmitter to receiver. teristics of both FM and AM radio signals low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing that can affect radio reception quality in a the same characteristics as light. For ex- through freeway underpasses or in areas moving vehicle, even when the finest ample, they will reflect off objects. with many tall buildings. It can also occur equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 for several seconds during ionospheric tur- • WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a * Windows® and Windows Media® are reg- bulence even in areas where no obstacles compressed audio format created by Mi- istered trademarks and trademarks in the exist. crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA United States of America and other coun- Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical codec offers greater file compression tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. power lines, electric signs and even traffic than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of lights. more digital audio tracks in the same USB (Universal Serial Bus) amount of space when compared to Connection Port AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS MP3s at the same level of quality. • Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of WARNING MP3 or WMA terms bits per second used by a digital music • MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures file. The size and quality of a compressed • Do not connect, disconnect or oper- Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the digital audio file is determined by the bit ate the USB device while driving. Do- most well-known compressed digital au- rate used when encoding the file. ing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your dio file format. This format allows for near • Sampling frequency — Sampling fre- vehicle and cause an accident or se- “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the quency is the rate at which the samples rious injury. size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of a signal are converted from analog to of an audio track from CD-ROM can re- digital (A/D conversion) per second. duce the file size by approximately a 10:1 • Multisession — Multisession is one of the CAUTION ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in methods for writing data to media. Writ- quality. MP3 compression removes the ing data once to the media is called a • Do not force the USB device into the redundant and irrelevant parts of a single session, and writing more than USB port. Inserting the USB device sound signal that the human ear doesn’t once is called a multisession. tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure hear. • ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the that the USB device is connected cor- part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that rectly into the USB port. contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encod- • Do not grab the USB port cover (if so ing bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 equipped) when pulling the USB de- tag information is displayed on the Artist/ vice out of the port. This could dam- song title line on the display. age the port and the cover.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • Do not leave the USB cable in a place General notes for USB use: iPod®* player where it can be pulled unintention- • For additional information, refer to your • Some characters used in other languages ally. Pulling the cable may damage device manufacturer’s owner informa- (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed the port. tion regarding the proper use and care of properly on the vehicle center screen. We the device. recommend using English or Spanish lan- The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de- guage characters with an iPod®. vice. USB devices should be purchased Notes for iPod® use: • Large video podcast files cause slow re- separately as necessary. iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- sponses in the iPod®. The vehicle center tered in the U.S. and other countries. This system cannot be used to format USB display may momentarily black out, but it devices. To format a USB device, use a per- • Improperly plugging in the iPod® may will soon recover. sonal computer. cause a checkmark to be displayed on • If the iPod® automatically selects large and off (flickering). Always make sure that In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the video podcast files while in the shuffle the iPod® is connected properly. front seats plays only sound without im- mode, the vehicle center display may ages for regulatory reasons, even when the • Audiobooks may not play in the same momentarily black out, but it will soon vehicle is parked. order as they appear on an iPod®. recover. This system supports various USB • Large video files cause slow responses in • Improperly plugging in the iPod® may memory devices, USB hard drives and an iPod®. The vehicle center display may cause a checkmark to be displayed on iPod® players. Some USB devices may not momentarily black out, but will soon and off (flickering). Always make sure that be supported by this system. recover. the iPod® is connected properly. • Partitioned USB devices may not play • If an iPod® automatically selects large • Audiobooks may not play in the same correctly. video files while in the shuffle mode, the order as they appear on the iPod®. vehicle center display may momentarily • Be careful not to do the following, or the • Some characters used in other lan- black out, but will soon recover. guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not cable could be damaged and a loss of appear properly in the display. Using Eng- function may occur: lish language characters with a USB de- – Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40 vice is recommended. mm) radius maximum). – Twist the cable excessively (more than 180 degrees). – Pull or drop the cable.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45 – Do not force the iPod® cable connector • When not in use for extended periods of • Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device into the device port. time, store the cable in a clean, dust free in an area surrounded by metal or far – Close the center console lid on the environment at room temperature and away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® cable or connectors. without direct sun exposure. module to prevent tone quality degrada- – Store objects with sharp edges in the • Do not use the cable for any other pur- tion and wireless connection disruption. storage where the cable is stored. poses other than its intended use in the • While an audio device is connected – Spill liquids on the cable and vehicle. through the Bluetooth® wireless connec- connectors. *iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- tion, the battery power of the device may • Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if tered in the U.S. and other countries. discharge quicker than usual. the cable and/or connectors are wet. It • This system supports the Bluetooth® Au- may damage the iPod®. Bluetooth® streaming audio dio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP). • If the cable and connectors are exposed • Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not to water, allow the cable and/or connec- be recognized by the in-vehicle audio BLUETOOTH® is a tors to dry completely before connecting system. trademark owned by the cable to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry). • It is necessary to set up the wireless con- Bluetooth SIG, Inc. nection between a compatible • If the connector is exposed to fluids other and licensed to Bluetooth® audio device and the in- than water, evaporative residue may Panasonic. vehicle Bluetooth® module before using cause a short between the connector the Bluetooth® audio. pins. In this case, replace the cable, otherwise damage to the iPod® and a loss of • Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® function may occur. audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your audio de- • If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, vice before using it with this system. connectors cracked, contamination such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connec- • The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped tors), do not use the cable. It is recom- under the following conditions: mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to – Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® replace the cable with a new one. Hands-Free Phone System. – Checking the connection to the hands-free phone.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems For additional information, see “Audio operation precautions” (P. 4-44). Audio main operation VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) button Place the ignition switch in the ON position and press the PUSH (power) button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To turn the system off, press the PUSH (power) button. Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust the volume. This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. LHA4963 MENU button FM/AM RADIO 4. MENU button Press the MENU button to show the 1. Display screen 5. AUDIO button Menu screen. Touch the “Settings” key on the display, then touch the “Sound” key. 2. PUSH SOUND button / TUNE·SCROLL 6. / (SEEK/TRACK) buttons knob 7. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) 3. BACK button button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47 Sound Settings Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level. Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level. Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers. Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed. Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching “-”/“+” , “L”/”R”, or “R”/”F” keys.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Audio button Press to display the audio screen. When 5. Preset list this button is pressed while the audio To listen to a preset station, touch the screen is not displayed, the last audio corresponding station from the preset source played will play. list. If displayed, touch the “ <”or“>”keys to scroll the preset list. AM radio operation Press the MENU button and touch the “AM” key or press the AUDIO button and select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar to bring up the AM display screen. If another audio source is playing when the “AM” key is pressed, the audio source play- LHA4708 ing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. AM/FM radio screen AM Menu 1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key Touch to display the radio menu screen. Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AM Menu screen options: 2. “Direct Tune” (if so equipped) • SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the “AM Touch to manually enter a station. Menu” key on the radio screen and then 3. Audio source indicator touch the “SCAN” key. The stations will be Indicates the currently selected audio tuned from low to high frequencies and source. stop at each broadcasting station for several seconds. Touching the “SCAN” key 4. Reception information display again during this period of several sec- Reception information currently avail- onds will stop tuning and the radio will able such as frequency, station name, remain tuned to that station. etc. is displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49 • Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to scan If another audio source is playing when the (SEEK/TRACK) buttons and update the station list displayed on “FM” key is pressed, the audio source play- Press the or buttons to tune the right side of the AM Menu screen. ing will automatically be turned off and the from low to high or high to low frequencies (SEEK/TRACK) buttons last radio station played will begin playing. and to stop at the next broadcasting Press the or buttons to tune The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown station. from low to high or high to low frequencies on the screen during FM stereo reception. 1 to 12 Station memory operations When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, and to stop at the next broadcasting Up to 12 stations can be registered in the station. the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. preset list. 1 to 6 Station memory operations FM Menu 1. Select the FM radio band. Up to six stations can be registered in the preset list. Touch the “FM” Menu key to display the FM 2. Tune to the station you wish to store. Menu screen options: 1. Select the AM radio band. 3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- • SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch bers in the preset list. 2. Tune to the station you wish to store. the “FM Menu” key on the radio screen and then touch the “SCAN” key. The sta- The information such as frequency will be 3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- tions will be tuned from low to high fre- displayed on the preset list. bers in the preset list. quencies and stop at each broadcasting To select and listen to the preset stations, The information such as frequency will be stations for several seconds. Touching push on the steering wheel briefly or displayed on the preset list. the “SCAN” key again during this period of touch a preferred station on the preset list To select and listen to the preset stations, several seconds will stop tuning and the on the radio screen. push on the steering wheel briefly or radio will remain tuned to that station. touch a preferred station on the preset list • Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to upon the radio screen. date the station list displayed on the right side of the FM Menu screen. FM radio operation • RDS Info: Radio station and song informa- Press the MENU button and touch the tion can be displayed on the FM display “FM Menu” key or press the AUDIO button screen. and select FM on the bottom of the Launch Bar to bring up the FM display screen. 4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation Additional features Connecting auxiliary devices For additional information, see “iPod® Connect an AUX device into the AUX input player operation” (P. 4-55) regarding the jack located on the center console below iPod® player available with this system. the heater and air conditioner controls. For additional information, see “USB (Uni- The AUX input jack accepts any standard versal Serial Bus) Connection Port” (P. 4-52) analog audio input such as from a portable regarding the USB connection port avail- cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or able with this system. phone. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in streaming audio” (P. 4-58) about the the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono Bluetooth® audio interface available with plug is used, the audio output may not this system. function normally. LHA4709 Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of Activation and playing AUX screen Labeling Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX • Audio source indicator Additional Obligation of Labeling cable to the AUX device and the AUX input Indicates that the AUX source is currently jack. Select AUX mode from the audio playing. This product is protected by certain intel- lectual property rights of Microsoft source menu screen or by pressing the • “Volume Setting” keys Corporation and third parties. Use or distri- Source button on the steering wheel. Touch one of the keys to select the sound bution of such technology outside of this output gain from Low, Medium and High. product is prohibited without a license • AUX from Launch Bar from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft Touch to change from another source to subsidiary and third parties. AUX.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51 CAUTION When a compatible storage device is plugged into the connection port, compat- • To avoid damage and loss of function ible audio files on the storage device can be when using a USB device, note the played through the vehicle's audio system. following precautions. • Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. • Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could dam- LHA4964 age the port and the cover. USB (Universal Serial Bus) • Do not leave the USB cable in a place CONNECTION PORT where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage Connecting a device to the USB the port. Connection Port For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information re- WARNING garding the proper use and care of the device. Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so The USB port is located beneath the heater can be a distraction. If distracted you and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB could lose control of your vehicle and device into the connection port. cause an accident or serious injury.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track. USB operation keys Touch to control USB playback functions.

Keys Description Each time “ ”keyis touched, the repeat mode changes. Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to select the LHA4711 LHA4710 previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current USB connections screen USB screen track. Press the MENU button and touch the 1. “USB Menu” key Touch to play the track. “Connections” key or press the “Settings” Touch to switch to the USB Menu screen. Touch to pause the track. key and touch the “Connections” key to 2. Track information Touch to select the next change USB settings. track. Touch and hold to Track information such as the song fast-forward the track. • Auto Change Source name, artist name and album name are Each time “ ”keyis Touch “ON” or “OFF” to change the audio displayed. source settings for USB memory devices touched, the random mode changes. or an iPod® connected through a USB 3. Audio source indicator cable. Indicates the currently selected audio source. 4. USB operation keys Touch to control USB playback functions

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53 USB memory device player Fast-forwarding/rewinding USB menu operation To rewind or fast-forward the track, press Touch the “USB Menu” key on the USB and hold the or buttons on the Activation and playing screen to display the USB Menu screen. control panel or touch and hold the “ ” Connecting the USB memory device into or “ ” keys on the screen. “Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB the port will start playing the USB memory. Changing play mode screen. “Folder List” key Touch to display the folder list. USB memory device can also be played by Repeat mode touching the “USB” key on the Menu screen Touch an item on the list to or by touching USB on the Launch Bar. Touch the “ ” key on the USB screen to select the folder. The sub- change the repeat mode. folder or track list will be displayed. Select a sub-folder or To pause playing the USB memory device The following modes are available: touch the “ ” key. To resume playing, track from the list. touch the “ ”key. All: Repeat all “Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB Skipping tracks 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder screen. To skip the tracks, press the or 1 Track: Repeat track buttons on the control panel or touch the Random mode “ ”or“ ” keys on the screen repeatedly until the preferred track is selected. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to change the random mode as follows: NOTE: No text displayed: Random off Depending on the condition, skipping to All: Repeat all the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice. 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CAUTION charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. • Do not force the USB device into the While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® USB port. Inserting the USB device can only be operated by the vehicle audio tilted or up-side-down into the port controls. may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected cor- To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, rectly into the USB port. remove the USB end of the cable from the • Do not grab the USB port cover (if so USB connection port on the vehicle, then equipped) when pulling the USB de- remove the cable from the iPod®. vice out of the port. This could dam- * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- age the port and the cover. tered in the U.S. and other countries. • Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintention- Compatibility LHA4964 ally. Pulling the cable may damage The following models are compatible: iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION the port. • iPhone® 11 Pro Max Connecting iPod® For additional information, refer to your de- • iPhone® 11 Pro vice manufacturer’s owner information re- • iPhone® 11 garding the proper use and care of the WARNING • iPhone® XR device. • iPhone® XS Max Do not connect, disconnect, or operate To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that • iPhone® XS the USB device while driving. Doing so the iPod® can be controlled with the audio can be a distraction. If distracted you system controls and display screen, use • iPhone® X could lose control of your vehicle and the USB connection port located beneath • iPhone® 8 Plus cause an accident or serious injury. the heater and air conditioner controls. • iPhone® 8 Connect the iPod®-specific end of the • iPhone® 7 Plus cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the • iPhone® 7 vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via • iPhone® SE a USB connection, its battery will be • iPhone® 6s Plus Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55 • iPhone® 6s 4. Album artwork • iPhone® 6 Plus An image of the album artwork is dis- • iPhone® 5s played when available if the setting is turned on. • iPhone® 5c • iPhone® 5 5. iPod® operation keys Touch to control iPod® playback • iPod touch® (6th generation) functions * Some features of this iPod® may not be fully functional. 6. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up- The bar indicates the progress in playing dated to the version indicated above. The a track. Lightning™ connector works with iPhone® (5 through 11) and iPod touch® (6th genera- iPod® operation keys tion). USB works with iPhone® (5 through 11) LHA4724 Touch to control iPod® playback functions. and iPod touch® (6th generation). iPod screen Keys Description All Android devices that have Android OS 5.0 or later are supported. 1. “iPod Menu” key Each time “ ” key is touched, Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen. the repeat mode changes. Touch to return to the beginning of 2. Track information the current track. Touch again to se- Track information such as the song lect the previous track. Touch and name, artist name and album name are hold to rewind the current track. displayed. Touch to play the track. 3. Audio source indicator Touch to pause the track. Indicates the currently selected audio Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track. source. Each time “ ” key is touched, the random mode changes.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems iPod® memory device player Changing play mode iPod® Menu operation Repeat mode Touch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod® Activation and playing Touch the “ ” key on the iPod® screen screen to display the iPod® Menu screen. Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB to change the repeat mode. The following modes are available. “Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB cable will activate the iPod® mode. screen. The iPod® can also be played by touching No text displayed: Repeat off “Folder List” key Touch to display the folder list. the “iPod” key on the Menu screen or by All: Repeat all (if so equipped) Touch an item on the list to touching iPod on the Launch Bar. select the folder. The sub- One: Repeat track folder or track list will be dis- Skipping tracks played. Select a sub-folder or Random mode track from the list. To skip the tracks, press the or Touch the “ ” key on the screen to “Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the album buttons on the control panel or touch the change the random mode as follows. key artwork display on the USB “ ”or“ ” keys on the screen repeat- screen. edly until the preferred track is selected. “ ” is not highlighted: Random off “Playlists” key Touch to display the list ac- NOTE: “ ” highlighted: Random on “Artists” key cording to the selected item. “Albums” key Depending on the condition, skipping to “Songs” key the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice. “Podcasts” key Pressing the button or touching the key “Genres” key once may only restart the current track “Composers” key from the beginning. “Audiobooks” key Fast-forwarding/rewinding “iTunes Radio” key To rewind or fast-forward the track, press and hold the or buttons on the control panel or touch and hold the “ ” or “ ” keys on the screen,

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57 BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System: If you have a compatible Bluetooth® device with streaming audio (A2DP profile), you Manual Connecting Procedure can set up the wireless connection be- 1. Select the “Settings” key on the Launch tween your Bluetooth® device and your ve- Bar. hicle’s audio system. 2. Touch the “Connections” key. This connection allows you to listen to audio from the Bluetooth® device using your 3. Touch the Bluetooth tab and touch the vehicle’s speakers. “Add New” key. To use Bluetooth® streaming audio touch 4. Follow the instructions on the screen. the Bluetooth® Icon on the Launch If a PIN appears on the screen, operate the Bar, then touch the “BT Audio” key. Bluetooth® device to enter/confirm the NOTE: LHA4726 PIN. A cellular phone should not be used Connecting procedure while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If the device NOTE: needs to be connected, see “Connecting The connecting procedure must be per- procedure” (P. 4-58). formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled. Menu Item Result Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off. Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off. PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Automatic Connecting Procedure 4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys If no phone is connected to the system, Touch to control Bluetooth® audio play- press and hold the button on the back functions steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. 5. Play time and progress bar After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the The play time of the track is displayed. system will announce “transferring to the The bar indicates the progress in playing add phone settings menu”. The system will a track. start the pairing procedure. When a compatible phone is found, a message with a Bluetooth® operation keys PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Touch to control Bluetooth® playback Bluetooth® phone to complete the con- functions. nection process. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen” Keys Description (P. 4-79). Each time “ ”keyis LHA4727 touched, the repeat mode Bluetooth® screen changes. Touch to return to the begin- 1. “BT Menu” key ning of the current track. Depending on the Bluetooth® version Touch again to select the supported by the connected device, ei- previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current ther the “BT Menu” key or “Connections” track. key is displayed. Touch to play the track. 2. Track information Touch to pause the track. Track information such as the song Touch to select the next name, artist name and album name are track. Touch and hold to displayed. fast-forward the track. Each time “ ”keyis 3. Audio source indicator touched, the random mode Indicates the currently selected audio changes. source.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59 Bluetooth® audio operation Fast-forwarding/rewinding BT Menu The ability to pause, change tracks, fast To fast-forward or rewind the track, press Touch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth® forward, rewind, randomize and repeat and hold the or buttons on the audio screen to display the Bluetooth® au- music may be different between devices. control panel or touch the “ ”or“ ” dio menu screen. keys on the screen. Some or all of these functions may not be The following items are available. supported on each device. Changing play mode NOTE: Repeat mode “Now Playing” key Touch to display the Bluetooth® audio screen. Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de- Touch the “ ” key on the screen to “Current List” key A list of track in the cur- vice that is connected, it may not be pos- change the repeat mode. (if so equipped)* rently selected folder is sible to perform audio operations or a Random mode displayed. delay may occur before music is played “Connections” key Touch to display the back. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to connections screen. change the random mode. Activation and playing “Folder List” key* Touch to display the NOTE: folder list. Touch an item A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by on the list to select the touching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menu Available repeat/random modes change folder. screen or by touching Bluetooth on the depending on the connected device. *: displayed only when available. Launch Bar. NOTE: To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio, touch the “ ” key. Touch the “ ”key Depending on the connected device, the to resume playing. “BT Menu” key may not be displayed. Changing folders To change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Menu control USB: switch/OK button • Press the or buttons for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease In the vehicle information display, navigate the track number. to “Audio”. Use the OK button to change the • Press the or buttons for more mode in the following sequence: than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast for- AM → FM → USB/iPod®*→ Bluetooth® Au- ward the current song. dio* → AUX* → AM. Bluetooth® Audio: * These modes are only available when • Press the or buttons for less compatible media storage is inserted into than 1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the device or connected to the system. the next song. SEEK/TRACK buttons • Press the or buttons for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast for- LHA4122 For most audio sources, pushing the tun- ward the current song. STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR ing switches for more than 1.5 seconds (back) switch AUDIO CONTROL provides a different function than pushing for less than 1.5 seconds. 1. Menu control switch/ OK Push the (back) switch to return to the button AM and FM: previous screen or cancel the current • Press the or buttons for less selection. 2. (back) switch than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease 3. (SEEK/TRACK) buttons the preset station. 4. Volume control switch • Press the or buttons for more than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to Volume control switch the next station. Push the volume control switch up or down iPod®: to increase or decrease the volume. • Press the or buttons for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61 USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT (if so SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped) equipped)

ANTENNA Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant The antenna pattern is printed inside the can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes rear window. Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free mode to reduce user distraction. In this mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac- CAUTION tion by voice control. After connecting a • Do not place metalized film near the compatible Apple device by using rear window glass or attach any Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated metal parts to it. This may cause poor from the button on the steering reception or noise. wheel. • When cleaning the inside of the rear Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered window, be careful not to scratch or in the U.S. and other countries. damage the rear window antenna. • Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as Lightly wipe along the antenna with a displaying pictures or opening apps, may dampened soft cloth. LHA5413 not be available while driving. There is a USB/iPod® charging port located • For getting best results, always update on the rear center console. This port will your device to the latest software version. charge compatible devices. • Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as NOTE: possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vi- Only the USB connection port located bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent below the instrument panel will allow the system from recognizing the voice operation of the USB/iPod® devices commands correctly. through the audio system. • For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple website.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REQUIREMENTS 3. Your vehicle will automatically change to Siri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S or Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S the music starts playing. Mode selection are not supported by the Siri® Eyes Free is determined by the phone. system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for * If the iPhone® is also connected with the details about device compatibility. USB cable. Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please If the audio track does not start playing check phone settings. automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be changing the track or audio source to re- accessible from the lock screen. Please sume playback. check phone settings. NOTE: For best results, always update your device For best results, use the native music to the latest software version. LHA4965 app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE other 3rd party music apps may vary and 1. Press button for more than 1.5 is controlled by the iPhone®. seconds. Example2–Replying to text messages 2. Speak your command and then listen to 1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected the Siri® Eyes Free reply. and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone® After starting Siri Eyes Free, press the settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis- button again within 5 seconds of the end of play a notification for new incoming text the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend messages. the session. 2. After reading the message, press or press and hold the button to reply Example 1 – Playing music using Siri Eyes Free. 1. Press button for more than 1.5 seconds. 3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or a similar command to reply using Siri 2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”. Eyes Free. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Cannot access Siri Eyes Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system. Freefromswitchonthe Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting. steering wheel Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone. For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party Audio Source does not music apps may vary. change automatically to For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade perfor- iPod® or Bluetooth® mance. Audio mode Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel. Play, pause, next track, For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party previous track or play music apps may vary and is controlled by the device. timer does not work Cannot hear any music/ audio being played back Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode. from a connected iPhone® Cannot receive text mes- Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”. sage notifications on the Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”. vehicle audio system Cannot reply to text mes- After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Press the button for more than 1.5 seconds on the steer- sage notifications by Siri ing wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”. Eyes Free

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

When installing a CB, ham radio or car CAUTION WARNING phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the • Keep the antenna as far away as pos- • Use a phone after stopping your ve- new equipment may adversely affect the sible from the electronic control hicle in a safe location. If you have to engine control system and other electronic modules. use a phone while driving, exercise parts. • Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in extreme caution at all times so full (20 cm) away from the electronic attention may be given to vehicle WARNING control system harnesses. Do not operation. • A cellular phone should not be used route the antenna wire next to any • If you are unable to devote full atten- for any purpose while driving so full harness. tion to vehicle operation while talk- attention may be given to vehicle op- • Adjust the antenna standing-wave ing on the phone, pull off the road to eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit ratio as recommended by the a safe location and stop your vehicle. the use of cellular phones while manufacturer. driving. • Connect the ground wire from the CB CAUTION • If you must make a call while your radio chassis to the body. vehicle is in motion, the hands free • For additional information, it is rec- To avoid discharging the vehicle bat- cellular phone operational mode (if ommended that you visit a NISSAN tery, use a phone after starting the so equipped) is highly recom- dealer for this service. engine. mended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. • If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talk- ing on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65 the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. NOTE: Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatically to the system, consult the phone's owner's manual for details on device operation. You can connect up to six different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in- vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. • Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in- vehicle phone module before using the LHA4953 hands-free phone system. Your NISSAN is equipped with the make or receive a hands-free telephone • Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. may not be recognized or work properly. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled Once your cellular phone is connected to or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom- cellular phone, you can set up the wireless the in-vehicle phone module, no other mended phone list and connecting connection between your cellular phone phone connecting procedure is required. instructions. and the in-vehicle phone module. With Your phone is automatically connected Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can with the in-vehicle phone module when 4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • You will not be able to use a hands-free • Some cellular phones or other devices IC Regulatory information phone under the following conditions: may cause interference or a buzzing – Operation is subject to the following two – Your vehicle is outside of the cellular noise to come from the audio system conditions: (1) this device may not cause service area. speakers. Storing the device in a different interference, and (2) this device must ac- – Your vehicle is in an area where it is location may reduce or eliminate the cept any interference, including interfer- difficult to receive a cellular signal; such noise. ence that may cause undesired opera- as in a tunnel, in an underground park- • For additional information, refer to the tion of the device. ing garage, near a tall building or in a cellular phone owner's manual regarding – This Class B digital apparatus meets all re- mountainous area. the telephone charges, cellular phone quirements of the Canadian Interference- – Your cellular phone is locked to prevent antenna and body, etc. Causing Equipment Regulations. it from being dialed. • When the radio wave condition is not REGULATORY INFORMATION BLUETOOTH® is a ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may FCC Regulatory information be difficult to hear the other person's trademark owned by – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with Bluetooth SIG, Inc. voice during a call. FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only • Do not place the cellular phone in an area the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an- and licensed to surrounded by metal or far away from tenna, modification, or attachments Panasonic. the in-vehicle phone module to prevent could damage the transmitter and may tone quality degradation and wireless violate FCC regulations. USING THE SYSTEM connection disruption. – Operation is subject to the following two The system allows hands-free operation of • While a cellular phone is connected conditions: the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. through the Bluetooth® wireless connec- 1.1) This device may not cause interfer- If the vehicle is in motion, some commands tion, the battery power of the cellular ence and may not be available so full attention may phone may discharge quicker than usual. 2.2)this device must accept any interfer- be given to vehicle operation. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- ence, including interference that may tem cannot charge cellular phones. cause undesired operation of the device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67 Initialization • For calling contacts by name, please say • You can cancel a command when the both the first and last name of the con- system is waiting for a response by say- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON tact for better recognition. ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an- position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial- nounces “Exit” and ends the Voice Recog- ized, which takes a few seconds. If the nition session. You can also press and button is pressed before the initialization Giving voice commands hold the button on the steering completes, the system will announce To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to end “There is no phone connected” and will not press the button located on the steer- the Voice Recognition session. Whenever react to voice commands. ing wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After the Voice Recognition session is can- the tone sounds, speak a command. celed, a double beep is played to indicate Operating tips The command given is picked up by the you have exited the system. To get the best performance out of the microphone, and voice feedback is given • If you want to adjust the volume of the NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe when the command is accepted. voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume the following: • If a command is not recognized, the sys- control switches on the steering wheel • Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as tem announces, “Please say or select a while being provided with feedback. You possible. Keep all vents pointed away command from the displayed list.” Make can also use the radio volume control from the microphone and close the win- sure the command is said exactly as knob. prompted by the system and repeat the dows to eliminate surrounding noises Voice Prompt Interrupt (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), command in a clear voice. which may prevent the system from rec- • If you want to go back to the previous In most cases you can interrupt the voice ognizing voice commands correctly. command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor- feedback to speak the next command by pressing the button on the steering • Wait until the tone sounds before speak- rection” any time the system is waiting for wheel. After interrupting the system, wait ing a command. Otherwise, the com- a response. for a beep before speaking your command. mand will not be received properly. • Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds. • Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Indicator Description Indicates there are unread received messages. Indicates the Bluetooth® device that is currently connected. Indicates the strength of the signal the Bluetooth® device is receiving. Indicates the amount of remaining Bluetooth® device battery. LHA4723 LHA4954 INDICATORS CONTROL BUTTONS When a cellular phone is connected The control buttons for the Bluetooth® through the Bluetooth® wireless connec- Hands-Free Phone System are located on tion, indicators O1 for the phone and text the steering wheel. messaging are displayed on the top of the screen. VOICE COMMAND BUTTON Press and hold the button for more than 1.5 seconds to initiate the Voice Recognition session. To exit the Voice Recognition session press and hold the for more than 1.5 seconds. For additional information, see “Voice prompt interrupt” (P. 4-68).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69 You can use the button to To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® interrupt the system feedback Hands-Free Phone System: and give a command at once. Bluetooth® Connecting Procedure If an iPhone® is connected, Siri® 1. Select the “Settings” key on the Launch can be accessed by pressing the Bar. button for less than 1.5 sec- 2. Touch the “Connections” key. onds. For additional information, see “Siri® Eyes Free” (P. 4-62). 3. Touch the Bluetooth tab and touch the “Add New” key. PHONE BUTTON 4. Follow the instructions on the screen. To answer an incoming call or to end a call press the button. If a PIN appears on the screen, operate the Bluetooth® device to enter/confirm the To reject a call press and hold the LHA4726 PIN. button. BLUETOOTH® CONNECTING PROCEDURE NOTE: The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled. Menu Item Result Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off. Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off. PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: VOICE COMMANDS “Call ” Some cellular phones may require you to Voice commands can be used to operate Speak this command to make a call to a accept certain permissions in order to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. contact that is stored in the phonebook. enable features on your Bluetooth® sys- Press and hold the button for less Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name to tem. During the Bluetooth® pairing pro- than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone initiate a call. If the system does not recog- cess, please check your cellular phone’s command menu. The commands avail- nize the name it will display a list of similar display for a pop-up with the request to able are: names. After the prompt, speak or touch grant phonebook access. • Call an item number from the displayed list to Granting phonebook access permission • Dial place the call. will allow your contacts to be down- • Recent Calls loaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® sys- “Dial ” • Read/Send Text (if so equipped) tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu- Speak this command to make a call with a • Siri® (if so equipped) lar phone stating that the Bluetooth® spoken phone number. After the prompt, system would like to access your con- • Voice Assistant (if so equipped) say “Dial” followed bya7to10digit phone tacts and call history. Please select “Al- • Phonebook number. The system will repeat the num- low” or Yes” to grant this permission. • Quick Dial ber back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or Automatic Connecting Procedure • Redial “Correction” to re-enter the phone number. If no phone is connected to the system, • Select Phone press and hold the button on the • Add Phone steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. • Call Mobile After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the system will announce “transferring to the • Call Home add phone settings menu”. The system will • Call Office start the pairing procedure. When a com- • Call Main patible phone is found, a message with a • Call Other PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to complete the con- • Settings nection process. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen” (P. 4-79). Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71 “Recent Calls” • Missed Calls The following commands are available: Speak this command to list the last 20 The following commands are available un- • missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is der “Recent Calls”: • Main from an entry in the phonebook, the • Incoming Calls name will be displayed. Otherwise, the • Home Speak this command to list the last 20 phone number of the missed call will be • Mobile incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is displayed. • Office from an entry in the phonebook, the When prompted, speak or touch the item • Other name will be displayed. Otherwise, the number on the screen to place the call. phone number of the incoming call will Touch the “Next” key to move through the For additional information on manually se- be displayed. list of missed calls. lecting phonebook entries, see “Making a When prompted, speak or touch the item call” (P. 4-74). number on the screen to place the call. “Read Text/Send Text” (if so Touch the “Next” key to move through the equipped) “Quick dial” list of incoming calls. Speak this command to access the Quick Speak this command to access text mes- • Outgoing Calls dial menu. After the prompt, speak or se- saging functions. Speak this command to list the last 20 lect an item number on the displayed list to outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call For additional information, see “Text mes- place the call. For additional information, was to an entry in the phonebook, the saging” (P. 4-75). see “Making a call” (P. 4-74). name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the outgoing call will be “Phonebook through voice “Redial” displayed. command” When prompted, speak or touch the item Speak this command to call the last num- number on the screen to place the call. Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quick ber dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” to Touch the “Next” key to move through the steps to access entries stored in the dial the number of the last outgoing call. list of outgoing calls. phonebook. Commands are organized by The system will display “Redialing ”. The name of the phonebook en- lular device. For additional information, re- try will be displayed if it is available, other- fer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual. wise the number being redialed will be displayed.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems “Select Phone” • Best Match List When the system doesn't recognize a Speak this command to access the Con- phonebook name or dial number, it will nections menu. For additional information, provide a list of similar sounding results. see “Bluetooth® connections screen” To turn this off, touch the “ON” key, the (P. 4-79). indicator light will turn off. To turn on, touch the “ON” key again, the indicator “Add Phone” light will turn on. Speak this command to access the Con- nections menu. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen” (P. 4-79). “Settings” Speak this command to access the Sys- LHA4705 tem Voice settings menu. The system will PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of the following options on the screen to The Phone screen can be displayed by change the settings. pressing the button on the control panel. • Beep Only for Opening Prompt By touching the “ON” key, the indicator The following options are displayed: light will illuminate, the system voice will • Quick Dial turn off and only a tone will sound when Displays the Quick Dial screen. For addi- the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tional information, see “Quick dial” (P.4-72) tem is activated. To turn the system voice • Phonebook back on, touch the “ON” key again, the Displays the Phonebook screen. For addi- indicator light will turn off. tional information, see “Making a call” (P. 4-74).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73 • Call History Phonebook RECEIVING/ENDING A CALL Displays the Call History screen. For addi- To access the phonebook: When a call is received by the phone con- tional information, see “Making a call” nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands- (P. 4-74). 1. Press the button on the steering wheel or touch the “ ” key on the Free Phone System, the call information is • Dial Number displayed on the control panel display. Displays the Dial Number screen. For ad- launch bar. To accept the incoming call, either: ditional information, see “Making a call” 2. Touch the “Phonebook” key. (P. 4-74). • Press the button on the steering 3. Choose the desired entry from the dis- • Text Message wheel, or played list. Displays the received message screen. • Touch the “ Answer” key on the For additional information, see “Text mes- Call History screen. saging” (P. 4-75). 1. Select a phonebook name or phone To end or reject an incoming call, either: • Connections number from the recent incoming, out- • Press and hold the button on the Displays the Connections screen. For ad- going, or missed calls tabs. steering wheel, or ditional information, see “Bluetooth® con- • Touch the “ Decline” key on the nections screen” (P. 4-79). 2. Touch a phonebook name or phone number listed to initiate the call. screen. • Volume Displays the volume adjustment screen. Dial Number If the user is not able to answer the call right away, touch the “Hold Call” key dis- For additional information, see “Volume & 1. Enter the phone number manually using beeps” (P. 4-82). played on the screen. A message will be the keypad displayed on the screen. played for the caller: “I’m not able to take a MAKING A CALL 2. Touch the “OK” key on the screen to initi- call right now.” The user may then accept 1. Press the button on the Launch Bar. ate the call. the call when available or reject the call. The “Phone” screen will appear on the For additional options to make a call, see display. “Voice commands” (P. 4-71). 2. Select one of the options to make a call.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems DURING A CALL If supported by the phone, the • Laws in some jurisdictions may re- While a call is active the following options Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System strict the use of some of the applica- will appear on the control panel display: allows for call waiting functionality. If a tions and features, such as social call is received while another call is al- • Mute networking and texting. Check local ready active, a message will be displayed regulations for any requirements. Touch this key to mute or unmute the on the screen. Press the button on • Use the text messaging feature after system. the steering wheel or touch the “ stopping your vehicle in a safe loca- • Dial Number Answer” key on screen to accept the in- tion. If you have to use the feature Touch this key to dial digits during the coming call. Touch the “ Decline” key while driving, exercise extreme cau- phone call. on the screen to reject the second call. tion at all times so full attention may • Switch to Handset While a call is active, press the button be given to vehicle operation. Touch the “Use Handset” key on the on the steering wheel to access additional screen to transfer the call to the handset • If you are unable to devote full atten- options. Speak one of the following tion to vehicle operation while using (cellular phone). To transfer the call back commands: from the handset to the Bluetooth® the text messaging feature, pull off Hands-Free Phone System, press the • “Send Digits” the road to a safe location and stop button on the control panel then Speak this command followed by the dig- your vehicle. its to enter digits during the phone call. select the “Transfer Hands-free” key on NOTE: the screen. • “Switch call” Speak this command to hold the second This feature is automatically disabled if NOTE: call and switch back to the original call. the connected device does not support the Message Access Profile (MAP). For Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped) cellular telephones while driving. additional information, refer to the phone’s owner’s manual for details and • Switch Call WARNING instructions. This option will only be available when a second call is active. • Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check local regulations before using this feature.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75 NOTE: When the cellular phone connected to the 4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system vehicle receives a text message, a notifica- prompts for which message to send. Many phones may require special per- tion will appear on the control panel dis- Nine predefined messages are avail- mission to enable text messaging. Check play. To check the message, touch the able. To choose one of the predefined the phone’s screen during Bluetooth® “Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to save messages, speak one of the following pairing. For some phones, you may need the message to be checked later. after the tone: to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth® menu for text messages to Access text messaging through the ve- • “Driving, can't text” appear on the headunit. For additional hicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or • “Call me” information, refer to your phone’s own- through the vehicles control panel. • “On my way” er’s manual. Text message integration • “Running late” requires that the phone support MAP Text messaging using Bluetooth® • “Okay” (Message Access Profile) for both receiv- Hands-Free Phone System (if so • “Yes” ing and sending text messages. Some equipped) phones may not support all text mes- • “No” saging features. Please refer to Sending a text message (if so equipped) • “Where are you?” www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or 1. Press and hold the button on the • “When?” www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat- steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. ibility information, as well as your de- Reading a received text message 2. Say “Send Text” after the tone. vice’s owner’s manual. 1. Press and hold the button on the The system allows for the sending and re- 3. The system will provide a list of available steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. commands in order to determine the ceiving of text messages through the ve- 2. Say “Read Text” after the tone. hicle interface. recipient of the text message. Choose from the following: The display will show a list of 20 messages The availability of the text message func- • Phonebook with the sender and delivery time. Touch tion may vary depending on the cellular the “Next” key on the screen to view all mes- • Quick Dial phone. sages. To view a text message press the • Incoming Calls button on the steering wheel and • Outgoing Calls speak the number item list on the screen. • Missed Calls The following options will be available: • Dial 4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems • Play Text messaging using the control • Play/Stop Speak this command to have the system panel Touch the “Play” key to have the hands- say the message. free phone system read out the received Display received message list • Reply message. Touch the “Stop” key to stop Speak this command to send a text mes- 1. Press the button on the control reading. sage response to the sender of the text panel. • Call message. If the sender of the message is registered 2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the in the phonebook, touch the “Call” key to • Call screen Speak this command to call the sender. make a call to the sender. • Previous 3. Touch an item on the list to read or reply • Reply Speak this command to move to the pre- to the message. A reply message can be selected from vious text message (if available). Up to 100 messages can be stored in the the predefined list. •Next message list. Sending a text message (if so equipped) Speak this command to move to the next Received message screen This function may not be supported de- text message (if available). Touching the “Read” key on the incoming pending on the cellular phone. Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) message notification screen or selecting a 1. Press the button on the control If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, message from the message list will show panel. it can also be used to create custom mes- the details of the received message on the 2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the sages that are sent through the phone. For display. screen. additional information, see “Siri® Eyes Free” Available actions: (P. 4-62). •Prev. 3. Touch the “Create Message” key on the screen. NOTE: Touch this key to read the previous message. Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). •Next Touch this key to read the next message. NOTE: For Apple iPhones®, text messages can only be sent through Siri.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77 The following items are available: Available item Action To Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm. Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list. Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook. Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history. Select Text Touch to display a list of predefined text messages. Send Touch to send the message.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems the MENU button on the control panel. Bluetooth tab Touch the “Connections” key on the screen This tab will display up to six Bluetooth® then select the Bluetooth tab. devices. If six devices are already con- The paired phone will be added to the list nected, one of the devices must be deleted on the Bluetooth® connections screen. before another device can be connected. Touching the name of another device on the list will switch the connected device. “Add New” key Touch the key on the screen to connect a “ ” (back) key new Bluetooth® device. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connecting Touch the “ ” key to go back to the procedure” (P. 4-70). previous screen. “ ” (Bluetooth® settings) key LHA4716 Connecting Bluetooth® BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS For additional information on connecting a Touch the “ ” key on the screen to SCREEN cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth® display a list of options. Hands-Free Phone System, see “Bluetooth® • Bluetooth 1. “ ” (back) key connecting procedure” (P. 4-70). Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth® 2. Bluetooth tab connection on or off 3. Connections screen NOTE: • Favorite (Connection first) 4. “Add New” key Touch this key to change which device 5. “ ” (settings) key Some cellular phones or other devices will be connected first when multiple de- 6. “ ” (info) key may cause interference or a buzzing vices are connected to the vehicle. 7. “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key noise to come from the audio system Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the 8. “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone speakers. Storing the device in a differ- device a favorite connection. System connection) key ent location may reduce or eliminate the noise. Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the Access the Connections screen to change device a favorite connection. settings and view Bluetooth® information. To access the Connections screen press

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79 • Pin “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio Touch this key to customize the PIN code. connection) key Input a four digit number then touch the “OK” key. The new PIN will be set. A list of connected devices will be displayed on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to “ ” (info) key the name to connect a device to Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to Touch the key again to disconnect the de- display the information of the cellular vice. The device will not be removed from phone or to delete the device. the list. For additional information on re- Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paired moving a device, see “ (info) key” device then select “Yes” when a message (P. 4-80). appears. LHA4721 “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System connection) key PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE SETTINGS A list of connected devices will be displayed on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System set- the name to connect a device to the tings can be changed according to the us- Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is er’s preference. To access the “Phone” set- listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the tings menu press the MENU button on icon. Touch the key again to disconnect the the control panel. Touch the “Settings” key device. The device will not be removed then select the “Phone” key. from the list. For additional information on removing a device, see “ (info) key” (P. 4-80).

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The following options are available: Menu Item Result Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, see “Quick dial” (P. 4-72). Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial. Phonebook Download Entire Phone- All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are book downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual. Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected. Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off. Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off. Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off. Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off. Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages. Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset. Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off. Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81 iPod®/IPHONE®

VOLUME & BEEPS Volume Settings “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and There are several methods to customize The Volume settings screen can be found “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic the volume settings. by pressing the button on the control accessory has been designed to connect panel then touching the “Volume” key on specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respec- Volume & Beeps the screen. To adjust the volume of the tively, and has been certified by the devel- The Volume & Beeps screen can be found following options, touch the “–” and “+” keys oper to meet Apple performance stan- by pressing the MENU button on the on the screen. dards. Apple is not responsible for the control panel, touching the “Settings” key The available settings are: operation of this device or its compliance on the screen and selecting “Volume & with safety and regulatory standards. Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the follow- • Ringtone Please note that the use of this accessory ing options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on the Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wire- screen. incoming calls. less performance. The available settings are: • Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod • Ringtone calls. shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other incoming calls. countries. Lightning is a trademark of • Outgoing Call Apple Inc. Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls. • Voice Prompt Vol. Adjust the volume level of the system voice. • Text-to-speech Vol. Adjust the volume of the replay voice for text messaging. • Button Beeps Turns on/off the button beep sounds and alarm for prohibited operations.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-4 ECO mode switch ...... 5-26 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...... 5-4 Shift lever indicator (2.0L 4 cylinder Three-way catalyst ...... 5-4 (MR20DD engine model) Manual Tire Pressure Monitoring System Transmission models only) (TPMS)...... 5-5 (if so equipped) ...... 5-26 Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-9 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped) . . . 5-27 Off-roadrecovery...... 5-9 System operation ...... 5-28 Rapid air pressure loss ...... 5-10 Turning the Traffic Sign Recognition Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...... 5-10 (TSR) system on and off ...... 5-29 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-11 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-30 Operating range ...... 5-12 System malfunction ...... 5-30 Push-button ignition switch positions ...... 5-12 System maintenance ...... 5-30 Emergency engine shut off ...... 5-13 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ...... 5-31 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery LDW system operation ...... 5-32 discharge ...... 5-13 How to enable/disable the LDW system .....5-34 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 5-14 LDW system limitations ...... 5-35 Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-36 Starting the engine ...... 5-15 System malfunction ...... 5-37 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...... 5-16 System maintenance ...... 5-37 Driving the vehicle ...... 5-16 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ...... 5-38 Continuously Variable Transmission BSW system operation ...... 5-40 (CVT) (if so equipped) ...... 5-16 How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-41 Manual transmission (if so equipped) ...... 5-22 BSW system limitations ...... 5-43 Parking brake ...... 5-24 BSW driving situations ...... 5-44 Hand type (if so equipped) ...... 5-25 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-47 Pedal type (if so equipped) ...... 5-25 System maintenance ...... 5-49 RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA)...... 5-50 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) ...... 5-86 RCTA system operation ...... 5-51 RAB system operation...... 5-87 How to enable/disable the RCTA Turning the RAB system on/off ...... 5-89 system ...... 5-54 RAB system limitations ...... 5-91 RCTA system limitations...... 5-56 System malfunction ...... 5-92 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-58 System maintenance ...... 5-93 System maintenance ...... 5-60 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Cruise control (if so equipped) ...... 5-61 Pedestrian Detection ...... 5-93 Precautions on cruise control ...... 5-61 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system Cruise control operations ...... 5-62 operation ...... 5-94 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-63 Turning the AEB with Pedestrian How to select the cruise control mode ...... 5-65 Detection system ON/OFF ...... 5-96 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control AEB with Pedestrian Detection system mode ...... 5-65 limitations ...... 5-98 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-100 mode operation ...... 5-66 System malfunction ...... 5-103 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control System maintenance ...... 5-103 mode switches ...... 5-68 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . 5-105 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control I-FCW system operation ...... 5-108 mode limitations ...... 5-74 Turning the I-FCW system on/off ...... 5-109 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-78 I-FCW system limitations ...... 5-111 System maintenance ...... 5-80 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-116 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise System malfunction ...... 5-118 control mode ...... 5-81 System maintenance ...... 5-119 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) ...... 5-120 Intelligent Trace Control ...... 5-134 Intelligent Driver Alertness system Active Ride Control ...... 5-134 operation ...... 5-120 Intelligent Engine Brake ...... 5-134 How to enable/disable the Intelligent Hill start assist system ...... 5-135 Driver Alertness (I-DA) system ...... 5-122 Rear Sonar System (RSS) ...... 5-136 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) System operation ...... 5-136 system limitations ...... 5-123 How to enable/disable the sonar Break-in schedule ...... 5-125 system ...... 5-138 Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-125 Sonar limitations ...... 5-140 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-126 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-140 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-127 System maintenance ...... 5-141 Power steering ...... 5-128 Cold weather driving ...... 5-141 Brake system ...... 5-129 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-141 Brake precautions ...... 5-129 Antifreeze ...... 5-141 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-129 Battery...... 5-141 Brake Assist ...... 5-131 Draining of coolant water ...... 5-142 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...... 5-131 Tire equipment ...... 5-142 Rise-up and build-up ...... 5-133 Special winter equipment ...... 5-142 Brake force distribution ...... 5-133 Driving on snow or ice ...... 5-142 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ...... 5-143 Chassis Control ...... 5-134 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING • If you suspect that exhaust fumes • The exhaust system and body should are entering the vehicle, drive with all be inspected by a qualified mechanic • Do not leave children or adults who windows fully open, and have the ve- whenever: would normally require the assis- hicle inspected immediately. a. The vehicle is raised for service. tance of others alone in your vehicle. • Do not run the engine in closed Pets should also not be left alone. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes spaces such as a garage. They could accidentally injure them- are entering into the passenger selves or others through inadvertent • Do not park the vehicle with the en- compartment. operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, gine running for any extended length c. You notice a change in the sound sunny days, temperatures in a closed of time. of the exhaust system. vehicle could quickly become high • Keep the rear vent windows, lift- d. You have had an accident involving enough to cause severe or possibly gates, doors and trunk lids (if so damage to the exhaust system, un- fatal injuries to people or animals. equipped) closed while driving, oth- derbody, or rear of the vehicle. • Closely supervise children when they erwise exhaust gases could be are around cars to prevent them drawn into the passenger compart- THREE-WAY CATALYST from playing and becoming locked in ment. If you must drive with one of The three-way catalyst is an emission con- the trunk where they could be seri- these open, follow these precau- trol device installed in the exhaust system. ously injured. Keep the car locked, tions: Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst with the rear seatback and trunk lid 1. Open all the windows. are burned at high temperatures to help securely latched when not in use, and 2. Set the air recirculation but- reduce pollutants. prevent children's access to car keys. ton to off and the fan control dial WARNING EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) to high to circulate the air. • If electrical wiring or other cable con- • The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- WARNING nections must pass to a trailer tem are very hot. Keep people, animals through the seal on the trunk lid or or flammable materials away from the • Do not breathe exhaust gases; they the body, follow the manufacturer's exhaust system components. contain colorless and odorless car- recommendation to prevent carbon • Do not stop or park the vehicle over bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is monoxide entry into the vehicle. flammable materials such as dry dangerous. It can cause uncon- grass, waste paper or rags. They may sciousness or death. ignite and cause a fire. 5-4 Starting and driving CAUTION TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Please note that the TPMS is not a substi- SYSTEM (TPMS) tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is • Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor- from leaded gasoline will seriously Each tire, including the spare (if provided), rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation reduce the three-way catalyst's abil- should be checked monthly when cold and has not reached the level to trigger illumi- ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants. inflated to the inflation pressure recom- nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. mended by the vehicle manufacturer on • Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure Your vehicle has also been equipped with a tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate electrical systems can cause overrich size than the size indicated on the vehicle when the system is not operating properly. fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, placard or tire inflation pressure label, you The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- causing it to overheat. Do not keep should determine the proper tire inflation bined with the low tire pressure telltale. driving if the engine misfires, or if no- pressure for those tires.) When the system detects a malfunction, ticeable loss of performance or other the telltale will flash for approximately one unusual operating conditions are de- As an added safety feature, your vehicle minute and then remain continuously illu- tected. Have the vehicle inspected has been equipped with a Tire Pressure minated. This sequence will continue upon promptly. It is recommended that Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as you visit a NISSAN dealer for this a low tire pressure telltale when one or the malfunction exists. When the malfunc- service. more of your tires is significantly under- tion indicator is illuminated, the system • Avoid driving with an extremely low inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire may not be able to detect or signal low tire fuel level. Running out of fuel could pressure telltale illuminates, you should pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions cause the engine to misfire, damag- stop and check your tires as soon as pos- may occur for a variety of reasons, including the three-way catalyst. sible, and inflate them to the proper pres- ing the installation of replacement or alter- sure. Driving on a significantly under- • Do not race the engine while warm- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and ing it up. prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction • Do not push or tow your vehicle to reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, telltale after replacing one or more tires or start the engine. and may affect the vehicle’s handling and wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the stopping ability. replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Starting and driving 5-5 Additional information: • The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning • The Tire and Loading Information label is • When using a wheel without the TPMS message is displayed in the odometer located in the driver's door opening. such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not when the low tire pressure warning light For additional information, see “Tire Pres- monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire. is illuminated and low tire pressure is de- sure Low - Add Air ” (P. 2-27) or “Low tire • The TPMS will activate only when the ve- tected. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” pressure warning light” (P. 2-11) “Tire Pres- hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 warning message turns off when the low sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 6-3). km/h). Also, this system may not detect a tire pressure warning light turns off. The low tire pressure warning light remains sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, WARNING a flat tire while driving). illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. • Radio waves could adversely affect • The low tire pressure warning light does The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning electric medical equipment. Those not automatically turn off when the tire message is displayed each time the igni- who use a pacemaker should contact pressure of all your tires is adjusted. After tion switch is placed in the ON position as the electric medical equipment the tires are inflated to the recom- long as the low tire pressure warning light manufacturer for the possible influ- mended pressure, the vehicle must be remains illuminated. ences before use. driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low • The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning tire pressure warning light. Use a tire is not displayed if the low tire pressure pressure gauge to check the tire warning light illuminates to indicate a pressure. TPMS malfunction. • Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires. 5-6 Starting and driving • If the low tire pressure warning light • When using a wheel without the Some devices and transmitters may tem- illuminates while driving, avoid sud- TPMS such as the spare tire, when a porarily interfere with the operation of the den steering maneuvers or abrupt spare tire is mounted or a wheel is TPMS and cause the low tire pressure braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull replaced, the TPMS will not function warning light to illuminate. off the road to a safe location and and the low tire pressure warning Some examples are: stop the vehicle as soon as possible. light will flash for approximately 1 • Facilities or electric devices using similar Driving with under-inflated tires may minute. The light will remain on after radio frequencies are near the vehicle. permanently damage the tires and 1 minute. Have your tires replaced • If a transmitter set to similar frequencies increase the likelihood of tire failure. and/or TPMS reset as soon as pos- is being used in or near the vehicle. Serious vehicle damage could occur sible. It is recommended that you and may lead to an accident and visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near could result in serious personal in- • Replacing tires with those not origi- the vehicle. jury. Check the tire pressure for all nally specified by NISSAN could af- four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to fect the proper operation of the The low tire pressure warning light may the recommended COLD tire pres- TPMS. illuminate in the following cases: sure shown on the Tire and Loading • Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol • If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and Information label to turn the low tire tire sealant into the tires, as this may tire without TPMS. pressure warning light off. If you have cause a malfunction of the tire pres- • If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sure sensors. as soon as possible. For additional has not been registered. information on changing a flat tire, • If the wheel is not originally specified by see “Flat tire” (P. 6-3). CAUTION NISSAN. Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Starting and driving 5-7 FCC Notice: For Canada Type B (if so equipped): Operation: For USA: This device contains licence-exempt 1. Add air to the tire. transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply This device complies with Part 15 of the 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica- with Innovation, Science and Economic FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- tors will start flashing. lowing two conditions: (1) This device Development Canada’s licence-exempt may not cause harmful interference, and RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol- 3. When the designated pressure is (2) this device must accept any interfer- lowing two conditions: (1) This device reached, the horn beeps once and the ence received, including interference may not cause interference. (2) This de- hazard indicators stop flashing. that may cause undesired operation. vice must accept any interference, including interference that may cause un- 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. NOTE: desired operation of the device. • If the tire is over-inflated more than Changes or modifications not expressly approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn approved by the party responsible for TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert beeps and the hazard indicators flash compliance could void the user's au- three times. To correct the pressure, When adding air to an under-inflated tire, push the core of the valve stem on the thority to operate the equipment. the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides tire briefly to release pressure. When For Canada Type A (if so equipped): visual and audible signals outside the ve- the pressure reaches the designated hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec- pressure, the horn beeps once. This device complies with Industry ommended COLD tire pressure. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). • If the hazard indicator does not flash Operation is subject to the following two Vehicle set-up: within approximately 15 seconds after conditions: (1) this device may not cause 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place. starting to inflate the tire, it indicates interference, and (2) this device must ac- that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not cept any interference, including interfer- 2. Apply the parking brake and place the operating. ence that may cause undesired opera- shift lever in the P (Park) position (if so • The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill tion of the device. equipped). Tire Alert under the following condi- 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON positions: tion. Do not start the engine. – If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.

5-8 Starting and driving – The air pressure from the inflation Be alert and drive defensively at all times. OFF-ROAD RECOVERY device is not sufficient to inflate the Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive While driving, the right side or left side tire. speed, high speed cornering, or sudden wheels may unintentionally leave the road steering maneuvers, because these driving – There is a malfunction in the TPMS surface. If this occurs, maintain control of practices could cause you to lose control of system. the vehicle by following the procedure be- your vehicle. – There is a malfunction in the horn low. Please note that this procedure is only or hazard indicators. As with any vehicle, loss of control could a general guide. The vehicle must be driven – The identification code of the tire’s result in a collision with other vehicles or as appropriate based on the conditions of pressure sensor is not registered to objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, the vehicle, road and traffic. particularly if the loss of control causes the system. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. – The battery of the tire pressure the vehicle to slide sideways. sensor is low. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving 2. Do not apply the brakes. • If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not oper- when tired. Never drive when under the in- 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering ate due to TPMS interference, move fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- wheel with both hands and try to hold a the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward scription or over-the-counter drugs which straight course. or forward and try again. may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in “Safety – Seats, seat 4. When appropriate, slowly release the ac- If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a belts and supplemental restraint system” celerator pedal to gradually slow the tire pressure gauge. (P.1-2), and also instruct your passengers to vehicle. AVOIDING COLLISION AND do so. 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ROLLOVER Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in vehicle to follow the road while vehicle collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, speed is reduced. Do not attempt to WARNING an unbelted person is significantly more drive the vehicle back onto the road sur- likely to die than a person wearing a seat face until vehicle speed is reduced. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe belt. 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn and prudent manner may result in loss the steering wheel until both tires return of control or an accident. to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.

Starting and driving 5-9 • If you decide that it is not safe to return WARNING 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and the vehicle to the road surface based contact a roadside emergency service on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, If there is a sudden loss of tire air pres- to change the tire. For additional infor- gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in sure, the vehicle will generally move or mation, see “Changing a flat tire” (P. 6-3 ). a safe place off the road. pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this situation, losing control of the ve- DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS hicle may cause a collision and result in DRIVING Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can personal injury. occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged To help avoid loss of control: WARNING due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air • Do not rapidly apply the brakes. pressure loss can also be caused by driving Never drive under the influence of alco- • Do not rapidly release the accelerator on under-inflated tires. hol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood- pedal. stream reduces coordination, delays Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han- • Do not rapidly turn the steering reaction time and impairs judgement. dling and stability of the vehicle, especially wheel. Driving after drinking alcohol increases at highway speeds. the likelihood of being involved in an 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by accident injuring yourself and others. maintaining the correct air pressure and 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering Additionally, if you are injured in an ac- visually inspecting the tires for wear and wheel with both hands and try to hold a cident, alcohol can increase the sever- damage. For additional information, see straight course. ity of the injury. “Wheels and tires” (P. 6-3). If a tire rapidly 3. When appropriate, slowly release the ac- NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driv- celerator pedal to gradually slow the ever, you must choose not to drive under ing, maintain control of the vehicle by fol- vehicle. the influence of alcohol. Every year thou- lowing the procedure below. Please note sands of people are injured or killed in that this procedure is only a general guide. 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe lo- alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo- The vehicle must be driven as appropriate cation off the road and away from traffic cal laws vary on what is considered to be based on the conditions of the vehicle, road if possible. legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol and traffic. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- affects all people differently and most ally stop the vehicle. people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

5-10 Starting and driving PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! When the ignition switch is pushed without That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, depressing the brake pedal, the ignition prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't switch position will illuminate as follows: drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is Push center: impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition. • Once to change to ON. • Two times to change to OFF. The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position. The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be placed in the OFF position until the shift lever is LSD2645 moved to the P (Park) position. WARNING When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as fol- Do not operate the push-button igni- lows: tion switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) stop when the ignition switch is pushed position. three consecutive times in quick suc- 2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition cession or the ignition switch is pushed switch position will change to the ON and held for more than 2 seconds.) If position. the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash 3. Push the ignition switch again to the and serious injury. OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-11 The shift lever can be moved from the P The operating range of the engine start (Park) position if the ignition switch is in function is inside of the vehicle O1 . the ON position and the brake pedal is • The luggage area is not included in the depressed. operating range, but the Intelligent Key If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, may function. the ignition switch cannot be moved • If the Intelligent Key is placed on the in- from the LOCK position. strument panel or inside the glove box, Some indicators and warnings for opera- storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent tion are displayed in the meter. For addi- Key may not function. tional information, see “Warning lights, indi- • If the Intelligent Key is placed near the cator lights and audible reminders” (P. 2-7). door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function. PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH LSD2089 POSITIONS OPERATING RANGE LOCK (Normal parking position) The Intelligent Key functions can only be The ignition switch can only be locked in used when the Intelligent Key is within the this position. specified operating range. The ignition switch will be unlocked when it When the Intelligent Key battery is almost is pushed to the ON position while carrying discharged or strong radio waves are pres- the Intelligent Key. ent near the operating location, the Intelli- gent Key system’s operating range be- The ignition switch will lock when any door comes narrower and may not function is opened or closed with the ignition properly. switched off. If the Intelligent Key is within the operating ON (Normal operating position) range, it is possible for anyone, even some- The ignition system and the electrical ac- one who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to cessory power activate at this position push the ignition switch to start the engine. without the engine turned on. 5-12 Starting and driving The ON position has a battery saver feature AUTO ACC: that will place the ignition switch in the OFF With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the position, if the vehicle is not running, after Intelligent Key with you, and the ignition some time under the following conditions: switch placed from the ON to the OFF po- • All doors are closed. sition, the radio can still be used for a period • The shift lever is in the P (Park) position. of time, or until the driver’s door is opened. The battery saver feature will be canceled if After a period of time, functions such as any of the following conditions occurs: radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands- • Any door is opened. Free Phone System may be restarted by • The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) pressing the “POWER button/VOLUME con- position. trol knob” or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, see “Monitor, cli- • The ignition switch changes position. mate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” (P. 4-2). CAUTION SSD0860 EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the AUTO ACC or ON posi- To shut off the engine in an emergency BATTERY DISCHARGE tion when the engine is not running for situation while driving, perform the follow- If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® an extended period. This can discharge ing procedure: is discharged or environmental conditions the battery. • Rapidly push the ignition switch three interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec- start the engine according to the following OFF onds, or procedure: The ignition switch is in the OFF position • Push and hold the ignition switch for 1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) when the engine is turned off using the more than 2 seconds. position. ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch. 2. Firmly apply the foot brake. 3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel- ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

Starting and driving 5-13 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

After step 3 is performed, when the igni- NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER • Make sure the area around the vehicle is tion switch is pushed without depress- SYSTEM clear. ing the brake pedal, the ignition switch • Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System position will change to the ON position. ant, brake and clutch fluid (if so equipped), will not allow the engine to start without and windshield-washer fluid as fre- 4. Push the ignition switch while depress- the use of the registered key. ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds quently as possible, or at least whenever after the chime sounds. The engine will If the engine fails to start using a registered you refuel. start. key (for example, when interference is • Check that all windows and lights are caused by another registered key, an auto- clean. mated toll road device or automatic pay- NOTE: • Visually inspect tires for their appearance ment device on the key ring), restart the • When the ignition switch is pushed to and condition. Also check tires for proper engine using the following procedure: the ON position or the engine is started inflation. by the above procedure, the Intelligent 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- • Lock all doors. Key battery discharge indicator ap- tion for approximately 5 seconds. pears in the vehicle information dis- • Position seat and adjust head play even when the Intelligent Key is 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or restraints/headrests. inside the vehicle. This is not a mal- LOCK position, and wait approximately • Adjust inside and outside mirrors. function. To turn off the Intelligent Key 10 seconds. • Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers battery discharge indicator, touch the 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. to do likewise. ignition switch with the Intelligent Key • Check the operation of warning lights 4. Restart the engine while holding the de- again. when the ignition switch is placed in the vice (which may have caused the inter- • If the Intelligent Key battery discharge ON position. For additional information, ference) separate from the registered indicator appears, replace the battery see “Warning lights, indicator lights and key. as soon as possible. For additional in- audible reminders” (P. 2-7). formation, see “Battery replacement” If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN (P. 8-22). recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

5-14 Starting and driving STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. gine. Release the accelerator pedal moderate speed for a short distance when the engine starts. first, especially in cold weather. In cold 2. Continuously Variable Transmission weather, keep the engine running for a model: • If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accel- minimum of2-3minutes before shut- Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu- erator pedal all the way to the floor ting it off. Starting and stopping the en- tral). P (Park) is recommended. and hold it. Push the ignition switch to gine over a short period of time may The starter is designed not to operate the ON position to start cranking the make the vehicle more difficult to start. if the shift lever is in any of the driving engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop 5. To stop the engine, with the intelligent positions. cranking by pushing the ignition key inside the vehicle, move the shift le- switch to the LOCK position. After Manual Transmission (M/T) model: ver to the P (Park) position or to N (Neu- cranking the engine, release the accel- tral) and apply the parking brake (M/T) Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). De- erator pedal. Crank the engine with and push the ignition switch to the OFF press the clutch pedal to the floor. your foot off the accelerator pedal by position. The starter is designed not to operate depressing the brake pedal and push- unless the clutch pedal is fully ing the ignition switch to start the en- NOTE: depressed. gine. If the engine starts, but fails to Care should be taken to avoid situa- run, repeat the above procedure. tions that can lead to potential battery 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi- discharge and potential no-start con- tion. Depress the brake pedal and the CAUTION ditions such as: clutch pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition switch to start the engine. Do not operate the starter for more 1. Installation or extended use of elec- than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine tronic accessories that consume bat- To start the engine immediately, push does not start, push the ignition switch tery power when the engine is not and release the ignition switch while de- to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD pressing the brake pedal with the igni- before cranking again, otherwise the players, etc.). tion switch in any position. starter could be damaged. • If the engine is very hard to start in 2. The vehicle is not driven regularly extremely cold weather or when re- 4. Warm-up and/or only driven short distances. starting, depress the accelerator Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 In these cases, the battery may need to pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the seconds after starting. Do not race the be charged to maintain battery health. floor) and while holding, crank the en- engine while warming it up. Drive at a

Starting and driving 5-15 DRIVING THE VEHICLE

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CAUTION equipped) TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so equipped) • Except in an emergency, do not shift Vehicles started with the Remote Engine to the N (Neutral) position while driv- Start require the ignition switch to be ing. Coasting with the transmission WARNING placed in the ON position before the shift in the N (Neutral) position may cause lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi- • Do not depress the accelerator pedal serious damage to the transmission. tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- • To avoid possible damage to your ve- position, follow these steps: tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low) hicle, when stopping the vehicle on 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on (if so equipped). Always depress the an uphill grade, do not hold the ve- you. brake pedal until shifting is com- hicle by depressing the accelerator pleted. Failure to do so could cause 2. Apply the brake. pedal. The foot brake should be used you to lose control and have an for this purpose. 3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON accident. position. The CVT in your vehicle is electronically • Cold engine idle speed is high, so use controlled to produce maximum power For additional information, see “NISSAN In- caution when shifting into a forward and smooth operation. telligent Key®” (P. 3-2). or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. The recommended operating procedures • Do not downshift abruptly on slip- for this transmission are shown on the fol- pery roads. This may cause a loss of lowing pages. Follow these procedures for control. maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. • Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is NOTE: moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is Engine power may be automatically re- reversing. This could cause an acci- duced to protect the CVT if the engine dent or damage the transmission. speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

5-16 Starting and driving Starting the vehicle CAUTION The Continuously Variable Transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST WARNING • Except in an emergency, do not shift be depressed before shifting from P • Do not depress the accelerator pedal to the N (Neutral) position while driv- (Park) to any drive position while the ig- while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- ing. Coasting with the transmission nition switch is in the ON position. tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low) (if in the N (Neutral) position may cause The shift lever cannot be moved out of P so equipped). Always depress the brake serious damage to the transmission. (Park) and into any of the other gear po- pedal until shifting is completed. Fail- • To avoid possible damage to your ve- sitions if the ignition switch is placed in ure to do so could cause you to lose hicle, when stopping the vehicle on the LOCK, OFF or AUTO ACC position. control and have an accident. an uphill grade, do not hold the ve- • Cold engine idle speed is high, so use hicle by depressing the accelerator caution when shifting into a forward pedal. The foot brake should be used or reverse gear before the engine has for this purpose. warmed up. 1. After starting the engine, fully depress • Do not downshift abruptly on slip- the foot brake pedal before moving the pery roads. This may cause a loss of shift lever out of the P (Park) position. control. 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed • Never shift to either the P (Park) or R and move the shift lever into a driving (Reverse) position while the vehicle is gear. moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually reversing. This could cause an acci- start the vehicle in motion. dent or damage the transmission. 4. Stop the vehicle completely before moving the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-17 Shifting P (Park) After starting the engine, fully depress the CAUTION brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions. To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the ve- WARNING hicle is completely stopped. Apply the parking brake if the shift le- Use the P (Park) shift lever position when ver is in any position while the engine is the vehicle is parked or when starting the not running. Failure to do so could engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely cause the vehicle to move unexpect- stopped. The brake pedal must be de- edly or roll away and result in serious pressed and the shift lever button personal injury or property damage. pressed in to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). LSD3738 If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or Apply the parking brake. When parking on a AUTO ACC position for any reason while the To move the shift lever: hill, apply the parking brake first, then place vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any drive position, the shift lever into the P (Park) position. the ignition switch cannot be placed in the Press the button OA while de- LOCK position. If this occurs, perform the R (Reverse) pressing the brake pedal following steps: CAUTION 1. Apply the parking brake when the ve- Press the button A to shift O hicle is stopped. To prevent transmission damage, use 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) to park the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. Shift without pressing the button the vehicle and place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. OA

5-18 Starting and driving Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Manual shift mode (if so M6 (6th) and M5 (5th) Make sure the vehicle is completely equipped) Use this position when driving up long stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) When the shift lever is in the manual shift slopes or for engine braking when driving position. The brake pedal must be de- down long slopes. pressed and the shift lever button gate, the transmission is ready for the pressed in to move the shift lever from P manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd) (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to selected manually by moving the shift le- Use for hill climbing or engine braking on R (Reverse). ver up or down. To cancel manual shift downhill grades. mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive) N (Neutral) position. The transmission returns to auto- M1 (1st) Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- matic driving mode. Use this position when climbing steep hills gaged. The engine can be started in this When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and to the manual shift gate with the vehicle sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak- restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is stopped or while driving, the transmission ing on steep downhill grades. moving. enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges • Remember not to drive at high speeds for D (Drive) can be selected manually. In the manual extended periods of time in lower than Use this position for all normal forward shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the 6th range. This reduces fuel economy. driving. the position indicator in the meter. When When shifting up moving the shift lever to the manual shift L (Low) (if so equipped) gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st) Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts Use this position for maximum engine up to 7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed. to higher range.) braking on steep downhill gradients/ Shift ranges up or down one by one as When shifting down climbing steep slopes and whenever ap- follows: Move the shift lever to the − (down) side. proaching sharp bends. Do not use the L ⇔ ⇔ ⇔ ⇔ ⇔ ⇔ (Shifts to lower range.) (Low) position in any other circumstances. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M7 (7th) • Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in Use this position for all normal forward succession. driving at highway speeds.

Starting and driving 5-19 • The transmission will automatically • CVT operation is limited to automatic downshift the gears. (For example, if you drive mode when CVT fluid temperature select the 3rd range, the transmission will is extremely low even if manual shift shift down between the 3rd and 1st mode is selected. This is not a malfunc- gears.) tion. When CVT fluid warms up, manual When canceling the manual shift mode mode can be selected. • When the CVT fluid temperature is high, Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) posi- the shift range may upshift in lower rpm tion to return the transmission to the nor- than usual. This is not a malfunction. mal driving mode. • In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control. LSD3739 • When this situation occurs, the Con- Shift lock release tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator light will blink and If the battery charge is low or discharged, the chime will sound. the shift lever may not be moved from the • In the manual shift mode, the trans- P (Park) position even with the brake pedal mission may shift up automatically to a depressed and the shift lever button higher range than selected if the en- pressed. gine speed is too high. When the ve- It will be necessary to jump start or have hicle speed decreases, the transmis- your battery charged. For additional infor- sion automatically shifts down and mation, see “Jump starting” (P. 6-9). It is rec- shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle ommended that you contact a NISSAN comes to a stop. dealer or a professional towing service.

5-20 Starting and driving To move the shift lever, complete the fol- WARNING lowing procedure: 1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK If the shift lever cannot be moved from position. the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is de- 2. Apply the parking brake. pressed, the stop lights may not work. 3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a Malfunctioning stop lights could cause 3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift lock an accident injuring yourself and release cover. others. • If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used. 4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down. LSD2647 5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift Drive sport mode switch lock release. To select the drive sport mode, push the 6. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi- drive sport mode switch with the shift lever tion to unlock the steering wheel. Now in the D (Drive) position. the vehicle may be moved to the desired The drive sport mode indicator in the ve- location. hicle information display illuminates next If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P to the Transmission Shift Position indicator. (Park), have the transmission checked as To turn off the drive sport mode, push the soon as possible. It is recommended that drive sport mode switch again. The drive you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. sport mode indicator will turn off. When the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D (Drive), the drive sport mode will be automatically turned off.

Starting and driving 5-21 OFF position: may come on to indicate the fail-safe MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so For normal driving and fuel economy, use mode is activated. For additional infor- equipped) the OFF position. mation, see “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” (P. 2-9). This will occur even if all WARNING ON position: electrical circuits are functioning prop- For driving up or down long slopes where erly. In this case, place the ignition switch • Do not downshift abruptly on slip- engine braking is necessary, or for powerful in the OFF position and wait for 10 sec- pery roads. This may cause a loss of acceleration, use the ON position. The onds. Then push the switch back to the control. transmission will automatically select a dif- ON position. The vehicle should return to • Do not over-rev the engine when ferent gear ratio, allowing the engine to its normal operating condition. If it does shifting to a lower gear. This may provide high output. not return to its normal operating condi- cause a loss of control or engine tion, have the transmission checked and damage. Remember not to drive at high speeds for repaired, if necessary. It is recommended extended periods of time with the drive • Do not shift to the N (Neutral) posi- that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this tion while driving. Doing so may re- sport mode in the ON position. This re- service. duces fuel economy. sult in an accident due to loss of engine braking. WARNING Accelerator downshift — in D (Drive) position — When the high fluid temperature pro- CAUTION tection mode or fail-safe operation oc- For passing or hill climbing, depress the curs, vehicle speed may be gradually • Do not rest your foot on the clutch accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts reduced. The reduced speed may be pedal while driving. This may cause the transmission down into a lower gear, lower than other traffic, which could in- clutch damage. depending on the vehicle speed. crease the chance of a collision. Be es- • Fully depress the clutch pedal before pecially careful when driving. If neces- Fail-safe shifting to help prevent transmission sary, pull to the side of the road at a safe damage. If the vehicle is driven under extreme place and allow the transmission to re- • Stop your vehicle completely before conditions, such as excessive wheel turn to normal operation, or have it re- shifting into R (Reverse). spinning and subsequent hard braking, paired if necessary. the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

5-22 Starting and driving • When the vehicle is stopped with the Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, engine running (for example, at a 3rd, 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and re- according to vehicle speed. lease the clutch pedal with the foot To back up, lift up on the shift lever ring O1 brake applied. and then move it to the R (Reverse) position • Do not shift to the N (Neutral) posi- after stopping the vehicle completely. tion while driving. Doing so may re- The shift lever ring O1 returns to its original sult in an accident due to loss of en- position when the shift lever is moved to gine braking. the N (Neutral) position. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Re- SSD0552 verse) or 1 (1st). Shifting Suggested up-shift speeds To change gears or when upshifting or The following are suggested vehicle downshifting, depress the clutch pedal speeds for shifting into a higher gear. fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then These suggestions relate to fuel economy release the clutch slowly and smoothly. and vehicle performance. Actual upshift To ensure smooth gear changes, fully de- speeds will vary according to road condi- press the clutch pedal before operating the tions, the weather and individual driving shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully habits. depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans- mission damage may occur.

Starting and driving 5-23 PARKING BRAKE

2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine models) 2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine models) WARNING (6 M/T) (6 M/T) • Be sure the parking brake is fully re- GEAR Change mph (km/h) GEAR mph (km/h) leased before driving. Failure to do so 1st to 2nd 8(13) 1st 30 (48) can cause brake failure and lead to 2nd to 3rd 17 (27) 2nd 52 (84) an accident. 3rd to 4th 25 (40) 3rd 73 (117) • Do not release the parking brake 4th to 5th 36 (58) 4th 94 (152) from outside the vehicle. 5th to 6th 51 (82) 5th — • Do not use the shift lever in place of 6th — the parking brake. When parking, be Suggested maximum speed in sure the parking brake is fully each gear engaged. Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is • To help avoid risk of injury or death not running smoothly or if you need to through unintended operation of the accelerate. vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require Do not exceed the maximum suggested the assistance of others or pets unat- speed (shown below) in any gear. For level tended in your vehicle. Additionally, road driving, use the highest gear sug- the temperature inside a closed ve- gested for that speed. Always observe hicle on a warm day can quickly be- posted speed limits, and drive according to come high enough to cause a signifi- the road conditions, which will ensure safe cant risk of injury or death to people operation. Do not over-rev the engine and pets. when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

5-24 Starting and driving 3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, press the button and lower completely OB . 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

LSD2197 LSD0158 HAND TYPE (if so equipped) PEDAL TYPE (if so equipped) To engage: Pull the lever up OA . To engage: Firmly depress the parking To release: brake. 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. position. Continuously Variable Transmission 3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal models: and it will release. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn- position. ing light goes out.

Starting and driving 5-25 ECO MODE SWITCH

The ECO mode cannot be turned off while the accelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECO mode switch is pushed off. Release the accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode. The ECO mode will turn off automatically if a malfunction occurs in the system. Turn off the ECO mode or depress the accelerator pedal fully when: • Driving with a heavy load of passengers or cargo in the vehicle • Driving on a steep uphill slope • ECO mode may affect air conditioner LSD3737 performance LSD2143 The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel NOTE: SHIFT LEVER INDICATOR (2.0L economy by controlling the throttle sensi- 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model) tivity and transmission points. Selecting this drive mode will not neces- MANUAL TRANSMISSION MODELS sarily improve fuel economy as many driv- To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO ONLY) (if so equipped) mode switch. The ECO mode indicator light ing factors influence its effectiveness. (on the meter or vehicle information dis- The shift lever indicator is used to support play) will remain lit while the mode is active. the suitable timing of gear change. It operates only when the ECO mode is on. To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO mode switch again. The ECO mode indica- The shift indicator icon and recommended tor light (on the meter or vehicle informa- gear position are displayed. tion display) will turn off. The shift indicator icon indicates when to upshift or downshift for fuel economy.

5-26 Starting and driving TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) (if so equipped)

NOTE: WARNING • The shift indicator is a guide for fuel economy. Always pay attention to road The TSR system is only intended to be a conditions and other traffic. support device to help provide the • Downshift the indicator icon to the 1 driver with information. It is not a re- (1st) position if not displayed. placement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to • If the downshifting icon is displayed drive safely. It cannot prevent acci- when decreasing your vehicle speed, it dents due to carelessness. It is the driv- indicates that the engine speed is low er’s responsibility to stay alert and compared to the gear position. drive safely at all times.

LSD3893 The TSR system provides the driver with information about the most recently detected speed limit. The system captures the road sign information with the multi-sensing front camera unit OA located on the windshield in front of the inside rearview mirror and displays the detected signs in the vehicle information display. For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, the speed limit displayed is based on a combination of navigation system data and live camera recognition. TSR information is always displayed at the top of the vehicle information display, and optionally in the main central area of the display screen.

Starting and driving 5-27 LSD3803 LSD3789 LSD3378 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter ᭺A Speed sign detected (in Canada) display display ᭺B SYSTEM OPERATION Speed sign detected (in USA) C The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system ᭺ Speed sign detected (no speed limit displays the following types of road signs: detected) ᭺D “Do not pass” sign detected

5-28 Starting and driving CAUTION – In areas not covered by the navigation system. • The TSR system is intended as an aid – If there are deviations in relation to careful driving. It is the driver’s re- to the navigation, for example due sponsibility to stay alert, drive safely, to changes in the road routing. and observe all road regulations that currently apply, including looking out – When overtaking buses or trucks for road signs. with speed stickers. • The TSR system may not function properly under the following conditions: – When the road sign is not clearly visible, for example, due to damage or weather conditions. LSD3978 – When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the For vehicles with the 7 inch meter multi-sensing camera unit. display – When the headlights are not TURNING THE TRAFFIC SIGN bright, for example, due to dirt on RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM ON the lens or if the aiming is not ad- AND OFF justed properly. – When strong light enters the camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) – When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

Starting and driving 5-29 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY SYSTEM MAINTENANCE UNAVAILABLE The TSR system uses the same multi- If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight sensing front camera unit that is used by under high temperature conditions (over the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system, approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then located in front of the interior rearview mir- started, the TSR system may be deacti- ror. For additional information, see ”System vated automatically. The “Unavailable: High maintenance” (P. 5-37). Camera Temperature” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take: When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR system will resume operating LSD3790 automatically. For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display SYSTEM MALFUNCTION Perform the following steps to enable or If the TSR system malfunctions, it will be disable the TSR system. turned off automatically and the system 1. Press the button until “Settings” dis- “Malfunction” warning message will appear plays in the vehicle information display. in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- Action to take: sistance.” Then press the OK button. If the TSR “Malfunction” message appears, 2. Select “Speed Limit Sign” and press the pull off the road at a safe location and stop OK button to turn the system on or off. the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the TSR “Malfunction” message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-30 Starting and driving LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road. The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit OA located above the inside mirror. The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, see “LDW system operation” (P. 5-32). LSD3893

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. • This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

Starting and driving 5-31 LSD3291 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display LDW SYSTEM OPERATION

5-32 Starting and driving The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD3782 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

Starting and driving 5-33 LSD3486 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM

5-34 Starting and driving Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Lane Departure Warning” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. • The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.

LSD3779 • Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display function properly: – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Starting and driving 5-35 – When driving on slippery roads, – On roads where the discontinued – When strong light enters the lane such as on ice or snow. lane markers are still detectable. camera unit. (For example, the – When driving on winding or un- – On roads where there are sharp light directly shines on the front of even roads. curves. the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) – When there is a lane closure due to – On roads where there are sharply – When a sudden change in bright- road repairs. contrasting objects, such as shad- ness occurs. (For example, when – When driving in a makeshift or ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel temporary lane. seams or lines remaining after or under a bridge.) – When driving on roads where the road repairs. (The LDW system SYSTEM TEMPORARILY could detect these items as lane lane width is too narrow. UNAVAILABLE – When driving without normal tire markers.) conditions (for example, tire wear, – On roads where the traveling lane If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight low tire pressure, installation of merges or separates. under high temperature conditions (over spare tire, tire chains, nonstan- – When the vehicle’s traveling direc- approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then dard wheels). tion does not align with the lane started, the LDW system may be deacti- marker. vated automatically and the following – When the vehicle is equipped with message will appear in the vehicle infor- non-original brake parts or sus- – When traveling close to the ve- mation display: “Unavailable: High Cabin pension parts. hicle in front of you, which ob- Temperature.” – When you are towing a trailer or structs the lane camera unit de- other vehicle. tection range. When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating • The system may not function prop- – When rain, snow, dirt or an object automatically. erly under the following conditions: adheres to the windshield in front – On roads where there are multiple of the lane camera unit. parallel lane markers; lane mark- – When the headlights are not ers that are faded or not painted bright due to dirt on the lens or if clearly; yellow painted lane mark- the aiming is not adjusted ers; non-standard lane markers; properly. or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

5-36 Starting and driving The LDW system is not designed to warn • Do not place reflective materials, such as under the following conditions: white paper or a mirror, on the instru- • When you operate the lane change signal ment panel. The reflection of sunlight and change traveling lanes in the direc- may adversely affect the camera unit’s tion of the signal. (The LDW system will capability of detecting the lane markers. become operable again approximately 2 • Do not strike or damage the areas seconds after the lane change signal is around the camera unit. Do not touch the turned off.) camera lens or remove the screw located • When the vehicle speed lowers to less on the camera unit. If the camera unit is than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION LSD3484 If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE cel automatically and “Not Available Sys- The lane camera unit O1 for the LDW system Malfunction” will appear in the vehicle tem is located above the inside mirror. To information display. If “Not Available Sys- keep the proper operation of the LDW system Malfunction” appears in the vehicle in- tem and prevent a system malfunction, be formation display, pull off the road to a safe sure to observe the following: location and stop the vehicle. Place the • Always keep the windshield clean. shift lever in the P (Park) position and the • Do not attach a sticker (including trans- ignition switch in the OFF position and re- parent material) or install an accessory start the engine/motor. If “Not Available near the camera unit. System Malfunction” continues to appear in the vehicle information display, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-37 BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death. • The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system. LSD3832 SSD1030 Detection zone The BSW system helps alert the driver of The BSW system uses radar sensors O1 other vehicles in adjacent lanes when installed near the rear bumper to detect The radar sensors can detect vehicles on changing lanes. other vehicles in an adjacent lane. either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

5-38 Starting and driving LSD3784 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

Starting and driving 5-39 BSW SYSTEM OPERATION The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The BSW indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicles leaves the detection zone. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, see “BSW driving situations” (P. 5-44). LSD3804 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

5-40 Starting and driving LSD3742 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-41 Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Blind Spot Warning” (if so equipped) or “Blind Spot (BSW)” (if so equipped) and press the OK button. NOTE: • When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted. • The RCTA system (if so equipped) is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled. • When the BSW system is turned on, the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the ve- LSD3805 hicle information display illuminates. For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

5-42 Starting and driving BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – A vehicle that passes through the • Do not attach stickers (including WARNING detection zone quickly. transparent material), install acces- – When overtaking several vehicles sories or apply additional paint near Listed below are the system limitations in a row, the vehicles after the first the radar sensors. These conditions for the BSW system. Failure to operate vehicle may not be detected if may reduce the ability of the radar to the vehicle in accordance with these they are traveling close together. detect other vehicles. system limitations could result in seri- • The radar sensors’ detection zone is • Excessive noise (for example, audio ous injury or death. designed based on a standard lane system volume, open vehicle win- • The BSW system cannot detect all ve- width. When driving in a wider lane, dow) will interfere with the chime hicles under all conditions. the radar sensors may not detect ve- sound, and it may not be heard. • The radar sensors may not be able to hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv- detect and activate BSW when cer- ing in a narrow lane, the radar sen- tain objects are present such as: sors may detect vehicles driving two – Pedestrian, bicycles, animals. lanes away. – Vehicles such as motorcycles, low • The radar sensors are designed to ig- height vehicles, or high ground nore most stationary objects; how- clearance vehicles. ever, objects such as guardrails, – Oncoming vehicles. walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is – Vehicles remaining in the detec- a normal operation condition. tion zone when you accelerate from a stop. • The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other – A vehicle merging into an adjacent vehicles: lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle. – Severe weather – A vehicle approaching rapidly – Road spray from behind. – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on – A vehicle which your vehicle over- the vehicle takes rapidly.

Starting and driving 5-43 Another vehicle approaching from behind Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane. NOTE: • The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

LSD2299 LSD2300 Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind Illustration2–Approaching from behind BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the Indicator on detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. Indicator off NOTE: • The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly Indicator flashing from behind. • If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. 5-44 Starting and driving • The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly. • If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302 LSD2303 Illustration3–Overtaking another Illustration4–Overtaking another vehicle vehicle Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indica- detection zone, then the system chimes tor light illuminates if you overtake a ve- (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator hicle and that vehicle stays in the detection light flashes. zone for approximately 2 seconds. NOTE: • When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

Starting and driving 5-45 • The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

LSD2305 LSD2308 Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Illustration 6 – Entering from the side Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicator detection zone, then the system chimes light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de- (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator tection zone from either side. light flashes. NOTE: • If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-46 Starting and driving LSD3743 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

Starting and driving 5-47 When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar Obstruction” or the “Unavail- able: Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink OA in the vehicle information display. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD3806 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

5-48 Starting and driving Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn additional paint near the radar sensors. off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA indi- Do not strike or damage the area around cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in- the radar sensors. It is recommended that formation display. you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a NOTE: collision. If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Radio frequency statement Action to take: (Type A) (if so equipped) For USA Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the FCC : OAYSRR2B LSD3832 message continues to appear, have the This device complies with part 15 of the system checked. It is recommended that SYSTEM MAINTENANCE FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The two radar sensors O1 for the BSW and lowing two conditions: RCTA systems are located near the rear (1) This device may not cause harmful bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- interference, and (2) this device must ac- dar sensors clean. cept any interference received, including The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- interference that may cause undesired porary ambient conditions such as splash- operation. ing water, mist or fog. FCC Warning The blocked condition may also be caused Changes or modifications not expressly by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- approved by the party responsible for structing the radar sensors. compliance could void the user’s author- Check for and remove objects obstructing ity to operate the equipment the area around the radar sensors.

Starting and driving 5-49 REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

For Canada FCC Warning WARNING Applicable law: Canada 310 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for Failure to follow the warnings and in- This device complies with Industry structions for proper use of the RCTA Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment system could result in serious injury or Operation is subject to the following two death. conditions: (1) this device may not cause For Canada • The RCTA system is not a replace- interference, and (2) this device must ac- Applicable law: Canada 310 ment for proper driving procedures cept any interference, including interfer- and is not designed to prevent con- ence that may cause undesired opera- This device contains licence-exempt tact with vehicles or objects. When tion of the device. transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic backing out of a parking space, al- Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz Development Canada’s licence-exempt ways use the side and rear mirrors Output power: less than 20 milliwatts RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol- and turn and look in the direction lowing two conditions: your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system. Radio frequency statement 1. This device may not cause (Type B) (if so equipped) interference. The RCTA system will assist you when For USA backing out from a parking space. When 2. This device must accept any interfer- the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de- FCC : OAYSRR2B ence, including interference that may signed to detect other vehicles approach- cause undesired operation of the ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the This device complies with part 15 of the device. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- system detects cross traffic, it will alert you. lowing two conditions: Radio frequency radiation exposure information: This equipment complies (1) This device may not cause harmful with radiation exposure limits set forth interference, and (2) this device must ac- for an uncontrolled environment. This cept any interference received, including equipment should be installed and oper- interference that may cause undesired ated with minimum distance of 20 cm operation. between the radiator and your body.

5-50 Starting and driving LSD3784 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

Starting and driving 5-51 When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD3804 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver 2. BSW/RCTA Indicator is backing out of a parking space. 5-52 Starting and driving LSD2216 LSD3832 The RCTA system uses radar sensors O1 installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle. The radar sensors O1 can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) away.

Starting and driving 5-53 LSD3744 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM

5-54 Starting and driving Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Rear Cross Traffic Alert” and press the OK button. When the RCTA system is turned on, the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates. NOTE: • The RCTA system is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled. • When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3781 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

Starting and driving 5-55 • Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as: – Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles – A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) – A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) • The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations: – Illustration OA : When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor. LSD3195 – Illustration OB : When the vehicle is RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING parked in an angled parking space. Listed below are the system limitations – Illustration OC : When the vehicle is for the RCTA system. Failure to operate parked on inclined ground. the vehicle in accordance with these – Illustration OD : When an ap- system limitations could result in seri- proaching vehicle turns into your ous injury or death. vehicle's parking lot aisle. 5-56 Starting and driving – Illustration OE : When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small. • The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: – Severe weather – Road spray – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle • Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions LSD2043 LSD2044 may reduce the ability of the radar to Illustration 1 Illustration 2 detect other vehicles. NOTE: • Excessive noise (e.g., audio system In the case of several vehicles approach- volume, open vehicle window) will in- ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo- terfere with the chime sound, and it site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may may not be heard. not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Starting and driving 5-57 LSD3745 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

5-58 Starting and driving When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar Obstruction” or the “Unavail- able: Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink OA in the vehicle information display. The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by conditions such as ice, snow, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD3787 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

Starting and driving 5-59 Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will additional paint near the radar sensors. turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/ Do not strike or damage the area around RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the the radar sensors. It is recommended that vehicle information display. you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a NOTE: collision. If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also Radio frequency statement stop working. (Type A) (if so equipped) Action to take For USA Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the FCC : OAYSRR2B engine off and restart the engine. If the LSD3832 message continues to appear, have the This device complies with part 15 of the system checked. It is recommended that SYSTEM MAINTENANCE FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The two radar sensors O1 for the BSW and lowing two conditions: RCTA systems are located near the rear (1) This device may not cause harmful bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- interference, and (2) this device must ac- dar sensors clean. cept any interference received, including The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- interference that may cause undesired porary ambient conditions such as splash- operation. ing water, mist or fog. FCC Warning The blocked condition may also be caused Changes or modifications not expressly by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- approved by the party responsible for structing the radar sensors. compliance could void the user’s author- Check for and remove objects obstructing ity to operate the equipment the area around the radar sensors.

5-60 Starting and driving CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

For Canada FCC Warning Applicable law: Canada 310 Changes or modifications not expressly This device complies with Industry approved by the party responsible for Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). compliance could void the user’s author- Operation is subject to the following two ity to operate the equipment conditions: (1) this device may not cause For Canada interference, and (2) this device must ac- Applicable law: Canada 310 cept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- This device contains licence-exempt tion of the device. transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz Development Canada’s licence-exempt Output power: less than 20 milliwatts RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: LSD3251 Radio frequency statement 1. This device may not cause (Type B) (if so equipped) interference. PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL For USA 2. This device must accept any interfer- ᭺1 RES + switch FCC : OAYSRR2B ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the ᭺2 CANCEL switch This device complies with part 15 of the device. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- ᭺3 SET- switch lowing two conditions: Radio frequency radiation exposure information: This equipment complies ᭺4 Cruise control switch (1) This device may not cause harmful with radiation exposure limits set forth interference, and (2) this device must ac- for an uncontrolled environment. This cept any interference received, including equipment should be installed and oper- interference that may cause undesired ated with minimum distance of 20 cm operation. between the radiator and your body.

Starting and driving 5-61 • If the cruise control system malfunctions, WARNING • To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- it cancels automatically. The indica- celerator pedal. When you release the tor in the instrument panel then blinks to Do not use the cruise control when driv- pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ- warn the driver. For additional informa- ing under the following conditions: ously set speed. tion, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 • When it is not possible to keep the • The vehicle may not maintain the set inch (11 cm) TYPE A” (P. 2-16) or “Vehicle vehicle at a set speed. speed when going up or down steep hills. information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” If this happens, drive without the cruise (P. 2-30). • In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. control. • If the indicator blinks, push the • On winding or hilly roads. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the Cruise control switch off and have the following three methods: system checked. It is recommended that • On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. etc.). • Push the CANCEL switch. • The indicator may blink when the • In very windy areas. • Tap the brake pedal. Cruise control switch is pushed on while Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle • Push the Cruise control switch off. The pushing the RES +, SET-, or CANCEL control and result in an accident. indicator in the instrument panel switch. To properly set the cruise control goes out. system, use the following procedures. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control is automatically can- The cruise control allows driving at a speed celed if: between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with- • You depress the brake or clutch pedal (for out keeping your foot on the accelerator Manual Transmission models) while pedal. pushing the RES+ or SET- switch. The pre- To turn on the cruise control, push the set speed is deleted from memory. Cruise control switch. The indicator in • The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph the instrument panel comes on. (13 km/h) below the set speed. To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- • You depress the clutch pedal (for Manual hicle to the desired speed, push the SET— Transmission models), or move the shift switch and release it. Take your foot off the lever to N (Neutral) (for Continuously Vari- accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains able Transmission models). the set speed.

5-62 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (if so equipped)

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: • Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET— switch. • Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. • Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: • Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET— switch and release it. • Push and hold the SET— switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed. • Push and release the SET— switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when LSD3864 the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). OA ICC switch

Starting and driving 5-63 WARNING • In the conventional (fixed speed) For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control cruise control mode, a warning mode, see “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Failure to follow the warnings and in- chime will not sound to warn you if control mode” (P. 5-65). structions for proper use of the ICC sys- you are too close to the vehicle For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise tem could result in serious injury or ahead. Pay special attention to the control mode, see “Conventional (fixed death. distance between your vehicle and speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-81). • The ICC system is only an aid to assist the vehicle ahead of you or a collision the driver and is not a collision warn- could occur. ing or avoidance device. It is the driv- The ICC system maintains a selected dis- er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive tance from the vehicle in front of you within safely, and be in control of the vehicle the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 at all times. km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed • Always observe posted speed limits can be selected by the driver between 20 to and do not set the speed over them. 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). • Always drive carefully and atten- The vehicle travels at a set speed when the tively when using the ICC system. road ahead is clear. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the The ICC system can be set to one of two ICC system. To avoid serious injury or cruise control modes: death, do not rely on the system to • Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control prevent accidents or to control the mode: For maintaining a selected dis- vehicle’s speed in emergency situa- tance between your vehicle and the ve- tions. Do not use the ICC system ex- hicle in front of you up to the preset speed cept in appropriate road and traffic • Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- conditions. trol mode: For cruising at a preset speed Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.

5-64 Starting and driving LSD3295 LSD3826 HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE cruise control mode: To choose the con- CONTROL MODE ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle dis- O2 , push and hold the ICC switch OA for In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control tance control mode: To choose the longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For mode, the ICC system automatically main- vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode additional information, see “Conventional tains a selected distance from the vehicle O1 , quickly push and release the ICC (fixed speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-81). traveling in front of you according to that switch OA . vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear. The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

Starting and driving 5-65 If the radar sensor OA detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary. The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

LSD4253 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control CONTROL MODE OPERATION mode is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a 5-66 Starting and driving slower vehicle ahead. The system will de- The following items are controlled in the celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle • When there are no vehicles traveling decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance system can only apply up to 40% of the control mode maintains the speed set by vehicle’s total braking power. the driver. The set speed range is be- This system should only be used when traf- tween approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re- and 144 km/h). main fairly constant or when vehicle • When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, speeds change gradually. If a vehicle the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a mode adjusts the speed to maintain the vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, distance, selected by the driver, from the the distance between vehicles may be- vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes come closer because the ICC system can- to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. standstill within the limitations of the sys- SSD0254 If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a tem. The system will cancel once it judges When driving on the freeway at a set speed warning chime and blink the system dis- a standstill with a warning chime. and approaching a slower traveling vehicle play to notify the driver to take necessary • When the vehicle traveling ahead has ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed action. moved out from its lane of travel, the to maintain the distance, selected by the The system will cancel and a warning vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle chime will sound if the speed is below ap- accelerates and maintains vehicle speed ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle up to the set speed. the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay is not detected ahead. The system will also The ICC system does not control vehicle attention to the driving operation to main- disengage when the vehicle goes above speed or warn you when you approach tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates the maximum set speed. stationary and slow moving vehicles. You to the set speed. For additional information, see “Approach must pay attention to vehicle operation to warning” (P. 5-73). maintain proper distance from vehicles The vehicle may not maintain the set ahead when approaching toll gates or traf- speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc- fic congestion. curs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.

Starting and driving 5-67 Normally when controlling the distance to 3. DISTANCE switch: a vehicle ahead, this system automatically Changes the vehicle’s following accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac- distance: cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accel- • Long erate your vehicle when acceleration is re- • Middle quired for a lane change. Depress the brake • Short pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle 4. ICC Switch: ahead due to its sudden braking or if a Master switch to activate the system. vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us- 5. SET- switch: ing the ICC system. Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally. LSD3515 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE SWITCHES The system is operated by the ICC switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel. 1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed. 2. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

5-68 Starting and driving • ICC system warning (orange): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system. 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: Indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h. 3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you. 4. Set distance indicator: LSD3493 Displays the selected distance between LSD3865 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance vehicles set with the distance switch. Operating vehicle-to-vehicle control mode display and distance control mode indicators To turn on the cruise control, quickly push The display is located between the speed- and release the ICC switch OA . The ICC sys- ometer and tachometer. tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator OB 1. This indicator indicates the ICC system come on in a standby state for setting. status depending on a color: • ICC system ON indicator (white): Indi- cates that the ICC is on. • ICC system SET indicator (green): Indi- cates that the cruising speed is set.

Starting and driving 5-69 A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up: • When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the ICC switch again.) For additional information about the VDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Con- trol (VDC) system” (P. 5-131). • When VDC is operating • When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no lon- LSD3866 LSD3102 ger slipping.) To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- When the SET– switch is pushed under the hicle to the desired speed, push the SET– following conditions, the system cannot be switch OC and release it. The ICC system set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap- set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detec- proximately 2 seconds: tion indicator, set distance indicator and • When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) set vehicle speed indicator OB will come on. and a vehicle ahead is not detected Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. or Manual mode • When the parking brake is applied • When the brakes are operated by the driver When the SET– switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.

5-70 Starting and driving Vehicle detected ahead When a vehicle is no longer detected, the When a vehicle is detected in the lane vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera- hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the ing the brakes to match the speed of a ICC system is in operation, the system con- slower vehicle ahead. The system then trols the distance to that vehicle. controls the vehicle speed based on the When a vehicle is no longer detected under speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys- driver selected distance. tem will be canceled. NOTE: • The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system. LSD3496 • When the brake operates, a noise may ᭺1 System set display with vehicle ahead be heard. This is not a malfunction.

᭺2 System set display without vehicle When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve- ahead hicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set The driver sets the desired vehicle speed speed and selected distance. based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, simi- Vehicle ahead not detected lar to standard cruise control, as long as no When a vehicle is no longer detected vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler- ICC system displays the set speed. ates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

Starting and driving 5-71 How to change the set vehicle To reset at a slower cruising speed, use speed one of the following methods: • Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- To cancel the preset speed, use one of the hicle attains the desired speed, push the following methods: SET– switch and release it. • Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle • Push and hold the SET– switch. The set speed indicator will go out. vehicle speed will decrease by approxi- • Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle mately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada). speed indicator will go out. • Push, then quickly release the SET– • Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indi- switch. Each time you do this, the set cators will go out. speed will decrease by approximately 1 To reset at a faster cruising speed, use mph (1.6 km/h for Canada). one of the following methods: To resume the preset speed, push and LSD3267 • Depress the accelerator pedal. When the release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will vehicle attains the desired speed, push resume the last set cruising speed when When passing another vehicle, the set and release the SET– switch. the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h). speed indicator OA will flash when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve- • Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set hicle detect indicator will turn off when the vehicle speed will increase by approxi- area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the mately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada). pedal is released, the vehicle will return to • Push, then quickly release the RES+ the previously set speed. switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 Even though your vehicle speed is set in the mph (1.6 km/h for Canada). ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

5-72 Starting and driving Approach warning If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if: • The chime sounds. • The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks. The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance LSD3867 LSD2752 between vehicles. Some examples are: How to change the set distance Distance Approximate distance at • When the vehicles are traveling at the to the vehicle ahead 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] same speed and the distance between 1. Long 200 (60) vehicles is not changing. The distance to the vehicle ahead can be 2. Middle 150 (45) • When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster selected at any time depending on the traf- 3. Short 90 (30) and the distance between vehicles is fic conditions. • The distance to the vehicle ahead will increasing. Each time the distance switch OA is change according to the vehicle speed. • When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. pushed, the set distance will change to The higher the vehicle speed, the longer long, middle, short and back to long again, the distance. The warning chime will not sound when: in that sequence. • The distance setting will remain at the • The vehicle approaches other vehicles current setting even if the engine is that are parked or moving slowly. restarted. • The accelerator pedal is depressed, over- riding the system.

Starting and driving 5-73 NOTE: • When the system judges the vehicle is at • The ICC system will not adapt auto- a standstill The approach warning chime may sound matically to road conditions. This and the system display may blink when • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) system should be used in evenly the ICC sensor detects objects on the position, Manual mode. flowing traffic. Do not use the system side of the vehicle or on the side of the • When the parking brake system is applied on roads with sharp curves, or on icy road. This may cause the ICC system to • When the VDC system is turned off roads, in heavy rain or in fog. decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The • When VDC operates • As there is a performance limit to the ICC sensor may detect these objects distance control function, never rely • When distance measurement becomes when the vehicle is driven on winding solely on the ICC system. This system impaired due to adhesion of dirt or ob- roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when does not correct careless, inattentive struction to the sensor entering or exiting a curve. In these or absentminded driving, or over- cases you will have to manually control • When a wheel slips come poor visibility in rain, fog, or the proper distance ahead of your • When the radar signal is temporarily other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle. interrupted vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the dis- Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af- VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE tance to the vehicle ahead and the fected by vehicle operation (steering CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS surrounding circumstances in order maneuver or driving position in the lane) to maintain a safe distance between or traffic or vehicle condition (for ex- WARNING vehicles. ample, if a vehicle is being driven with • If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, some damage). Listed below are the system limitations the vehicle decelerates to a standstill for the ICC system. Failure to operate within the limitations of the system. Automatic cancellation the vehicle in accordance with these The system will cancel once it judges system limitations could result in seri- A chime sounds under the following condi- that the vehicle has come to a stand- ous injury or death. tions and the control is automatically can- still and sound a warning chime. To celed: • The ICC system is primarily intended prevent the vehicle from moving, the • When the vehicle ahead is not detected for use on straight, dry, open roads driver must depress the brake pedal. and your vehicle is traveling below the with light traffic. It is not advisable to speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.

5-74 Starting and driving • Always pay attention to the opera- – When traffic conditions make it from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system tion of the vehicle and be ready to difficult to keep a proper distance may not maintain the selected distance. manually control the proper follow- between vehicles because of fre- The following are some conditions in which ing distance. The ICC system may not quent acceleration or the sensor cannot properly detect a ve- be able to maintain the selected dis- deceleration hicle ahead and the system may not oper- tance between vehicles (following – Interference by other radar ate properly: distance) or selected vehicle speed sources • When snow or road spray from traveling under some circumstances. • Do not use the ICC system if you are vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection. • The system may not detect the ve- towing a trailer. The system may not • When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc. hicle in front of you in certain road or detect a vehicle ahead. • When excessively heavy baggage is weather conditions. To avoid acci- • In some road or traffic conditions, a loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of dents, never use the ICC system un- vehicle or object can unexpectedly your vehicle. der the following conditions: come into the sensor detection zone The ICC system is designed to automati- – On roads where the traffic is heavy and cause automatic braking. Al- cally check the sensor’s operation within or there are sharp curves ways stay alert and avoid using the the limitations of the system. – On slippery road surfaces such as ICC system where not recommended on ice or snow, etc. in this warning section. When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically – During bad weather (rain, fog, The radar sensor will not detect the follow- snow, etc.) be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ing objects: ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to • Stationary and slow moving vehicles etc., the ICC system may not detect them. the bumper around the distance • Pedestrians or objects in the roadway In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle sensor • Oncoming vehicles in the same lane distance control mode may not cancel and – On steep downhill roads (the ve- may not be able to maintain the selected hicle may go beyond the set ve- • Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane following distance from the vehicle ahead. hicle speed and frequent braking Be sure to check and clean the sensor may result in overheating the The sensor generally detects the signals regularly. brakes) returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, – On repeated uphill and downhill if the sensor cannot detect the reflection roads

Starting and driving 5-75 The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. SSD0252 If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

5-76 Starting and driving SSD0253 When driving on some roads, such as wind- If this occurs, the ICC system may warn ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads you by blinking the system indicator and which are under construction, the radar sounding the chime unexpectedly. You sensor may detect vehicles in a different will have to manually control the proper lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve- distance away from the vehicle traveling hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ahead. radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

Starting and driving 5-77 maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Condition A Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: • When the VDC system is turned off • When the VDC or ABS operates • When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) • When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or L (Low) (if so equipped) position • When the parking brake is applied • When a wheel slips • When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted Action to take When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using LSD3752 the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on SYSTEM TEMPORARILY The following are conditions in which the to use the system. UNAVAILABLE ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to 5-78 Starting and driving Condition B The chime will sound and the “Forward Action to take When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front When the above driving conditions no lon- snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” ger exist, turn the system back on. warning message will appear in the vehicle the ICC system will automatically be can- Condition E celed, the chime will sound and the “For- information display. ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Action to take When the ICC system is not operating Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” properly, a chime sounds and the ICC sys- If the warning message appears, stop the tem warning light (orange) will come on. warning message will appear in the vehicle vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever information display. in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine Action to take off. When the radar signal is temporarily When the conditions listed above are no interrupted, clean the sensor area of the longer present, the warning message will front bumper and restart the engine. If the no longer be available in the vehicle infor- “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled mation display and the system will operate Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” normally. If the “Forward Driving Aids Tem- warning message continues to be dis- porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See played, have the system checked. It is rec- Owner’s Manual” warning message contin- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ues to be displayed, have the system for this service. checked. It is recommended that you visit a Condition D NISSAN dealer for this service. When driving on roads with limited road Condition C structures (for example, long bridges, des- When the radar sensor area of the front erts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, the system may illuminate the system warn- etc., or is obstructed, the ICC system will ing light and display the “Forward Driving automatically be canceled. Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” message.

Starting and driving 5-79 NOTE: If the ICC system is temporarily unavailable, the conventional cruise control mode may still be used.

LSD3916 LSD3826 Action to take SYSTEM MAINTENANCE If the warning light comes on, park the ve- The sensor for the ICC system OA is located hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, on the front of the vehicle. restart the engine, resume driving and set To keep the ICC system operating properly, the ICC system again. be sure to observe the following: If it is not possible to set the system or • Always keep the sensor area clean. the indicator stays on, it may indicate • Do not strike or damage the areas that the system is malfunctioning. Al- around the sensor. though the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle • Do not attach a sticker (including trans- checked. It is recommended that you parent material) or install an accessory visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

5-80 Starting and driving • Do not attach metallic objects near the This equipment has been tested and found For Canada sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could to comply with the limits for a Class A digi- This device complies with Industry Canada cause failure or malfunction. tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation • Do not alter, remove, or paint the front Rules. These limits are designed to provide is subject to the following two conditions: bumper. Before customizing or restoring reasonable protection against harmful in- the front bumper, it is recommended that terference when the equipment is oper- 1. This device may not cause interference, you visit a NISSAN dealer. ated in a commercial environment. This 2. This device must accept any interfer- equipment generates, uses, and can radi- ence, including interference that may Radio frequency statement ate radio frequency energy and, if not in- cause undesired operation of the stalled and used in accordance with the device. FCC Notice instruction manual, may cause harmful in- For USA terference to radio communications. Op- CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) eration of this equipment in a residential This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC CRUISE CONTROL MODE area is likely to cause harmful interference Rules. in which case the user will be required to This mode allows driving at a speed be- Operation is subject to the following two correct the interference at his own tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with- conditions: expense. out keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- Radio frequency radiation exposure ference, and information: WARNING 2. This device must accept any interfer- This equipment complies with FCC radia- • In the conventional (fixed speed) ence received, including interference tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- cruise control mode, a warning that may cause undesired operation. trolled environment. chime does not sound to warn you if FCC Warning This equipment should be installed and you are too close to the vehicle operated with minimum distance of 20 cm Changes or modifications not expressly ahead, as neither the presence of the between the radiator and your body. approved by the party responsible for vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to- compliance could void the user’s authority The transmitter must not be co-located or vehicle distance is detected. to operate the equipment. operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Starting and driving 5-81 • Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur. • Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display. • Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions: – When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed – In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed LSD3555 LSD3106 – On winding or hilly roads Conventional (fixed speed) cruise – On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches control mode display and etc.) indicators – In very windy areas 1. CANCEL switch: The display is located in the vehicle infor- • Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle Deactivates the system without erasing mation display. control and result in an accident. the set speed 2. RES+ switch: 1. Cruise indicator: Resumes set speed or increases speed This indicator indicates the condition of incrementally the ICC system depending on a color. • Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indi- 3. ICC switch: cates that the ICC switch is on Master switch to activate the system • Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indi- 4. SET- switch: cates that the cruising speed is set Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally 5-82 Starting and driving • Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates ing the ICC switch again will turn the sys- that there is a malfunction in the ICC tem completely off. When the ignition system switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle To use the ICC system again, quickly push speed. For Canadian models, the speed and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to ve- is displayed in km/h. hicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ICC LSD3556 switch off when not using the ICC Operating conventional (fixed system. speed) cruise control mode To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC switch OA for longer than about 1.5 seconds. When pushing ICC switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators OB are displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Push-

Starting and driving 5-83 To cancel the preset speed, use any of the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one following methods: of the following three methods: 1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the speed indicator will turn off. vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. 2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off. 2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down 3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise to the desired speed. indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off. 3. Push, then quickly release the SET- To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one switch. Each time you do this, the set of the following three methods: speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). 1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the LSD3557 vehicle attains the desired speed, push To resume the preset speed, push and re- and release the SET- switch. lease the RES+ switch. The vehicle will re- To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- sume the last set cruising speed when the hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- OC 2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). switch and release it. (The color of the the vehicle attains the desired speed, cruise indicator changes to green and set release the switch. vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your 3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ vehicle will maintain the set speed. switch. Each time you do this, the set • To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 celerator pedal. When you release the km/h). pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. • The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed. 5-84 Starting and driving A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled: • When the vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed • When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode • When the parking brake is applied • When the VDC operates (including the traction control system) • When a wheel slips When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange. Action to take If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again. If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system LSD3305 is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle System temporarily unavailable is still drivable under normal conditions,

Starting and driving 5-85 REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)

have the vehicle checked. It is recom- WARNING mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death. • The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for proper driving procedures. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in con- LSD3754 trol of the vehicle at all times. The RAB system detects obstacles behind • There is a limitation to the RAB sys- the vehicle using the parking sensors O1 tem capability. The RAB system is not located on the rear bumper. effective in all situations. NOTE: • Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car You can temporarily cancel the sonar wash, a truck’s compressed-air function in the vehicle, but the RAB sys- brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- tem will continue to operate. For addi- fect the function of the system; this tional information, please see “Rear So- may include reduced performance or nar System (RSS)” (P. 5-136). a false activation. The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle.

5-86 Starting and driving LSD4005 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display RAB SYSTEM OPERATION

Starting and driving 5-87 ᭺4 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates. If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display, a red frame will appear in the center display (for vehicles with the Intelligent Around View Monitor system), and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure. NOTE: • The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system. • When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. LSD4006 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display ᭺1 RAB system warning light ᭺3 Center display

᭺2 RAB system warning indicator

5-88 Starting and driving LSD3979 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF

Starting and driving 5-89 Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system ON or OFF. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Rear” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates. NOTE: The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD3788 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

5-90 Starting and driving RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS • Always check your surroundings and • The RAB system may not operate in WARNING turn to check what is behind you be- the following conditions: fore and while backing up. The RAB – There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., Listed below are the system limitations system detects stationary objects attached to the sonar sensors. for the RAB system. Failure to follow the behind the vehicle. The RAB system – A loud sound is heard in the area warnings and instructions for proper does not detect the following ob- around the vehicle. use of the RAB system could result in jects: serious injury or death. – The surface of the obstacle is di- – Moving objects agonal to the rear of the vehicle. • When the vehicle approaches an ob- – Low objects stacle while the accelerator or brake • The RAB system may unintentionally – Narrow objects pedal is depressed, the function may operate in the following conditions: not operate or the start of operation – Wedge-shaped objects – There is overgrown grass in the may be delayed. The RAB system – Objects close to the bumper (less area around the vehicle. may not operate or may not perform than approximately 1 ft [30 cm]) – There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, – Objects that suddenly appear gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, driving conditions, the traffic envi- – Thin objects such as rope, wire, a parking lot gate) near the side of ronment, the weather, road surface chain, etc. the vehicle. conditions, etc. Do not wait for the • The RAB system may not operate for – There are bumps, protrusions, or system to operate. Operate the brake the following obstacles: manhole covers on the road pedal by yourself as soon as surface. necessary. – Obstacles located high off the ground – The vehicle drives through a • If it is necessary to override RAB op- draped flag or a curtain. eration, strongly press the accelera- – Obstacles in a position offset from – There is an accumulation of snow tor pedal. your vehicle – Obstacles, such as spongy materi- or ice behind the vehicle. als or snow, that have soft outer – An ultrasonic wave source, such as surfaces and can easily absorb a another vehicle’s sonar, is near sound wave the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-91 • Once the automatic brake control – The braking force becomes poor SYSTEM MALFUNCTION operates, it does not operate again if due to wet brakes after driving If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be the vehicle approaches the same through a puddle or washing the turned off automatically, the RAB system obstacle. vehicle. warning light will illuminate, and the “Sys- • The automatic brake control can only • Turn the RAB system off in the follow- tem fault” warning message will appear in operate for a short period of time. ing conditions to prevent the occur- the vehicle information display. Therefore, the driver must depress rence of an unexpected accident re- Action to take the brake pedal. sulting from sudden system If the warning light illuminates, park the ve- • In the following situations, the RAB operation: hicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, system may not operate properly or – The vehicle is towed. and restart the engine. If the warning light may not function sufficiently: – The vehicle is carried on a flatbed continues to illuminate, have the RAB sys- – The vehicle is driven in bad truck. tem checked. It is recommended that you weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). – The vehicle is on the chassis visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. – The vehicle is driven on a steep dynamometer. hill. – The vehicle drives on an uneven NOTE: – The vehicle’s posture is changed road surface. If the RAB system cannot be operated (e.g., when driving over a bump). – Suspension parts other than temporarily, the RAB system warning – The vehicle is driven on a slippery those designated as Genuine light blinks. road. NISSAN parts are used. (If the ve- – The vehicle is turned sharply by hicle height or the vehicle body in- turning the steering wheel fully. clination is changed, the system – Snow chains are used. may not detect an obstacle correctly.) – Wheels or tires other than NISSAN recommended are used. • Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will – The brakes are cold at low ambi- interfere with the chime sound, and it ent temperatures or immediately may not be heard. after driving has started.

5-92 Starting and driving AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION

• Do not subject the area around the park- WARNING ing sensors O1 to strong impact. Also, do not remove or disassemble the parking Failure to follow the warnings and in- sensors. If the parking sensors and pe- structions for proper use of the AEB ripheral areas are deformed in an acci- with Pedestrian Detection system dent, etc., have the sensors checked. It is could result in serious injury or death. recommended that you visit a NISSAN • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection dealer for this service. system is a supplemental aid to the • Do not install any stickers (including driver. It is not a replacement for the transparent stickers) or accessories on driver’s attention to traffic condi- the parking sensors O1 and their sur- tions or responsibility to drive safely. rounding areas. This may cause a mal- It cannot prevent accidents due to function or improper operation. carelessness or dangerous driving techniques. LSD3754 • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection SYSTEM MAINTENANCE system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road Observe the following items to ensure conditions. proper operation of the system: • Always keep the parking sensors O1 The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system clean. can assist the driver when there is a risk of • If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in off with a soft cloth while being careful to the traveling lane or with a pedestrian not damage them. ahead in the traveling lane.

Starting and driving 5-93 LSD3756 The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle OB to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De- tection system uses a camera installed behind the windshield OA in addition to the radar sensor.

LSD3793 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

5-94 Starting and driving The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between6–37mph(10 – 60 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detec- tion system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red and white) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedes- trian Detection system applies harder braking automatically. LSD3794 While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection For the vehicle with 4.2 inch meter display system is operating, you may hear the 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator 3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system sound of brake operation. This is normal 2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emer- warning light and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian gency warning indicator Detection system is operating properly. Starting and driving 5-95 NOTE: The vehicle’s brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the conse- quences if a collision should be unavoid- able. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function. The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: • When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision. • When the accelerator pedal is depressed. • When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead. If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately LSD3979 2 seconds before the brakes are released. For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF 5-96 Starting and driving Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedes- trian Detection system warning light illuminates. NOTE: • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. • The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the LSD3788 I-FCW system. When the AEB system is For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

Starting and driving 5-97 AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN – Pedestrians who are seated or • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS otherwise not in a full upright system may not function if the speed standing or walking position. difference between the two vehicles WARNING – Oncoming vehicles is too small. • The radar sensor AEB with Pedes- Listed below are the system limitations – Crossing vehicles – Obstacles on the roadside trian Detection system may not for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection function properly or detect a vehicle system. Failure to operate the vehicle in • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- ahead in the following conditions: accordance with these system limita- tem has some performance limitations. – Poor visibility (conditions such as tions could result in serious injury or – If a stationary vehicle is in the ve- death. rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand- hicle’s path, the AEB with Pedes- storms, and road spray from other • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection trian Detection system will not vehicles) system cannot detect all vehicles or function when the vehicle is pedestrians under all conditions. driven at speeds over approxi- – Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection mately 50 mph (80 km/h). system does not detect the following – For pedestrian detection, the AEB – Driving on a bumpy road surface, objects: with Pedestrian Detection system such as an uneven dirt road. – Small pedestrians (including will not function when the vehicle – If dirt, ice, snow or other material small children), animals and is driven at speeds over approxi- is covering the radar sensor area. cyclists. mately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below – Interference by other radar – Pedestrians in wheelchairs or us- approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). sources. ing mobile transport such as • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection – The camera area of the windshield scooters, child-operated toys, or system will not function for pedestri- is fogged up, or covered with dirt, skateboards. ans in darkness or in tunnels, even if water drops, ice, snow, etc. there is street lighting in the area. • The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the vehicle ahead is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).

5-98 Starting and driving – Strong light (for example, sunlight • The system is designed to automati- or high beams from oncoming ve- cally check the sensor’s (radar and hicles) enters the front camera. camera) functionality, within certain Strong light causes the area limitations. The system may not de- around the pedestrian to be cast tect blockage of sensor areas cov- in a shadow, making it difficult to ered by ice, snow or stickers, for ex- see. ample. In these cases, the system – A sudden change in brightness may not be able to warn the driver occurs. (For example, when the properly. Be sure that you check, vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a clean and clear sensor areas shaded area or lightning flashes.) regularly. – The poor contrast of a person to • In some road and traffic conditions, the background, such as having the AEB with Pedestrian Detection clothing color or pattern which is system may unexpectedly apply par- similar to the background. tial braking. When acceleration is – The pedestrian’s profile is partially necessary, depress the accelerator obscured or unidentifiable due to pedal to override the system. the pedestrian transporting lug- • Excessive noise will interfere with the gage, wearing bulky or very loose- warning chime sound, and the chime fitting clothing or accessories. may not be heard. • The system performance may degrade in the following conditions: – The vehicle is driven on a slippery road. – The vehicle is driven on a slope. – Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk room of your vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-99 LSD3795 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

5-100 Starting and driving Condition A: In the following conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: • The radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source. • The camera area of the windshield is misted or frozen. • Strong light is shining from the front. • The cabin temperature is over approximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight. • The camera area of the windshield glass is continuously covered with dirt, etc. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically. NOTE: When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after LSD3796 the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display NISSAN dealer.

Starting and driving 5-101 Condition B: Condition C: Condition D: When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, When the radar sensor of the front bumper When driving on roads with limited road snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, is covered with mud, dirt, snow ice, etc., or is structures or buildings (for example, long the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system obstructed, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec- bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to will automatically be canceled, the chime tion system will automatically be canceled. long walls), the system may illuminate the will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids The chime will sound and the “Forward system warning light and display the “For- Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Blocked: See Manual” warning message will Sensor Blocked: See Manual” warning mes- Sensor Blocked: See Manual” message. appear in the vehicle information display. sage will appear in the vehicle information Action to take: display. Action to take: When the above driving conditions no lon- When the conditions listed above are no Action to take: ger exist, turn the system back on. longer present, the warning message will If the warning message appears, stop the no longer be available in the vehicle infor- vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever NOTE: mation display. If the “Forward Driving Aids in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor off. When the radar signal is temporarily system stops working, the I-FCW sys- Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving interrupted, clean the sensor area of the tem will also stop working. Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor front bumper and restart the engine. If the Blocked: See Manual” warning message “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled continues to be displayed, have the system Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” checked. It is recommended that you visit a or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front NISSAN dealer for this service. Sensor Blocked: See Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-102 Starting and driving Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3890 LSD3756 SYSTEM MALFUNCTION SYSTEM MAINTENANCE If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- The radar sensor is located on the front of tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto- the vehicle OB . The camera is located on matically, a chime will sound, the AEB with the upper side of the windshield OA . Pedestrian Detection system warning light To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection (orange) will illuminate and the warning system operating properly, be sure to ob- message [Malfunction] will appear in the serve the following: vehicle information display. • Always keep the sensor areas of the front bumper/emblem and windshield clean. • Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).

Starting and driving 5-103 • Do not cover or attach stickers, or install FCC Warning 2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter any accessory near the sensors. This Changes or modifications not expressly tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, could block sensor signals and/or cause approved by the party responsible for même si le brouillage est susceptible failure or malfunction. compliance could void the user’s author- d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. • Do not attach metallic objects near the ity to operate the equipment. Radio frequency radiation exposure radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This information: could cause failure or malfunction. For Canada Model: ARS4–B This equipment complies with FCC and IC • Do not place reflective materials, such as radiation exposure limits set forth for an white paper or a mirror, on the instru- IC: 4135A-ARS4B uncontrolled environment. ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's FCC ID: OAYARS4B This equipment should be installed and detection capability. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC operated with minimum distance of 30 • Do not alter, remove or paint the front Rules and with Industry Canada licence- cm between the radiator and your body. bumper. Before customizing or restoring exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- This transmitter must not be co-located the front bumper, it is recommended that ject to the following two conditions: or operating in conjunction with any you visit a NISSAN dealer. 1. This device may not cause interfer- other antenna or transmitter. ence, and Radio frequency statement Cet équipement est conforme aux lim- 2. This device must accept any interfer- ites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC For USA ence received, including interference établies pour un environnement non FCC ID OAYARS4B that may cause undesired operation contrôlé. of the device. This device complies with Part 15 of the Cet équipement doit être installé et FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- Le présent appareil est conforme aux utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de lowing two conditions: CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux distance entre la source de rayonnement appareils radio exempts de licence. et votre corps. 1. This device may not cause harmful in- L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux terference, and conditions suivantes: 2. This device must accept any interfer- 1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de ence received, including interference brouillage, et that may cause undesired operation.

5-104 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

FCC Notice WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for Failure to follow the warnings and in- compliance could void the user’s author- structions for proper use of the I-FCW ity to operate the equipment. system could result in serious injury or death. • The I-FCW system can help warn the driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second LSD3826 vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane. The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor OA located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

Starting and driving 5-105 LSD3797 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

5-106 Starting and driving 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator 2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

LSD3798 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

Starting and driving 5-107 LSD2263 I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.

5-108 Starting and driving LSD3979 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF

Starting and driving 5-109 Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW system ON or OFF. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates. NOTE: • The I-FCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. • The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB with Pe- destrian Detection system is turned LSD3788 off, the I-FCW system is also turned off. For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

5-110 Starting and driving LSD2312 Illustration A I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Starting and driving 5-111 LSD2265 Illustration B WARNING • The radar sensor does not detect the • The radar sensor may not detect a ve- following objects: hicle ahead in the following conditions: Listed below are the system limitations – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles – Snow or heavy rain for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate in the roadway – Dirt, ice, snow or other material the vehicle in accordance with these covering the radar sensor. system limitations could result in seri- – Oncoming vehicles ous injury or death. – Crossing vehicles – Interference by other radar sources. • The I-FCW system cannot detect all • (Illustration A) The I-FCW system vehicles under all conditions. does not function when a vehicle – Snow or road spray from traveling ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a vehicles. motorcycle. – Driving in a tunnel – (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed.

5-112 Starting and driving – (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed. – (Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. • The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly. • Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-113 LSD2266 Illustration C

5-114 Starting and driving LSD2313 Illustration D

Starting and driving 5-115 LSD3795 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

5-116 Starting and driving Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automatically. Condition B When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the I-FCW system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

LSD3796 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

Starting and driving 5-117 Action to take: front bumper and restart the engine. If the When the conditions listed above are no “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled longer present, the warning message will Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” no longer be available in the vehicle infor- or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front mation display. If the “Forward Driving Aids Sensor Blocked: See Manual” warning mes- Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor sage continues to be displayed, have the Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving system checked. It is recommended that Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Blocked: See Manual” warning message Condition D continues to be displayed, have the system When driving on roads with limited road checked. It is recommended that you visit a structures or buildings (for example, long NISSAN dealer for this service. bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to Condition C long walls), the system may illuminate the When the radar sensor of the front bumper system warning light and display the “For- LSD3890 ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is SYSTEM MALFUNCTION obstructed, the I-FCW system will auto- Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” matically be canceled, the chime will sound or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be and the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Sensor Blocked: See Manual” message. turned off automatically, a chime will Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Own- Action to take: sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection er’s Manual” or “Driving Aids Temporarily warning light (orange) will illuminate and When the above driving conditions no lon- the warning message [Malfunction] will ap- Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See ger exist, turn the system back on. Manual” warning message will appear in pear in the vehicle information display. the vehicle information display. NOTE: Action to take: If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- If the warning message appears, stop the tem stops working, the I-FCW system will vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever also stop working. in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the 5-118 Starting and driving Action to take • Do not attach metallic objects near the If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- cause failure or malfunction. gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- • Do not alter, remove or paint the front ing light continues to illuminate, have the bumper. Before customizing or restoring I-FCW system checked. It is recommended the front bumper, it is recommended that that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this you visit a NISSAN dealer. service.

LSD3826 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The sensor OA is located on the front of the vehicle. To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: • Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean. • Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. • Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-119 INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA)

WARNING The I–DA system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driv- Failure to follow the warnings and in- ing fatigue. structions for proper use of the I-DA The system monitors driving style and system could result in serious injury or steering behavior over a period of time, death. and it detects changes from the normal • The I–DA system is only a warning to pattern. If the system detects that driver inform the driver of a potential lack attention is decreasing over a period of of driver attention or drowsiness. It time, the system uses audible and visual will not steer the vehicle or prevent warnings to suggest that the driver take a loss of control. break. • The I–DA system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver’s lack of attention or fatigue in every situation. LSD3807 • It is the driver’s responsibility to: For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display – stay alert, – drive safely, INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS – keep the vehicle in the traveling SYSTEM OPERATION lane, – be in control of the vehicle at all times, – avoid driving when tired, – avoid distractions (texting, etc.).

5-120 Starting and driving The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from the ON to the OFF position and back to the ON position.

LSD3984 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h). The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip.

Starting and driving 5-121 LSD3980 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM 5-122 Starting and driving Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I–DA system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted. INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the I–DA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. • The I-DA system may not operate LSD3801 properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions: For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display – Poor road conditions such as an uneven road surface or potholes. – Strong side wind.

Starting and driving 5-123 – If you have adopted a sporty driv- Action to take ing style with higher cornering Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the speeds or higher rates of vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine acceleration. off and restart the engine. If the system – Frequent lane changes or warning message continues to appear, changes to vehicle speed. have the system checked. It is recom- • The I–DA system will not provide an mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for alert in the following conditions: this service. – Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph (60 km/h). – Short lapses of attention. – Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object. LSD3802 System malfunction If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the system warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.

5-124 Starting and driving BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

CAUTION Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient • Recirculating the cool air in the cabin Driving Tips to help you achieve the most when the A/C is on reduces cooling During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), fuel economy from your vehicle. load follow these recommendations to ob- 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and tain maximum engine performance Pedal Application Distances and ensure the future reliability and • Avoid rapid starts and stops economy of your new vehicle. Failure to • Observing the speed limit and not ex- follow these recommendations may • Use smooth, gentle accelerator and ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where le- result in shortened engine life and re- brake application whenever possible gally allowed) can improve fuel effi- duced engine performance. • Maintain constant speed while com- ciency due to reduced aerodynamic muting and coast whenever possible drag • Avoid driving for long periods at constant • Maintaining a safe following distance speed, either fast or slow, and do not run 2. Maintain Constant Speed behind other vehicles reduces unnec- the engine over 4,000 rpm. • Look ahead to try and anticipate and essary braking • Do not accelerate at full throttle in any minimize stops • Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate gear. • Synchronizing your speed with traffic changes in speed permits reduced • Avoid quick starts. lights allows you to reduce your num- braking and smooth acceleration • Avoid hard braking as much as possible. ber of stops changes • Maintaining a steady speed can mini- • Select a gear range suitable to road mize red light stops and improve fuel conditions efficiency 5. Use Cruise Control 3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher • Using cruise control during highway Vehicle Speeds driving helps maintain a steady speed • Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more • Cruise control is particularly effective efficient to open windows to cool the in providing fuel savings when driving vehicle due to reduced engine load on flat terrains • Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag

Starting and driving 5-125 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

6. Plan for the Shortest Route 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool • Keep your engine tuned up. • Utilize a map or navigation system to • Park your vehicle in a covered parking • Follow the recommended scheduled determine the best route to save time area or in the shade whenever maintenance. possible 7. Avoid Idling • Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres- • When entering a hot vehicle, opening sure. Low tire pressure increases tire • Shutting off your engine when safe for the windows will help to reduce the wear and lowers fuel economy. stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves inside temperature faster, resulting in fuel and reduces emissions • Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im- reduced demand on your A/C system proper alignment increases tire wear and 8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads 11. ECO Mode lowers fuel economy. • Automated passes permit drivers to • The ECO mode helps to enhance the • Use the recommended viscosity engine use special lanes to maintain cruising fuel economy by controlling the en- oil. For additional information, see “Engine speed through the toll and avoid stop- gine and Continuously Variable oil and oil filter recommendations” ping and starting Transmission (if so equipped) opera- (P. 10-7). 9. Winter Warm Up tion automatically to avoid rapid • Limit idling time to minimize impact to acceleration. fuel economy • Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to ef- fectively circulate the engine oil before driving • Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling

5-126 Starting and driving PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-127 POWER STEERING

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling WARNING erations that could cause the power steer- into traffic when parked on an incline, it ing system to overheat. is a good practice to turn the wheels as • If the engine is not running or is You may hear a noise when the steering illustrated. turned off while driving, the power wheel is operated quickly. However, this is • HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB O1 : assist for the steering will not work. not a malfunction. Turn the wheels into the curb and Steering will be harder to operate. • When the power steering warning If the power steering warning light illumi- move the vehicle forward until the nates while the engine is running, it may curb side wheel gently touches the light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for indicate the power steering system is not curb. functioning properly and may need servic- • HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 2 : the steering.You will still have control O of the vehicle, but the steering will be ing. Have the power steering system Turn the wheels away from the curb harder to operate. Have the power checked. It is recommended that you visit a and move the vehicle back until the steering system checked. It is recom- NISSAN dealer for this service. curb side wheel gently touches the mended that you visit a NISSAN When the power steering warning light illu- curb. dealer for this service. minates with the engine running, there will • HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO be no power assist for the steering, but you The power steering system is designed to CURB O3 : will still have control of the vehicle. At this provide power assist while driving to oper- Turn the wheels toward the side of the time, greater steering effort is required to ate the steering wheel with light force. road so the vehicle will move away operate the steering wheel, especially in from the center of the road if it moves. When the steering wheel is operated re- sharp turns and at low speeds. peatedly or continuously while parking or 4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK For additional information, see “Power driving at a very low speed, the power as- position. steering warning light” (P. 2-13). sist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering wheel op- 5-128 Starting and driving BRAKE SYSTEM

The brake system has two separate hy- WARNING Parking brake break-in draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, Break in the parking brake shoes whenever you will still have braking at two wheels. • While driving on a slippery surface, the stopping effect of the parking brake is be careful when braking, accelerat- weakened or whenever the parking brake BRAKE PRECAUTIONS ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, or accelerating could cause the in order to assure the best braking Vacuum assisted brakes wheels to skid and result in an performance. The brake booster aids braking by using accident. engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you • If the engine is not running or is This procedure is described in the vehicle can stop the vehicle by depressing the turned off while driving, the power service manual. It is recommended that brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- assist for the brakes will not work. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. sure on the brake pedal will be required to Braking will be harder. ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes WARNING When the vehicle is washed or driven Using the brakes through water, the brakes may get wet. As • The ABS is a sophisticated device, but Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal a result, your braking distance will be lon- it cannot prevent accidents resulting while driving. This will overheat the brakes, ger and the vehicle may pull to one side from careless or dangerous driving wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce during braking. techniques. It can help maintain ve- gas mileage. hicle control during braking on slip- To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe pery surfaces. Remember that stop- To help reduce brake wear and to prevent speed while lightly pressing the brake ping distances on slippery surfaces the brakes from overheating, reduce speed pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until will be longer than on normal sur- and downshift to a lower gear before going the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving faces even with ABS. Stopping dis- down a slope or long grade. Overheated the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes tances may also be longer on rough, brakes may reduce braking performance function correctly. gravel or snow covered roads, or if and could result in loss of vehicle control. you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

Starting and driving 5-129 • Tire type and condition may also af- Using the system instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock fect braking effectiveness. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. assistance. – When replacing tires, install the Depress the brake pedal with firm steady specified size of tires on all four pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The If the ABS warning light illuminates during wheels. Anti-lock Braking System will operate to the self-test or while driving, have the ve- – When installing a spare tire, make prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer hicle checked. It is recommended that you sure that it is the proper size and the vehicle to avoid obstacles. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For ad- WARNING Normal operation ditional information, see “Tire and Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper- Loading Information label” ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-10 (P. 8-30). may result in increased stopping distances. km/h). The speed varies according to road – For additional information, see conditions. “Wheels and tires” (P. 8-28). Self-test feature When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in- rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres- do not lock during hard braking or when cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps, sure. This action is similar to pumping the braking on slippery surfaces. The system hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa- detects the rotation speed at each wheel computer has a built-in diagnostic feature tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- that tests the system each time you start from under the hood or feel a vibration vent each wheel from locking and sliding. the engine and move the vehicle at a low from the actuator when it is operating. This By preventing each wheel from locking, the speed in forward or reverse. When the self- is normal and indicates that the ABS is op- system helps the driver maintain steering test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise erating properly. However, the pulsation control and helps to minimize swerving and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. may indicate that road conditions are haz- and spinning on slippery surfaces. This is normal and does not indicate a mal- ardous and extra care is required while function. If the computer senses a mal- driving. function, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the

5-130 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

BRAKE ASSIST The VDC system uses various sensors to When the VDC system operates, the monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. indicator light in the instrument panel When the force applied to the brake pedal Under certain driving conditions, the VDC flashes to note the following: exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is system helps to perform the following activated generating greater braking force • The road may be slippery or the system functions: than a conventional brake booster even may determine some action is required with light pedal force. • Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel to help keep the vehicle on the steered slip on one slipping drive wheel so power path. WARNING is transferred to a non-slipping drive • You may feel a pulsation in the brake wheel on the same axle. pedal and hear a noise or vibration from The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist • Controls brake pressure and engine out- under the hood. This is normal and indi- braking operation and is not a collision put to reduce drive wheel slip based on cates that the VDC system is working warning or avoidance device. It is the vehicle speed (traction control function). properly. driver’s responsibility to stay alert, • Controls brake pressure at individual • Adjust your speed and driving to the road drive safely and be in control of the ve- wheels and engine output to help the conditions. hicle at all times. driver maintain control of the vehicle in For additional information, see “Slip indica- the following conditions: tor light” (P.2-14) and ”Vehicle Dynamic Con- – Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow trol (VDC) OFF indicator light” (P. 2-14). the steered path despite increased steering input) If a malfunction occurs in the system, the – Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to indicator light comes on in the instru- certain road or driving conditions) ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when the indicator light is off. The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it can- The vehicle information display is used to not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv- turn off the VDC system. The indicator ing situations. light and the AEB system warning light illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off.

Starting and driving 5-131 When the vehicle information display is WARNING • If engine control related parts are not used to turn off the VDC system, the sys- NISSAN recommended or are ex- tem still operates to prevent one drive • The VDC system is designed to help tremely deteriorated, the indi- wheel from slipping by transferring power the driver maintain stability but does cator light may illuminate. to a non-slipping drive wheel. The not prevent accidents due to abrupt • When driving on extremely inclined indicator light flashes if this occurs. All steering operation at high speeds or surfaces such as higher banked cor- other VDC functions are off and the by careless or dangerous driving ners, the VDC system may not oper- indicator light will not flash. techniques. Reduce vehicle speed ate properly and the indicator The VDC system is automatically reset to and be especially careful when driv- light may flash or the indicator on when the ignition switch is placed in the ing and cornering on slippery sur- light may illuminate. Do not drive on OFF position then back to the ON position. faces and always drive carefully. these types of roads. • Do not modify the vehicle's suspen- The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea- • When driving on an unstable surface sion. If suspension parts such as ture that tests the system each time you such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- start the engine and move the vehicle for- ramp, the indicator light may bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When flash or the indicator light may not NISSAN recommended for your the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk illuminate. This is not a malfunction. vehicle or are extremely deterio- noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake Restart the engine after driving onto rated, the VDC system may not oper- pedal. This is normal and is not an indica- a stable surface. ate properly. This could adversely af- tion of a malfunction. fect vehicle handling performance, • If wheels or tires other than the and the indicator light may flash NISSAN recommended ones are or the indicator light may used, the VDC system may not oper- illuminate. ate properly and the indicator light may flash or the indicator • If brake related parts such as brake light may illuminate. pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- • The VDC system is not a substitute tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys- for winter tires or tire chains on a tem may not operate properly and snow covered road. the indicator light may illuminate.

5-132 Starting and driving RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP • Do not modify the vehicle's suspen- • When driving on an unstable surface The system gradually adjusts braking sion. If suspension parts such as such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or power during normal braking to help pro- shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- ramp, the indicator light may vide an enhanced brake feel. bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are flash or the indicator light may not NISSAN recommended for your illuminate. This is not a malfunction. BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION vehicle or are extremely deterio- Restart the engine after driving onto During braking while driving through turns, rated, the VDC system may not oper- a stable surface. the system optimizes the distribution of ate properly. This could adversely af- • If wheels or tires other than the force to each of the front and rear wheels fect vehicle handling performance, NISSAN recommended ones are depending on the radius of the turn. and the indicator light may flash used, the VDC system may not oper- or the indicator light may ate properly and the indicator WARNING illuminate. light may flash or the indicator • If brake related parts such as brake light may illuminate. • The VDC system is designed to help pads, rotors and calipers are not • The VDC system is not a substitute the driver maintain stability but does NISSAN recommended or are ex- for winter tires or tire chains on a not prevent accidents due to abrupt tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys- snow covered road. steering operation at high speeds or tem may not operate properly and by careless or dangerous driving the indicator light may techniques. Reduce vehicle speed illuminate. and be especially careful when driv- • If engine control related parts are not ing and cornering on slippery sur- NISSAN recommended or are ex- faces and always drive carefully. tremely deteriorated, the indicator light may illuminate. • When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

Starting and driving 5-133 CHASSIS CONTROL

The chassis control is an electric control When the Intelligent Trace Control is oper- If the chassis control warning message ap- module that includes the following functions: ating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pears in the vehicle information display, it • Intelligent Trace Control pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and may indicate that Active Ride Control is not • Active Ride Control indicates that the Intelligent Trace Control functioning properly. Have the system is operating properly. checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as • Intelligent Engine Brake You may also feel deceleration when the possible. See “Vehicle information display INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL Intelligent Trace Control is operating. How- warnings and indicators” (P.2-24) or (P.2-39). This system senses driving based on the ever, this is not a malfunction. INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE driver’s steering and acceleration/braking ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL The Intelligent Engine Brake function adds patterns, and controls brake pressure at This system senses upper body motion subtle deceleration by controlling gear ra- individual wheels to aid tracing at corners tio, depending on the cornering condition and help smooth vehicle response. (based on wheel speed information) and controls four wheel brake pressure. This will calculated from driver’s steering input and When the VDC system is turned off, the In- enhance ride comfort in effort to restrain plural sensors. This benefit is for easier telligent Trace Control is also turned off. uncomfortable upper body movement traceability and less workload of adjusting speed with braking at corners. If the chassis control warning message ap- when passing over undulated road pears in the vehicle information display, it surfaces. The Intelligent Engine Brake also adds may indicate that Intelligent Trace Control When the VDC system is turned off, the Ac- subtle deceleration with gear ratio control is not functioning properly. Have the sys- tive Ride Control is also turned off. according to driver’s brake pedal tem checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon operation. as possible. See “Vehicle information dis- When the Active Ride Control is operating, you may hear noise and sense slight decel- If the chassis control warning message ap- play warnings and indicators” (P. 2-24) or pears in the vehicle information display, it (P. 2-39). eration. This is normal and indicates that the Active Ride Control is operating may indicate that the Intelligent Engine properly. Brake is not functioning properly. Have the WARNING system checked by a NISSAN dealer as The Intelligent Trace Control may not soon as possible. See “Vehicle information be effective depending on the driving display warnings and indicators” (P.2-24) or condition. Always drive carefully and (P. 2-39). attentively.

5-134 Starting and driving HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

WARNING WARNING When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start assist system automatically keeps The Intelligent Engine Brake may not • Never rely solely on the hill start as- the brakes applied to help prevent the ve- be effective depending on the driving sist system to prevent the vehicle hicle from rolling backward in the time it condition. Always drive carefully and from moving backward on a hill. Al- takes the driver to release the brake pedal attentively. ways drive carefully and attentively. and apply the accelerator. Depress the brake pedal when the When the Intelligent Engine Brake is oper- The hill start assist system will operate au- vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be tomatically under the following conditions: ating, the needle of the tachometer will rise especially careful when stopped on a up and you may hear an engine noise. This hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure • The transmission is shifted to a forward is normal and indicates that the Intelligent to prevent the vehicle from rolling or reverse gear. Engine Brake is operating properly. backwards may result in a loss of • The vehicle is stopped completely on a control of the vehicle and possible hill by applying the brake. The maximum serious injury or death. holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 sec- • The hill start assist system is not de- onds the vehicle will begin to roll back and signed to hold the vehicle at a stand- the hill start assist system will stop oper- still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal ating completely. when the vehicle is stopped on a The hill start assist system will not operate steep hill. Failure to do so may cause when the shift lever is placed in the N (Neu- the vehicle to roll backwards and tral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level may result in a collision or serious road. personal injury. • The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-135 REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS)

• The driver is always responsible for • The system may not detect the fol- safety during parking and other ma- lowing objects: fluffy objects such as neuvers. Always look around and snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; check that it is safe to do so before thin objects such as rope, wire and parking. chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects. • Read and understand the limitations If your vehicle sustains damage to the of the RSS as contained in this sec- bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or tion. The colors of the corner sonar bent, the sensing zone may be altered indicator and the distance guide causing inaccurate measurement of ob- lines in the rear view indicate differ- stacles or false alarms. ent distances to the object. • Inclement weather or ultrasonic CAUTION sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air • Excessive noise (such as audio sys- LSD3247 brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- tem volume or an open vehicle win- The RSS sounds a tone to inform the driver fect the function of the system; this dow) will interfere with the tone and of obstacles near the bumper. may include reduced performance or it may not be heard. When the “DISPLAY” key is on, the sonar a false activation. • Keep the sonar sensors (located on view will automatically appear in the • This function is designed as an aid to the bumper fascia) free from snow, touch-screen display. An additional view of the driver in detecting large station- ice and large accumulations of dirt. the sonar status will appear in the vehicle ary objects to help avoid damaging Do not clean the sensors with sharp information display for reference. the vehicle. objects. If the sensors are covered, • The system is not designed to pre- the accuracy of the sonar function WARNING vent contact with small or moving will be diminished. objects. Always move slowly. The • The RSS is a convenience but it is not SYSTEM OPERATION system will not detect small objects a substitute for proper parking. below the bumper, and may not de- The system informs with a visual and au- tect objects close to the bumper or dible alert of rear obstacles when the shift on the ground. lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

5-136 Starting and driving Sonar Operation Table RR Sensor Range Sound Display Roo o – Display/Beep when detect † – Display on camera view x – No Display and Beep The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only LSD3246 LSD2137 the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the When the corner of the vehicle moves The system indicators OA will appear when obstacle gets away from the vehicle. closer to an object, the corner sonar indi- the vehicle moves closer to an object. cator OA appears. When the center of the When the object is detected, the indicator vehicle moves close to an object, the cen- (green) appears and blinks and the tone ter sonar indicator B appears. sounds intermittently. When the vehicle O moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

Starting and driving 5-137 LSD3981 For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE SONAR SYSTEM

5-138 Starting and driving The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system: For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display: 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver As- sistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Rear” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. – Select “Auto Show Sonar” to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information display when the sonar system activates. – Select “Distance” to change the sonar system distance to “Long,” “Medium” or “Short.” – Select “Volume” to change the volume to LSD3799 “High,” “Medium” or “Low” For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

Starting and driving 5-139 For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter • The system is deactivated at speeds SYSTEM TEMPORARILY display: above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti- UNAVAILABLE 1. Press the button until “Settings” dis- vated at lower speeds. When sonar blockage is detected, the sys- plays in the vehicle information display. • Inclement weather or ultrasonic tem will be deactivated automatically. Use the button to select “Driver As- sources such as an automatic car The system is not available until the condi- sistance.” Then press the OK button. wash, a truck’s compressed-air tions no longer exist. 2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK brakes or a pneumatic drill may af- The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem- button. fect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or porary ambient conditions such as splash- 3. Select “Rear Sensor” and press the OK a false activation. ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi- button to turn the system on or off. • The system is not designed to pre- tion may also be caused by objects such as – Select “Display” to display the parking vent contact with small or moving ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensor in the vehicle information display objects. Always move slowly. The sensors. when the sonar system activates. system will not detect small objects Action to take: below the bumper or on the ground. – Select “Distance” to change the sonar When the above conditions no longer exist, system distance to “Long,” “Medium” or • The system may not detect the fol- the system will resume automatically. “Short.” lowing objects: fluffy objects such as – Select “Volume” to change the volume to snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; “High,” “Medium” or “Low” thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects. SONAR LIMITATIONS • The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and WARNING may not detect certain angular or moving objects. Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

5-140 Starting and driving COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Do not attach stickers (including transpar- FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK ent material), install accessories or apply To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply additional paint near the sonar sensors. de-icer through the key hole. If the lock Do not strike or damage the area around becomes frozen, heat the key before in- the sonar sensors. It is recommended that serting it into the key hole, or use the re- you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around mote keyless entry key fob or the NISSAN the sonar sensors is damaged due to a Intelligent Key®. collision. ANTIFREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see “Engine cooling system” (P. 8-4). LSD3754 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE BATTERY The sonar sensors O1 are located on the If the battery is not fully charged during rear bumper. Always keep the area near extremely cold weather conditions, the the sonar sensors clean. battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem- the battery should be checked regularly. porary ambient conditions such as splash- This vehicle is equipped with a sealed ing water, mist or fog. maintenance free battery. It is recom- The blocked condition may also be caused mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- service. structing the sonar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.

Starting and driving 5-141 DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER 3. Tire chains may be used. For additional • Whatever the condition, drive with information, see “Tire chains” (P. 8-35). If the vehicle is to be left outside without caution. Accelerate and slow down antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ- SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT with care. If accelerating or down- ing the engine block. Refill before operating shifting too fast, the drive wheels will the vehicle. For additional information, see It is recommended that the following items lose even more traction. “Changing engine coolant” (P. 8-5). be carried in the vehicle during winter: • Allow more stopping distance under • A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- these conditions. Braking should be TIRE EQUIPMENT move ice and snow from the windows started sooner than on dry 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to and wiper blades. pavement. provide superior performance on dry • A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the • Allow greater following distances on pavement. However, the performance of jack to give it firm support. slippery roads. these tires will be substantially reduced • A shovel to dig the vehicle out of • Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). in snowy and icy conditions. If you oper- snowdrifts. These may appear on an otherwise ate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, • Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield- clear road in shaded areas. If a patch NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & washer fluid reservoir. of ice is seen ahead, brake before SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four reaching it. Try not to brake while on wheels. It is recommended that you visit DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE the ice, and avoid any sudden steer- a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, ing maneuvers. speed rating and availability information. WARNING • Do not use the cruise control (if so 2. For additional traction on icy roads, • Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), equipped) on slippery roads. studded tires may be used. However, very cold snow or ice can be slick and • Snow can trap dangerous exhaust some U.S. states and Canadian prov- very hard to drive on. The vehicle will gases under your vehicle. Keep snow inces prohibit their use. Check local, have much less traction or “grip” un- clear of the exhaust pipe and from state and provincial laws before install- der these conditions. Try to avoid around your vehicle. ing studded tires. driving on wet ice until the road is Skid and traction capabilities of studded salted or sanded. snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

5-142 Starting and driving ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so To use the engine block heater: equipped) 1. Turn the engine off. Engine block heaters are used to assist 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine with cold temperature starting. block heater cord. The engine block heater should be used 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension or lower. cord. WARNING 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded • Do not use your engine block heater 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet. with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can 5. The engine block heater must be be seriously injured by an electrical plugged in for at least2-4hours, de- shock if you use an ungrounded pending on outside temperatures, to connection. properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine • Disconnect and properly store the block heater on. engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and cord could result in an electrical properly store the cord to keep it away shock and can cause serious injury. from moving parts. • Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury. Starting and driving 5-143 MEMO

5-144 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 Push starting ...... 6-11 Emergency engine shut off ...... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats...... 6-11 Flat tire ...... 6-3 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Towing recommended by NISSAN ...... 6-12 (TPMS)...... 6-3 Vehicle recovery Changing a flat tire ...... 6-3 (freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-14 Jump starting ...... 6-9 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

• Turn signals do not work when the To shut off the engine in an emergency hazard warning flasher lights are on. situation while driving, perform the following procedure: The flashers will operate with the ignition • Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch placed in any position. switch three consecutive times in less Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use than 1.5 seconds, or of the hazard warning flasher switch • Push and hold the push-button ignition while driving. switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING • If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. • Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

6-2 In case of emergency FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING • If the low tire pressure warning light • When using a wheel without TPMS SYSTEM (TPMS) illuminates while driving, avoid sud- such as the spare tire, the TPMS will This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni- den steering maneuvers or abrupt not function and the low tire pres- tors tire pressure of all tires except the braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull sure warning light will flash for ap- spare. When the low tire pressure warning off the road to a safe location and proximately one minute. The light light is lit, and the “CHECK TIRE PRES” (ve- stop the vehicle as soon as possible. will remain on after one minute. Have hicles without a vehicle information dis- Driving with under-inflated tires may your tires replaced and/or TPMS sys- play) also appears in the trip computer or permanently damage the tires and tem reset as soon as possible. It is the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” (vehicles increase the likelihood of tire failure. recommended that you visit a with a vehicle information display) appears Serious vehicle damage could occur NISSAN dealer for these services. in the vehicle information display, one or and may lead to an accident and • Replacing tires with those not origi- more of your tires is significantly under- could result in serious personal in- nally specified by NISSAN could af- inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with jury. Check the tire pressure for all fect the proper operation of the low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to TPMS. warn you of it by the low tire pressure warn- the recommended COLD tire pres- • Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol ing light. This system will activate only sure shown on the Tire and Loading tire sealant into the tires, as this may when the vehicle is driven at speeds above Information label to turn the low tire cause a malfunction of the tire pres- 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional informa- pressure warning light OFF. If the sure sensors. tion, “Warning lights, indicator lights and light still illuminates while driving af- audible reminders” (P. 2-7), and “Tire Pres- ter adjusting the tire pressure, a tire CHANGING A FLAT TIRE may be flat or the TPMS may be mal- sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5). If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions functioning. If you have a flat tire, re- below: place it with a spare tire as soon as WARNING possible. If no tire is flat and all tires Stopping the vehicle • Radio waves could adversely affect are properly inflated, have the ve- electric medical equipment. Those hicle checked. It is recommended 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and who use a pacemaker should contact that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this away from traffic. service. the electric medical equipment 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

In case of emergency 6-3 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING LCE2142 LCE2449 • Make sure the parking brake is se- A. Blocks Getting the spare tire and tools curely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or B. Flat tire 1. Open the trunk and lift the trunk floor the CVT is shifted into P (Park). Blocking wheels carpeting. • Never change tires when the vehicle Place suitable blocks at both the front and 2. Jack is located beside of the spare tire. is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. To remove, take off the rubber strap and This is hazardous. back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving lift out. • Never change tires if oncoming traf- when it is jacked up. 3. Lift spacer to access the clamp. fic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance. WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.

LCE2450 SCE0630 4. Turn the clamp counterclockwise and Removing wheel cover (if so remove to release the spare tire. equipped)

CAUTION CAUTION Avoid touching the sheet metal area Do not use your hands to pry off wheel around the spare tire. Doing so could caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury. result in personal injury. To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod O1 as illustrated. Apply cloth O2 between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

In case of emergency 6-5 • Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. • Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. • Never use blocks on or under the jack. • Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. • Do not allow passengers to stay in CE1089 the vehicle while it is on the jack. Jacking up vehicle and removing • Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the ve- the damaged tire hicle to move. WARNING • Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. • Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

6-6 In case of emergency SCE0002 WCE0056 Always refer to the illustrations for the cor- 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up Installing the spare tire rect placement and jack-up points for your point as illustrated so the top of the jack The spare tire is designed for emergency specific vehicle model and jack type. contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. use. For additional information, see Align the jack head between the two Carefully read the caution label attached “Wheels and tires” (P. 8-28). to the jack body and the following in- notches in the front or the rear as 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface structions. shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown. between the wheel and hub. 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the The jack should be used on firm and 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the level ground. tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. wheel nuts until the tire is off the 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten ground. lever and rod with both hands. Carefully wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the raise the vehicle until the tire clears the sequence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD , OE ) ground. Remove the wheel nuts and until they are tight. then remove the tire.

In case of emergency 6-7 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire Adjust tire pressure to the COLD touches the ground. Then, with the pressure. wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel COLD pressure: After vehicle has been nuts securely in the sequence illustrated parked for 3 hours or more or driven less (OA , OB , OC , OD , OE ). Lower the vehicle than 1 mile (1.6 km). completely. COLD tire pressures are shown on the WARNING Tire and Loading Information Label. • Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tightened wheel nuts can cause the tire pressure, the display of the tire pres- wheel to become loose or come off. sure information may show higher pres- This could cause an accident. sure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 • Do not use oil or grease on the wheel mile (1.6 km). studs or nuts. This could cause the LCE2451 nuts to become loose. This is because the tire pressurizes as 6. Install the jack in its storage area and • Retighten the wheel nuts when the the tire temperature rises. This does not secure with rubber strap. vehicle has been driven for 600 miles indicate a system malfunction. (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, 5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle. 7. Place the trunk floor carpeting over the etc.). damaged tire. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel 8. Close the trunk. nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval.

6-8 In case of emergency JUMP STARTING

WARNING To start your engine with a booster battery, • Whenever working on or near a bat- the instructions and precautions below tery, always wear suitable eye pro- • Always make sure that the spare tire must be followed. tectors (for example, goggles or in- and jacking equipment are properly dustrial safety spectacles) and secured after use. Such items can be- WARNING remove rings, metal bands, or any come dangerous projectiles in an ac- other jewelry. Do not lean over the cident or sudden stop. • If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting battery when jump starting. • The spare tire is designed for emer- in severe injury or death. It could also • Do not attempt to jump start a frozen gency use. Refer to specific instruc- damage your vehicle. battery. It could explode and cause tions under the heading “Wheels and serious injury. tires” (P. 8-28). • Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. • Your vehicle has an automatic engine Keep all sparks and flames away cooling fan. It could come on at any from the battery. time. Keep hands and other objects • Do not allow battery fluid to come away from it. into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the con- tacted area with water. • Keep battery out of the reach of children. • The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-9 CAUTION • Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (−) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. • Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle LCE2223 and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve- WARNING 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmis- hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the Always follow the instructions below. sion) or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable engine of the vehicle being jump started. Failure to do so could result in damage Transmission (CVT)). Switch off all un- to the charging system and cause per- necessary electrical systems (lights, CAUTION heater, air conditioner, etc.). sonal injury. Do not keep the starter motor engaged 1. If the booster battery is in another ve- 3. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK or for more than 10 seconds. If the engine hicle, position the two vehicles to bring OFF position. does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and their batteries near each other. 4. Connect the jumper cables in the se- wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. quence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ). 7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

6-10 In case of emergency PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for an extremely high temperature gauge steam or coolant escaping from the ra- • Do not push start this vehicle. The reading), or if you feel a lack of engine diator before opening the hood. (If three-way catalyst may be power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the steam or coolant is escaping, turn off damaged. following steps. the engine.) Do not open the hood fur- • Continuously Variable Transmission ther until no steam or coolant can be (CVT) models and Manual Transmis- WARNING seen. sion (M/T) cannot be push-started or • Do not continue to drive if your ve- 4. Open the engine hood. tow-started. Attempting to do so hicle overheats. Doing so could cause may cause transmission damage. engine damage or a vehicle fire. WARNING • For Manual Transmission (M/T) mod- • To avoid the danger of being scalded, If steam or water is coming from the els, never try to start the vehicle by never remove the coolant reservoir towing it. When the engine starts, the engine, stand clear to prevent getting cap while the engine is still hot. When burned. forward surge could cause the ve- the coolant reservoir cap is removed, hicle to collide with the tow vehicle. pressurized hot water will spurt out, 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or possibly causing serious injury. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan • Do not open the hood if steam is is running. The radiator hoses and radia- coming out. tor should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap- or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, ply the parking brake and move the shift stop the engine. lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (CVT). WARNING Do not stop the engine. Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, 2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so jewelry or clothing to come into con- equipped). Open all the windows, move tact with, or get caught in, engine belts the heater or air conditioner tempera- or the engine cooling fan. The engine ture control to maximum hot and fan cooling fan can start at any time. control to high speed.

In case of emergency 6-11 TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin- CAUTION coolant level in the engine coolant res- cial in Canada) and local regulations for ervoir with the engine running. Add cool- towing must be followed. Incorrect towing • When towing, make sure that the ant to the engine coolant reservoir if equipment could damage your vehicle. transmission, axles, steering system necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It Towing instructions are available from a and powertrain are in working condi- is recommended that you visit a NISSAN NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are tion. If any of these conditions apply, dealer for this service. generally familiar with the applicable laws dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be and procedures for towing. To assure used. proper towing and to prevent accidental • Always attach safety chains before damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom- towing. mends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service For additional information about towing operator carefully read the following your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle precautions: (RV), see “Flat towing” (P. 10-20).

WARNING TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN • Never ride in a vehicle that is being NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle towed. based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi- • Never get under your vehicle after it tional information, refer to the diagrams in has been lifted by a tow truck. this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

6-12 In case of emergency – Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).

LCE2345

Two-Wheel Drive models with CAUTION Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) • Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be on the ground (forward or back- towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ward), as this may cause serious and ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed expensive damage to the transmis- truck as illustrated. sion. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels. • When towing CVT models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:

In case of emergency 6-13 – Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for manual transmission models only: Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h) Distance: Less than 500 miles (805 km) When towing long distances or speeds in excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission. For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. LCE2346 VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a Two-Wheel Drive models with after every 500 miles of towing may cause stuck vehicle) manual transmission damage to the transmission’s internal parts. WARNING NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- the vehicle on the flatbed truck as sonal injury or death when recovering a illustrated. Failure to follow these guidelines can stuck vehicle: result in severe transmission damage. If you must use a pull behind tow truck put • Contact a professional towing ser- the manual transmission in N (Neutral). • If you have to tow manual transmis- vice to recover the vehicle if you have sion models with the rear wheels on any questions regarding the recov- Your vehicle speed should never exceed 60 the ground (if you do not use towing ery procedure. mph (97 km/h) when towing your vehicle. dollies) or four wheels on the ground: • Tow chains or cables must be at- After towing 500 miles, start and idle the – Always release the parking brake. engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) tached only to main structural mem- for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine – Move the transmission shift lever bers of the vehicle. to the N (Neutral) position 6-14 In case of emergency • Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, tow or free a stuck vehicle. etc., use the following procedure: • Only use devices specifically de- 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control signed for vehicle recovery and fol- (VDC) System. low the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind • Always pull the recovery device the vehicle is clear of obstructions. straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires. • Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle ex- 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and cept the attachment point. backward. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, • Shift back and forth between R (Re- etc., use a tow strap or other device de- verse) and D (Drive) (Continuously Vari- signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al- able Transmission models) or 1st (Low) ways follow the manufacturer's instruc- and R (Reverse) (manual transmission tions for the recovery device. models). • Apply the accelerator as little as pos- Rocking a stuck vehicle sible to maintain the rocking motion. • Release the accelerator pedal before WARNING shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (Continuously Variable Trans- • Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. mission models) or 1st (Low) and R (Re- • Do not spin your tires at high speed. verse) (manual transmission models). This could cause them to explode • Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 and result in serious injury. Parts of km/h). your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15 MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ...... 7-2 Air fresheners ...... 7-5 Washing ...... 7-2 Power moonroof (if so equipped) ...... 7-6 Waxing ...... 7-3 Floor mats (if so equipped) ...... 7-6 Removing spots ...... 7-3 Seatbelts...... 7-7 Underbody ...... 7-3 Corrosion protection ...... 7-8 Glass ...... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) ...... 7-4 vehicle corrosion ...... 7-8 Chromeparts...... 7-4 Environmental factors influence the Tire dressings ...... 7-4 rate of corrosion ...... 7-8 Cleaning interior ...... 7-5 Protect your vehicle from corrosion ...... 7-8 CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of CAUTION • Do not wash the vehicle with strong your vehicle, it is important to take proper household soap, strong chemical de- care of it. • Do not concentrate water spray di- tergents, gasoline or solvents. rectly on the sonar sensors (if so To protect the paint surfaces, wash your • Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- equipped) on the bumper as this will vehicle as soon as you can: light or while the vehicle body is hot, result in damage to the sensors. Do • After a rainfall to prevent possible dam- as the surface may become not use pressure washers capable of age from acid rain. water-spotted. spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274 • After driving on coastal roads. kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of • Avoid using tight-napped or rough • When contaminants such as soot, bird high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi cloths, such as washing mitts. Care droppings, tree sap, metal particles or (8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or must be taken when removing bugs get on the paint surface. removal of paint or graphics. Avoid caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not • When dust or mud builds up on the using a high-pressure washer closer scratched or damaged. surface. than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle. Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, Whenever possible, store or park your ve- Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of keep the nozzle moving and do not clean water. hicle inside a garage or in a covered area. concentrate the water spray on any When it is necessary to park outside, park in one area. Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly a shady area or protect the vehicle with a • Do not use car washes that use acid body cover. vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There- in the detergent. Some car washes, fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- especially brushless ones, use some Take care that the drain holes in the lower face when putting on or removing the acid for cleaning. The acid may react edge of the door are open. Spray water body cover. with some plastic vehicle compo- under the body and in the wheel wells to nents, causing them to crack. This loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. WASHING could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to func- A damp chamois can be used to dry the Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty vehicle to avoid water spots. of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- tion properly. Always check with your ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or car wash to confirm that acid is not general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed used. with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

7-2 Appearance and care WAXING UNDERBODY Regular waxing protects the paint surface In areas where road salt is used in winter, it and helps retain new vehicle appearance. is necessary to clean the underbody regu- Polishing is recommended to remove larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath- building up and causing the acceleration of ered appearance before re-applying wax. corrosion on the underbody and suspen- It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN sion. Before the winter period and again in dealer to assist you in choosing the proper the spring, the underseal must be checked product. and, if necessary, re-treated. • Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. • Do not use a wax containing any abra- sives, cutting compounds or cleaners WAI0005 that may damage the vehicle finish. GLASS Machine compounding or aggressive pol- When cleaning the rear window, it may be ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- easier to clean if the inside high-mounted ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. stop light is removed first. REMOVING SPOTS Be careful when removing the high- Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, mounted stop light to reduce the risk of insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible damaging the high-mounted stop light from the surface of the paint to avoid last- wires. ing damage or staining. Special cleaning To remove the high-mounted stop light: products are available at a NISSAN dealer ᭺1 Push toward rear of vehicle. or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN ᭺2 Lift to remove. dealer for these products.

Appearance and care 7-3 The high-mounted stop light must be CAUTION If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the properly reinstalled before driving your following precautions: vehicle. Follow the directions below to avoid • Use a water-based tire dressing. The Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and staining or discoloring the wheels: coating on the tire dissolves more easily dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- • Do not use a cleaner that uses strong than with an oil-based tire dressing. mal for glass to become coated with a film acid or alkali contents to clean the • Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. wheels. prevent it from entering the tire tread/ Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily • Do not apply wheel cleaners to the grooves (where it would be difficult to remove this film. wheels when they are hot. The wheel remove). temperature should be the same as • Wipe off excess tire dressing using a CAUTION ambient temperature. dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is • Rinse the wheel to completely re- completely removed from the tire When cleaning the inside of the win- tread/grooves. dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, move the cleaner within 15 minutes abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based after the cleaner is applied. • Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- CHROME PARTS age the electrical conductors, radio an- manufacturer. tenna elements or rear window de- Clean all chrome parts regularly with a froster elements. non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped) TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a dampened in a mild soap solution, espe- coating to the tires to help reduce discolor- cially during winter months in areas where ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap- road salt is used. If not removed, road salt plied to the tires, it may react with the coat- can discolor the wheels. ing and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

7-4 Appearance and care CLEANING INTERIOR

Occasionally remove loose dust from the CAUTION AIR FRESHENERS interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a Most air fresheners use a solvent that vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe • Never use benzine, thinner or any could affect the vehicle interior. If you use the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur- similar material. an air freshener, take the following faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in • Small dirt particles can be abrasive precautions: mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a and damaging to leather surfaces • Hanging-type air fresheners can cause dry, soft cloth. and should be removed promptly. Do permanent discoloration when they con- not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol- Regular care and cleaning is required in tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, order to maintain the appearance of the freshener in a location that allows it to detergents or ammonia-based leather (if so equipped). hang free and not contact an interior cleaners as they may damage the Before using any fabric protector, read the surface. leather's natural finish. manufacturer's recommendations. Some • Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on • Never use fabric protectors unless fabric protectors contain chemicals that the vents. These products can cause im- recommended by the manufacturer. may stain or bleach the seat material. mediate damage and discoloration • Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on Use a cloth dampened only with water to when spilled on interior surfaces. meter or gauge lens covers. It may clean the meter and gauge lens. damage the lens cover. Carefully read and follow the manufacturer's instructions before using the air • Never use chloride solutions for WARNING fresheners. cleaning aluminum decoratives (if so Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot equipped), damage may occur. steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Appearance and care 7-5 POWER MOONROOF (if so • Properly position the mats in the equipped) floorwell using the floor mat posi- The sunshade is made from a tricot tioning hook. For additional informa- material. tion, see "Floor mat installation" (P. 7-6). CAUTION • Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. To help prevent damaging the moon- • Periodically check the floor mats to roof while cleaning: make sure they are properly • Do not rub the material with a cloth. installed. Doing so can damage the surface of • After cleaning the vehicle interior, the material or cause a stain to check the floor mats to make sure spread. they are properly installed. • Never use benzine, thinner or any LAI2009 The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can similar chemical to clean the sun- extend the life of your vehicle carpet and shade. This may discolor the moon- FLOOR MATS (if so equipped) make it easier to clean the interior. Mats roof and damage the surface. WARNING should be maintained with regular clean- • Clean water based stains by patting To avoid potential pedal interference ing and replaced if they become exces- the surface with a clean soft cloth sively worn. dampened in warm water. Press a that may result in a collision, injury or death: clean dry cloth onto the surface to Floor mat installation remove as much dampness as pos- • NEVER place a floor mat on top of sible and then let air dry. another floor mat in the driver front Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of • Clean oil based stains by patting the position or install them upside down the floor mat positioning hooks for each surface with a clean soft cloth damp- or backwards. seating position varies depending on the ened in warm water. Press a clean dry • Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, vehicle. cloth onto the surface to remove as or equivalent floor mats, that are much dampness as possible and specifically designed for use in your then let air dry. vehicle model and model year.

7-6 Appearance and care When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN follow the installation instructions provided dealer for details about installing the floor with the mat and the following: mats in your vehicle. 1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the shift lever in P (Park) position (Continu- ously Variable Transmission models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position (manual transmission models) and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s). 2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is LPD2495 properly positioned. Positioning hooks 3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter- The illustration shows the location of the fere with pedal operation. With the igni- floor mat positioning hooks. tion still in the OFF position, the shift lever in the P (Park) position (Continuously SEAT BELTS Variable Transmission models) or the The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping shift lever in the N (Neutral) position them with a sponge dampened in a mild (manual transmission models) and with soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com- the parking brake applied, fully apply and pletely in the shade before using them. For release all pedals. The floor mat must additional information, see “Seat belt main- not interfere with pedal operation or tenance” (P. 1-19). prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.

Appearance and care 7-7 CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING MOST COMMON FACTORS Temperature CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE High temperatures accelerate the rate of Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in CORROSION corrosion to those parts which are not well the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or ventilated. chemical solvents to clean the seat Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: belts, since these materials may se- • The accumulation of moisture-retaining Air pollution verely weaken the seat belt webbing. dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in • Damage to paint and other protective the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt coatings caused by gravel and stone use accelerates the corrosion process. chips or minor traffic collisions. Road salt also accelerates the disintegra- tion of paint surfaces. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION CORROSION • Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep Moisture the vehicle clean. • Always check for minor damage to the Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on paint and repair it as soon as possible. the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry • Keep drain holes at the bottom of the completely inside the vehicle and should doors open to avoid water accumulation. be removed for drying to avoid floor panel • Check the underbody for accumulation corrosion. of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible. Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used. 7-8 Appearance and care CAUTION • NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. • Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-9 MEMO

7-10 Appearance and care 8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 In-cabin microfilter ...... 8-16 Engine compartment check locations...... 8-3 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-17 Engine cooling system ...... 8-4 Cleaning ...... 8-17 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Replacing ...... 8-17 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-5 Brakes...... 8-18 Engine oil ...... 8-6 Fuses ...... 8-19 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-6 Engine compartment ...... 8-19 Changing engine oil and oil filter...... 8-6 Passenger compartment ...... 8-21 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Battery replacement ...... 8-22 fluid (if so equipped) ...... 8-10 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 8-22 Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ...... 8-10 Lights ...... 8-24 Brake fluid ...... 8-10 Headlights ...... 8-24 Clutch (if so equipped) fluid ...... 8-11 Turn signal bulb ...... 8-25 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-11 Fog lights (if so equipped) ...... 8-25 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...... 8-11 Exterior and interior lights ...... 8-26 Battery...... 8-12 Wheels and tires ...... 8-28 Jump starting ...... 8-13 Tire pressure ...... 8-28 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-14 Tire labeling ...... 8-32 Drive belt ...... 8-14 Types of tires ...... 8-34 Spark plugs ...... 8-15 Tire chains ...... 8-35 Replacing spark plugs ...... 8-15 Changing wheels and tires ...... 8-36 Air cleaner ...... 8-16 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or main- • If you must run the engine in an en- • Avoid contact with used engine oil tenance work on your vehicle, always take closed space such as a garage, be and coolant. Improperly disposed care to prevent serious accidental injury to sure there is proper ventilation for engine oil, engine coolant and/or yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- exhaust gases to escape. other vehicle fluids can damage the lowing are general precautions which • Never get under the vehicle while it is environment. Always conform to lo- should be closely observed. supported only by a jack. If it is nec- cal regulations for disposal of vehicle essary to work under the vehicle, fluid. WARNING support it with safety stands. • Never leave the engine or the trans- • Park the vehicle on a level surface, • Keep smoking materials, flame and mission related component harness apply the parking brake securely and sparks away from the fuel tank and connector disconnected while the ig- block the wheels to prevent the ve- battery. nition switch is in the ON position. hicle from moving. For manual trans- • Because the fuel lines on gasoline • Never connect or disconnect the bat- mission models, move the shift lever engine models are under high pres- tery or any transistorized compo- to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move sure even when the engine is off, it is nent while the ignition switch is in the shift lever to P (Park). recommended that you visit a the ON position. NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel • Be sure the ignition switch is in the filter or fuel lines. This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc- OFF or LOCK position when perform- • Your vehicle is equipped with an au- tions regarding only those items which are ing any parts replacement or repairs. tomatic engine cooling fan. It may relatively easy for an owner to perform. • If you must work with the engine run- come on at any time without warn- A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair ing, even if the ignition switch is in available. For additional information, see and tools away from moving fans, the OFF position and the engine is “Owner's Manual/Service Manual order in- belts and any other moving parts. not running. To avoid injury, always formation” (P. 10-25). • It is advisable to secure or remove disconnect the negative battery any loose clothing and remove any cable before working near the fan. You should be aware that incomplete or jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and before working on your vehicle. CAUTION • Always wear eye protection when- could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt ever you work on your vehicle. • Do not work under the hood while about any servicing, it is recommended the engine is hot. Turn the engine off that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer. and wait until it cools down. 8-2 Do-it-yourself ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

5. Air cleaner 6. Engine oil dipstick 7. Drive belt location 8. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 9. Engine coolant reservoir

LDI3477 2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model) 2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid 1. Engine oil filler cap reservoir 3. Fuse and relay box 4. Battery Do-it-yourself 8-3 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the CAUTION • The life expectancy of the factory-fill factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ • Never use any cooling system addi- or 7 years. Mixing any other type of Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide tives such as radiator sealer. Addi- coolant other than Genuine NISSAN year-round antifreeze and coolant protec- tives may clog the cooling system Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) tion. The antifreeze solution contains rust and cause damage to the engine, (or equivalent cooling), including and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine transmission and/or cooling system. Genuine NISSAN Long Life cooling system additives are not • When adding or replacing coolant, be Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the necessary. sure to use only Genuine NISSAN use of non-distilled water may re- Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) duce the life expectancy of the WARNING or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long factory-fill coolant. For additional in- • Never remove the coolant reservoir Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- formation, see the “Maintenance and cap when the engine is hot. Wait until diluted to provide antifreeze protec- schedules” section of this manual. the engine and radiator cool down. tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional Serious burns could be caused by freeze protection is needed due to high pressure fluid escaping from the weather where you operate your ve- radiator. For additional information hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life on precautions, see “If your vehicle Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen- overheats” (P. 6-11). trate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant • The coolant reservoir is equipped other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life with a pressure type coolant reser- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol- voir cap. To prevent engine damage, low the coolant manufacturer’s in- use only a Genuine NISSAN coolant structions to maintain minimum an- reservoir cap. tifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

8-4 Do-it-yourself ditional information, see the “Maintenance • Avoid direct skin contact with used and schedules” section of this manual. coolant. If skin contact is made, wash If the cooling system frequently requires thoroughly with soap or hand coolant, have it checked. It is recom- cleaner as soon as possible. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer • Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- for this service. dren and pets. For additional information on the location Engine coolant must be disposed of prop- of the engine coolant reservoir, see “Engine erly. Check your local regulations. compartment check locations” (P. 8-3). CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be LDI3495 found in the NISSAN Service Manual. CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT Improper servicing can result in reduced LEVEL heater performance and engine overheating. Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant WARNING level is below the MIN level OB , add coolant to the MAX level OA . • To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long engine is hot. Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is • Never remove the engine coolant 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing reservoir cap when the engine is hot. any other type of coolant or the use of Serious burns could be caused by non-distilled water will reduce the life ex- high pressure fluid escaping from the pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad- system.

Do-it-yourself 8-5 ENGINE OIL

CAUTION • Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insuffi- cient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty. • It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. Make sure to follow the engine oil changing intervals in the maintenance booklet. Op- LDI3487 LDI0371 erating under the following conditions may require more frequent oil change: CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick again and check • repeated short distance driving the oil level. It should be between the H 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and (High) and L (Low) marks B . This is the • driving in dusty conditions apply the parking brake. O normal operating oil level range. If the oil • stop and go commuting. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it level is below the L (Low) mark OA ,re- reaches operating temperature. move the oil filler cap and pour recom- CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL mended oil through the opening. Do not FILTER 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 overfill C . minutes for the oil to drain back into O For additional information on engine oil the oil pan. 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. and oil filter change, refer to the instructions outlined in this section. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

8-6 Do-it-yourself LDI3488 LDI3507 LDI3508 O1 Oil filler cap O2 Oil drain plug O3 Oil filter Vehicle set-up

Do-it-yourself 8-7 CAUTION Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

LDI3510 LDI3509 O4 Under engine protector Under-engine protector 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and Removal of under-engine apply the parking brake. protectors 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating 1. Remove fasteners OA and engine temperature. protector. 3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 minutes. Engine oil and filter 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a 1. Place a large drain pan under the drain suitable floor jack and safety jack stands. plug and oil filter. • Place the safety jack stands under the 2. Remove the oil filler cap. vehicle jack-up points. 3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by • A suitable adapter should be attached to turning it counterclockwise and com- the jack stand saddle. pletely drain the oil.

8-8 Do-it-yourself CAUTION CAUTION For additional information about drain and refill capacity, see “Recommended fluids/ Be careful not to burn yourself, as the Be sure to remove any old gasket ma- lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). The engine oil is hot. terial remaining on the sealing surface drain and refill capacity depends on the oil of the engine. Failure to do so could temperature and drain time. Use these lead to an oil leak and engine damage. specifications for reference only. Always WARNING • The dipstick must be inserted in use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine. • Prolonged and repeated contact place to prevent oil spillage from the with used engine oil may cause skin dipstick hole when filling the engine 10. Start the engine and check for leakage cancer. with oil. around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. Turn the engine off • Try to avoid direct skin contact with 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with and wait more than 15 minutes. Check used oil. If skin contact is made, wash clean engine oil. thoroughly with soap or hand the oil level with the dipstick. Add en- cleaner as soon as possible. 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a gine oil if necessary. slight resistance is felt, then tighten addi- • Keep used engine oil out of reach of tionally more than 2/3 turn. children. After the operation Oil filter tightening torque: 1. Reinstall under engine protector in re- 4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter 11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 N·m) verse order. wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Remove the oil filter by turning it by 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a 2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the hand. new washer. Securely tighten the drain ground. plug with a wrench. Do not use exces- 3. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance re- 5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur- sive force. face with a clean rag. minder and oil control system. For addi- Drain plug tightening torque: tional information, see “Vehicle informa- 22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m) tion display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” 9. Refill the engine with the recommended (P. 2-16) or “Vehicle information display oil through the oil filler opening, and in- 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-30). stall the oil filler cap securely. • Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. • Check your local regulations.

Do-it-yourself 8-9 CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped) TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so FLUID equipped) CAUTION For additional brake and clutch fluid specification information, see “Recommended • NISSAN recommends using Genuine fluids/lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix WARNING with other fluids. • Use only new fluid from a sealed con- • Do not use Automatic Transmission tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission fluid may damage the brake and fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam- clutch (if so equipped) systems. The age the CVT. Damage caused by the use of improper fluids can damage use of fluids other than as recom- the brake and clutch system and af- mended is not covered under fect the vehicle's stopping ability. NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited War- ranty outlined in your Warranty Infor- • Clean the filler cap before removing. mation Booklet. • Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous LDI3490 • Using fluids that are not equivalent and should be stored carefully in BRAKE FLUID to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 marked containers out of reach of may also damage the CVT. Damage children. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the caused by the use of fluids other than level is below the MIN line O1 , or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine as recommended is not covered un- CAUTION der NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 2 . If fluid must be Warranty outlined in your Warranty Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- O added frequently, the system should be Information Booklet. faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid checked. It is recommended that you visit a is spilled, immediately wash the sur- When checking or replacement of CVT fluid NISSAN dealer for this service. face with water. is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

8-10 Do-it-yourself WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION • Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the paint. • Do not fill the windshield-washer LDI3531 LDI3496 fluid reservoir with washer fluid con- CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID centrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the RESERVOIR concentrates may permanently stain fluid is below the CL (clutch) MIN line O2 , add Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir pe- the grille if spilled while filling the Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent riodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when windshield-washer fluid reservoir. DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line O1 . If fluid the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message • Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates must be added frequently, the system shows on the vehicle information display. with water to the manufacturer's should be checked. It is recommended To check the fluid level, use your finger to recommended levels before pouring that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this the fluid into the windshield-washer service. plug the center hole O1 of the cap/tube assembly, then remove it from the reser- fluid reservoir. Do not use the voir. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid. windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and Add a washer solvent to the washer for bet- water. ter cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio. Do-it-yourself 8-11 BATTERY

Caution symbols for battery WARNING

No smoking, No exposed flames, Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the 1 O No Sparks battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or 2 Shield eyes O battery acid.

O3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your O4 Battery acid eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

O5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

O6 Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

8-12 Do-it-yourself • If the battery is labeled “do not open” it is WARNING maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recom- • Do not expose the battery to flames, mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy- a qualified specialist workshop to con- drogen gas generated by the battery firm the battery’s performance. is explosive. Explosive gases can • Keep the battery surface clean and dry. cause blindness or injury. Do not al- Clean the battery with a solution of bak- low battery fluid to contact your skin, ing soda and water. eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul- • Make certain the terminal connections furic acid can cause blindness or in- are clean and securely tightened. jury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your • If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If or longer, disconnect the negative (-) bat- the acid contacts your eyes, skin or tery terminal cable to prevent discharge. clothing, immediately flush with wa- LDI3302 ter for at least 15 minutes and seek NOTE: NOTE: medical attention. Care should be taken to avoid situations • When working on or near a battery, Do not try to open the top of the battery. that can lead to potential battery dis- always wear suitable eye protection charge and potential no-start conditions This battery is not equipped with remov- and remove all jewelry. such as: able vent caps. • Battery posts, terminals and related 1. Installation or extended use of elec- accessories contain lead and lead JUMP STARTING tronic accessories that consume bat- compounds. Wash hands after If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump tery power when the engine is not handling. starting” (P.6-9). If the engine does not start running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD • Keep battery out of the reach of by jump starting, the battery may have to players, etc.) children. be replaced. It is recommended that you 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or • Do not tip the battery. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

Do-it-yourself 8-13 VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL DRIVE BELT SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system mea- sures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator. The current sensor OA is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

LDI3478 WDI0638 1. Automatic tensioner pulley CAUTION 2. Generator pulley 3. Water pump pulley • Do not ground accessories directly to 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley the battery terminal. Doing so will 5. Crankshaft pulley bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may WARNING not charge completely. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF • Use electrical accessories with the or LOCK position before servicing drive engine running to avoid discharging belt. The engine could rotate the vehicle battery. unexpectedly.

8-14 Do-it-yourself SPARK PLUGS

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un- Iridium-tipped spark plugs usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced or ad- It is not necessary to replace iridium- justed. It is recommended that you visit a tipped OA spark plugs as frequently as con- NISSAN dealer for this service. ventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance 2. Have the belt checked regularly for log shown in the “Maintenance and sched- condition. ules” section of this manual. Do not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. • Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for SDI1895 this service. REPLACING SPARK PLUGS WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

Do-it-yourself 8-15 AIR CLEANER

4. Remove the air cleaner filter. Wipe the IN-CABIN MICROFILTER inside of the air cleaner filter housing The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry and the cover with a damp cloth, then of airborne dust and pollen particles and replace air cleaner filter. reduces some objectionable outside NOTE: odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, see the After installing a new air cleaner, make “Maintenance and schedules” section of sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the this manual. housing and latch the clips. If replacement is required, it is recom- WARNING mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. • Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or LDI3498 others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the The viscous paper type filter element (if so flame if the engine backfires. If it isn't equipped) should not be cleaned and re- there, and the engine backfires, you used. The dry paper type filter element (if so could be burned. Do not drive with equipped) may be cleaned and reused. Re- the air cleaner removed, and be care- place it according to the maintenance log ful when working on the engine with shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” the air cleaner removed. section of this manual. • Never pour fuel into the throttle body To remove the air cleaner filter: or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so 1. Unlatch the retaining clips OA . could result in serious injury. 2. Pull up at points OB and remove. 3. Pull up and remove air cleaner housing.

8-16 Do-it-yourself WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING CAUTION If your windshield is not clear after using • After wiper blade replacement, re- the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade turn the wiper arm to its original po- chatters when running, wax or other mate- sition; otherwise it may be damaged rial may be on the blade or windshield. when the hood is opened. Clean the outside of the windshield with a • Make sure the wiper blades contact washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your wind- the glass; otherwise the arms may be shield is clean if beads do not form when damaged from wind pressure. rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, LDI2757 install new windshield wiper blades. REPLACING CAUTION Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol- Worn windshield wiper blades can low the procedure below: damage the windshield and impair driver vision. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. 2. Push the release tab OB . 3. Move the wiper blade OA down and remove. 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place. 5. Push wiper on to windshield. Do-it-yourself 8-17 BRAKES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have Brake pad wear indicators the brakes checked. It is recommended The disc brake pads on your vehicle have that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this audible wear indicators. When a brake pad service. requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard Self-adjusting brakes when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting be heard whether or not the brake pedal is brakes. depressed. Have the brakes checked as The front and rear (if so equipped) disc- soon as possible if the wear indicator type brakes self-adjust every time the sound is heard. brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type Under some driving or climate conditions, brakes (if so equipped) self-adjust every occasional brake squeak, squeal or other time the parking brake is applied. noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is nor- WARNING mal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to Proper brake inspection intervals should normal. It is recommended that you be followed. For additional information re- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. garding brake inspections, see the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules" sec- LDI2731 tion of this manual. If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle OD . This may cause clogging or improper windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin OC .

8-18 Do-it-yourself FUSES

NOTE: Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

LDI3511 ENGINE COMPARTMENT WARNING Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- perage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage LDI3480 the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire. Four types of fuses are used. Type OA is used exclusively in the passenger com- If any electrical equipment does not come partment fuse box. on, check for an open fuse. Type OB and OD are used in the engine 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head- compartment fuse box. light switch are OFF. Type OC is used in passenger compart- 2. Open the engine hood. ment and the engine compartment. Do-it-yourself 8-19 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing Fusible links the tabs A and lifting the cover up. O If the electrical equipment does not oper- 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller, ate and fuses are in good condition, check which is located in the center of the fuse the fusible links. If any of these fusible links box cover in the passenger compart- are melted, replace with only Genuine ment. For additional information, see NISSAN parts. “Passenger compartment” (P. 8-21).

LDI2746 5. If the fuse is open OB , replace it with an equivalent good fuse OC . 6. Push the fuse box cover to install. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NOTE: Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

8-20 Do-it-yourself LDI3483 LDI3481 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head- 5. If the fuse is open OC , replace it with an light switch are OFF. equivalent good fuse D . WARNING O 2. Remove the fuse box cover OA with a 6. Push the fuse box cover to install. Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam- If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical perage rating than that specified on aging the trim. the fuse box cover. This could damage system checked and repaired. It is recom- the electrical system or electronic con- 3. Locate the fuse that needs to be mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for trol units or cause a fire. replaced. this service. If any electrical equipment does not oper- 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller OB , NOTE: ate, check for an open fuse. which is located in the center of the fuse box cover in the passenger Your vehicle may not be equipped with NOTE: compartment. all fuses listed on the fuse label. The fuse box is located on the driver's side of the instrument panel.

Do-it-yourself 8-21 BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows: Be careful not to allow children to swal- 1. Remove the mechanical key from the low the battery or removed parts. Intelligent Key. 2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver OA into the slit OB of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

8-22 Do-it-yourself 3. Replace the battery with a new one. FCC Notice: Recommended battery: CR2032 or For USA: equivalent. This device complies with Part 15 of the • Do not touch the internal circuit and FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- electric terminals as doing so could lowing two conditions: (1) This device cause a malfunction. may not cause harmful interference, and • Hold the battery by the edges. Holding (2) this device must accept any interfer- the battery across the contact points ence received, including interference will seriously deplete the storage that may cause undesired operation. capacity. Note: • Make sure that the + side faces the Changes or modifications not expressly bottom of the lower part. approved by the party responsible for 4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. OC and OD . 5. Operate the buttons to check the For Canada: operation. This device contains licence-exempt If you need assistance with replacement, it transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply is recommended that you visit a NISSAN with Innovation, Science and Economic dealer for this service. Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference. (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-23 LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS • Do not leave the headlight assembly For additional information on headlight open without a bulb installed for a bulb replacement, refer to the instructions long period of time. Dust, moisture, outlined in this section. smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed. • Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance. • High pressure halogen gas is sealed LDI3512 inside the halogen bulb. The bulb Type A (if so equipped) may break if the glass envelope is Replacing the halogen headlight scratched or the bulb is dropped. bulb (if so equipped) • Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart. CAUTION 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. • Aiming is not necessary after replac- 2. Remove the electrical connector. ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is recom- 3. Rotate the high beam bulb OA counter- mended that you visit a NISSAN clockwise and remove bulb. dealer for this service. 4. Rotate the low beam bulb OB counterclockwise and remove bulb. Reverse instructions to install bulbs.

8-24 Do-it-yourself WARNING Replacing the LED headlight bulb CAUTION (if so equipped) Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit • High pressure halogen gas is sealed or right after being turned off. Burning If LED headlight bulb replacement is re- inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may result. quired, it is recommended that you visit a may break if the glass envelope is NISSAN dealer for this service. scratched or the bulb is dropped. TURN SIGNAL BULB • When handling the bulb, do not touch CAUTION the glass envelope. To replace the turn signal bulb follow the • Do not touch glass surface of the bulb instructions listed in “Replacing the halo- • Use the same number and wattage with bare hands or allow oil or grease to gen headlight bulb” (P. 8-24). as originally installed as shown in the get on it to prevent damage to bulb. chart. • Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) • Do not leave the bulb out of the fog reflector for a long time because dust, For additional information on fog light bulb light for a long period of time as dust, moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the replacement, refer to the instructions out- moisture and smoke may enter the performance of the lamp. lined in this section. fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light. • Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or Replacing the fog light bulb in a car wash. A temperature difference If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is between the inside and the outside of recommended that you visit a NISSAN the lens causes the fog. This is not a dealer for this service. malfunction. If large drops of water col- lect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Do-it-yourself 8-25 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. information. Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped) Low 55 H11 High/Daytime running (Canada only) 65 H9 Turn/Park 27/7 3457NAK Side marker* — — Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)* Low — — High — — Daytime running lights — — Turn 27/7 3457NAK Park — — Side marker — — Headlight assembly (Type C) (if so equipped)* Low — — High — — Daytime running lights — — Turn/Park — — Side marker — — Front fog light (If so equipped) * — — Door mirror turn signal light (If so equipped)* — — Vanity mirror light (If so equipped)* 5 W5W Map lights* 8 W8W Room light* 8 W8W Trunk light* 3.4 158 High-mounted stop light* — — Rear combination light* Tail/Stop/Side marker 21/5 W21/5W Turn 21 WY21W Trunk lid lamp* Tail 5 W5W Back up 16 W16W License plate light* — — * It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

8-26 Do-it-yourself 2. Room light 3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped) 4. Headlight assembly 5. Fog light (if so equipped) 6. High-mount stop light 7. Trunk light 8. License plate light 9. Rear combination light

WDI0263 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover. LDI3528 1. Map light Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation

Do-it-yourself 8-27 WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” The TPMS will activate only when the (P. 6-3). vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 TIRE PRESSURE mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure (for example a flat tire while (TPMS) driving). WARNING For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning light” (P. 2-11), Radio waves could adversely af- “Tire Pressure Monitoring System fect electric medical equipment. (TPMS)” (P. 5-5), and “Flat tire” (P. 6-3). Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medi- LDI2135 Tire inflation pressure cal equipment manufacturer for Trunk light (if so equipped) Check the tire pressures (including the possible influences before use. the spare) often and always prior to This vehicle is equipped with the Tire long distance trips. The recom- Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). mended tire pressure specifications It monitors tire pressure of all tires are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. except the spare. When the low tire certification label or the Tire and pressure warning light is lit and Loading Information label under the warning is displayed in the odom- “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire eter, or the “Tire Pressure Low — Add and Loading Information label is af- Air” appears in the vehicle informa- fixed to the driver side center pillar. tion display, one or more of your tires Tire pressures should be checked is significantly under-inflated. regularly because:

8-28 Do-it-yourself • Most tires naturally lose air over WARNING • Before taking a long trip, or time. whenever you heavily load • Tires can lose air suddenly when • Improperly inflated tires can your vehicle, use a tire pressure driven over potholes or other ob- fail suddenly and cause an gauge to ensure that the tire jects or if the vehicle strikes a curb accident. pressures are at the specified while parking. • The Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- level. The tire pressures should be ing (GVWR) is located on the • For additional information re- checked when the tires are cold. The F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- garding tires, refer to “Impor- tires are considered COLD after the tion label. The vehicle weight tant Tire Safety Information” vehicle has been parked for 3 or capacity is indicated on the Tire (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- more hours, or driven less than 1 mile and Loading Information label. tion” (Canada) in the Warranty (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. Do not load your vehicle be- Information Booklet. yond this capacity. Overload- The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert ing your vehicle may result in provides visual and audible signals reduced tire life, unsafe operat- outside the vehicle for inflating tires ing conditions due to prema- to the recommended COLD tire ture tire failure, or unfavorable pressure. For additional information, handling characteristics and see “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert” could also lead to a serious ac- (P. 5-8). cident. Loading beyond the Incorrect tire pressure, including specified capacity may also re- under inflation, may adversely af- sult in failure of other vehicle fect tire life and vehicle handling. components.

Do-it-yourself 8-29 ᭺5 Spare tire size. ᭺6 Vehicle load limit: see “Vehicle loading information” (P. 10-16).

LDI2737 Tire and Loading Information COLD after the vehicle has been label parked for 3 or more hours, or ᭺1 Seating capacity: The maximum driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at number of occupants that can moderate speeds. The recom- be seated in the vehicle. mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide ᭺2 Original tire size: The size of the the best balance of tire wear, ve- tires originally installed on the vehicle handling, driveability, tire hicle at the factory. noise, etc., up to the vehicle's ᭺3 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires GVWR. to this pressure when the tires ᭺4 Tire size - see “Tire labeling” are cold. Tires are considered (P. 8-32). 8-30 Do-it-yourself 3. Remove the gauge. Grades: S, SV, SR 4. Read the tire pressure on the Size Cold Tire Infla- gauge stem and compare to the tion Pressure specification shown on the Tire Front Original and Loading Information label. Tire: 230 kPa, 33 PSI 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too 205/60R16 much air is added, press the core Front Original of the valve stem briefly with the Tire: 230 kPa, 33 PSI tip of the gauge stem to release 215/45R18 pressure. Recheck the pressure Front Original

LDI0393 and add or release air as needed. Tire: 230 kPa, 33 PSI Checking tire pressure 6. Install the valve stem cap. 215/50R17 Rear Original 1. Remove the valve stem cap from 7. Check the pressure of all other Tire: 230 kPa, 33 PSI the tire. tires, including the spare. 205/60R16 2. Press the pressure gauge Rear Original squarely onto the valve stem. Do Tire: 230 kPa, 33 PSI not press too hard or force the 215/45R18 valve stem sideways, or air will es- Rear Original cape. If the hissing sound of air Tire: 230 kPa, 33 PSI escaping from the tire is heard 215/50R17 while checking the pressure, re- Spare Tire: position the gauge to eliminate 420 kPa, 60 PSI T125/70D16 this leakage. Do-it-yourself 8-31 WDI0394 WDI0395 Example Example TIRE LABELING O1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This num- Federal law requires tire manufac- 95H) ber, known as the aspect ratio, turers to place standardized infor- 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- gives the tire's ratio of height to mation on the sidewall of all tires. signed for passenger vehicles (not width. This information identifies and de- all tires have this information). 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. scribes the fundamental character- 2. Three-digit number (215): This istics of the tire and also provides the 5. Two-digit number (15): This num- number gives the width in milli- Tire Identification Number (TIN) for ber is the wheel or rim diameter in meters of the tire from sidewall safety standard certification. The TIN inches. edge to sidewall edge. can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

8-32 Do-it-yourself 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

LDI2786 Example O2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code XXX XXXX) (Optional). 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart- 5. Four numbers represent the ment Of Transportation”. The week and year the tire was built. symbol can be placed above, be- For example, the numbers 3103 low or to the left or right of the Tire means the 31st week of 2003. If Identification Number. these numbers are missing then 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's look on the other sidewall of the identification mark. tire.

Do-it-yourself 8-33 O3 Tire ply composition and material O6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” lar side that must always face out- The number of layers or plies of Indicates whether the tire requires ward when mounted on a vehicle. rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire an inner tube (“tube type”) or not TYPES OF TIRES manufacturers also must indicate (“tubeless”). the materials in the tire, which in- WARNING O7 The word “radial” clude steel, nylon, polyester and • When changing or replacing tires, be others. The word “radial” is shown if the tire sure all four tires are of the same type has radial structure. (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) O4 Maximum permissible inflation and construction. A NISSAN dealer pressure O8 Manufacturer or brand name may be able to help you with infor- Manufacturer or brand name is mation about tire type, size, speed This number is the greatest amount rating and availability. shown. of air pressure that should be put in • Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory the tire. Do not exceed the maximum Other Tire-related Terminology permissible inflation pressure. equipped tires, and may not match In addition to the many terms that the potential maximum vehicle O5 Maximum load rating are defined throughout this section, speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. This number indicates the maxi- Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the • Replacing tires with those not origi- mum load in kilograms and pounds sidewall that contains a whitewall, nally specified by NISSAN could af- that can be carried by the tire. When bears white lettering or bears fect the proper operation of the low replacing the tires on the vehicle, al- manufacturer, brand, and/or model tire pressure warning system. ways use a tire that has the same name molding that is higher or load rating as the factory installed deeper than the same molding on tire. the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

8-34 Do-it-yourself • Always use tires of the same type, Summer tires states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial size, brand, construction and tread NISSAN specifies summer tires on some laws before installing studded tires. Skid pattern on all four wheels. Failure to models to provide superior performance and traction capabilities of studded snow do so may result in a circumference on dry roads. Summer tire performance is tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer difference between tires on the front substantially reduced in snow and ice. than that of non-studded snow tires. and rear axles which can cause the Summer tires do not have the tire traction Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. TIRE CHAINS tem to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac- wear and may damage the transmis- or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the cording to location. Check the local laws sion and differential gears. use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all before installing tire chains. When installing four wheels. • For additional information regarding tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Snow tires Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- installed according to the chain manufac- formation” (Canada) in the Warranty If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to turer's suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” Information Booklet. select tires equivalent in size and load rat- chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve- ing to the original equipment tires. If you do hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear- All season tires not, it can adversely affect the safety and ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains handling of your vehicle. are designed to meet the minimum clear- NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some ances between the tire and the closest ve- models to provide good performance all Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- hicle suspension or body component re- year, including snowy and icy road condi- ings than factory equipped tires and may quired to accommodate the use of a tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL not match the potential maximum vehicle winter traction device (tire chains or SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. speed. Never exceed the maximum speed cables). The minimum clearances are de- Snow tires have better snow traction than rating of the tire. termined using the factory equipped tires. All Season tires and may be more appropri- If you install snow tires, they must be the Other types may damage your vehicle. Use ate in some areas. same size, brand, construction and tread chain tensioners when recommended by pattern on all four wheels. the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain For additional traction on icy roads, stud- must be secured or removed to prevent ded tires may be used. However, some U.S. the possibility of whipping action damage Do-it-yourself 8-35 to the fenders or underbody. If possible, Wheel nut tightening torque: avoid fully loading your vehicle when using 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be The wheel nuts must be kept tight- damaged and/or vehicle handling and ened to specifications at all times. performance may be adversely affected. It is recommended that wheel nuts Tire chains must be installed only on the be tightened to specification at front wheels and not on the rear wheels. each tire rotation interval. Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. WARNING Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the • After rotating the tires, check vehicle due to some overstress. WDI0258 and adjust the tire pressure. CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES • Retighten the wheel nuts when Tire rotation the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in NISSAN recommends rotating the cases of a flat tire, etc.). tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). • Do not include the spare tire in For additional information on tire re- the tire rotation. placing procedures, see “Flat tire” • For additional information re- (P. 6-3). garding tires, refer to “Impor- As soon as possible, tighten the tant Tire Safety Information” wheel nuts to the specified torque (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- with a torque wrench. tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

8-36 Do-it-yourself WARNING • Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious per- • Tires should be periodically in- sonal injury. If it is necessary to spected for wear, cracking, repair the spare tire, it is rec- bulging or objects caught in ommended that you visit a the tread. If excessive wear, NISSAN dealer for this service. cracks, bulging or deep cuts • For additional information re- are found, the tire(s) should be garding tires, refer to “Impor- replaced. tant Tire Safety Information” • The original tires have built-in (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- tread wear indicators. When tion” (Canada) in the Warranty WDI0259 the wear indicators are visible, Information Booklet. Tire wear and damage the tire(s) should be replaced. 1. Wear indicator • Tires degrade with age and Replacing wheels and tires use. Have tires, including the When replacing a tire, use the same size, 2. Location mark tread design, speed rating and load carry- spare, over 6 years old checked ing capacity as originally equipped. Rec- by a qualified technician be- ommended types and sizes are shown in cause some tire damage may “Wheels and tires” (P. 10-9). not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

Do-it-yourself 8-37 WARNING • If the wheels are changed for any • When replacing the TPMS sensor, the reason, always replace with wheels ID registration may be required. Con- • The use of tires other than those rec- which have the same off-set dimen- tact a NISSAN dealer for ID ommended or the mixed use of tires sion. Wheels of a different off-set registration. of different brands, construction could cause premature tire wear, de- • Do not use a valve stem cap that is (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread grade vehicle handling characteris- not specified by NISSAN. The valve patterns can adversely affect the tics, affect the VDC system and/or in- stem cap may become stuck. ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dy- terference with the brake discs. Such • Be sure that the valve stem caps are namic Control (VDC) system, ground interference can lead to decreased clearance, body-to-tire clearance, correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve braking efficiency and/or early brake may be clogged up with dirt and tire chain clearance, speedometer pad/shoe wear. For additional infor- calibration, headlight aim and bum- cause a malfunction or loss of mation on wheel-off set dimensions, pressure. per height. Some of these effects see “Wheels and tires” (P. 10-9). may lead to accidents and could re- • Do not install a damaged or de- • When using a wheel without the sult in serious personal injury. formed wheel or tire even if it has TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS been repaired. Such wheels or tires • If your vehicle was originally will not function and the low tire equipped with four tires that were could have structural damage and pressure warning light will flash for could fail without warning. the same size and you are only re- approximately 1 minute. The light will placing two of the four tires, install remain on after 1 minute. Have your • The use of retread tires is not the new tires on the rear axle. Placing tires replaced and/or TPMS system recommended. new tires on the front axle may cause reset as soon as possible. It is recom- • For additional information regarding loss of vehicle control in some driving mended that you visit a NISSAN tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety conditions and cause an accident dealer for this service. Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- and personal injury. • Replacing tires with those not origi- formation” (Canada) in the Warranty nally specified by NISSAN could af- Information Booklet. fect the proper operation of the TPMS. • The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor. 8-38 Do-it-yourself Wheel balance Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY • When driving on roads covered with Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle spare tire) snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE handling and tire life. Even with regular use, When using a wheel without the TPMS such ONLY spare tire should be used on the wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function. rear wheels and the original tire used they should be balanced as required. on the front wheels (drive wheels). Observe the following precautions if the • Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE Wheel balance service should be per- TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be formed with the wheels off the vehicle. ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be rate than the standard tire. Replace Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle damaged or involved in an accident: could lead to mechanical damage. the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. • For additional information regarding WARNING tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- • Do not use the spare tire on other formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- • The spare tire should be used for vehicles. tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- emergency use only. It should be re- • Do not use more than one spare tire tion Booklet. placed with the standard tire at the at the same time. first opportunity to avoid possible • Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- Care of wheels tire or differential damage. RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. • Wash the wheels when washing the ve- • Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY hicle to maintain their appearance. USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while • Clean the inner side of the wheels when driving. the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. • Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure • Do not use abrasive cleaners when of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare washing the wheels. tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi). • Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or • With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare corrosion. Such damage may cause loss tire installed do not drive the vehicle of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 • NISSAN recommends waxing the road km/h). wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. Do-it-yourself 8-39 CAUTION • Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle. • Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

8-40 Do-it-yourself 9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements ...... 9-2 Emission Control System Maintenance: ...... 9-6 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Chassis and Body Maintenance: ...... 9-6 Scheduled maintenance ...... 9-2 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7 Where to go for service ...... 9-2 Additional maintenance items for General maintenance ...... 9-2 severe operating conditions ...... 9-7 Explanation of general maintenance Oil control system ...... 9-7 items ...... 9-2 2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model) ...... 9-8 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of nance is essential to maintain your vehi- the vehicle, general maintenance should The maintenance items listed in this sec- cle’s good mechanical condition, as well as be performed regularly as prescribed in tion are required to be serviced at regular its emissions and engine performance. this section. If you detect any unusual intervals. However under severe driving sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to It is the owner's responsibility to make sure conditions, additional or more frequent check for the cause or have it checked that the scheduled maintenance, as well as maintenance will be required. general maintenance, is performed. promptly. In addition, it is recommended WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think As the vehicle owner, you are the only one that repairs are required. who can ensure that your vehicle receives If maintenance service is required or your proper maintenance. You are a vital link in vehicle appears to malfunction, have the When performing any checks or mainte- the maintenance chain. systems checked and serviced. It is recom- nance work, closely observe the “Mainte- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself” GENERAL MAINTENANCE this service. section of this manual. General maintenance includes those items NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- EXPLANATION OF GENERAL which should be checked during normal cialists and are kept up-to-date with the MAINTENANCE ITEMS day-to-day operation. They are essential latest service information through techni- for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro- WARNING sponsibility to perform these procedures grams. They are fully qualified to work on regularly as prescribed. NISSAN vehicles before work begins. Failure to follow the procedures listed Performing general maintenance checks If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is within this section may result in per- requires minimal mechanical skill and only recommended that you ask your NISSAN sonal injury. a few general automotive tools. dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Additional information on the following These checks or inspections can be done Collision Center is located, or go to items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it- by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you http://collision.nissanusa.com. yourself” section of this manual. prefer, a NISSAN dealer. You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules Outside the vehicle missing, and check for any loose wheel Windshield: Clean the windshield on a nuts. Tighten if necessary. regular basis. Check the windshield at least The maintenance items listed here should every six months for cracks or other dam- be performed from time to time, unless Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specified age. Have a damaged windshield repaired otherwise specified. interval shown in the maintenance schedule. by a qualified repair facility. It is recom- Doors and engine hood: Check that the mended that you have a damaged wind- doors and engine hood operate properly. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a Also ensure that all latches lock securely. often and always prior to long distance NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all a collision center in your area, refer to and links if necessary. Make sure that the tires, including the spare, to the pressure http://collision.nissanusa.com. secondary latch keeps the hood from specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts Windshield wiper blades*: Check for opening when the primary latch is or excessive wear. cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. released. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) When driving in areas using road salt or tire pressure sensor: It is recommended Inside the vehicle other corrosive materials, check lubrica- that you replace the tire pressure sensor The maintenance items listed here should tion frequently. assembly when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. be checked on a regular basis, such as Check that the gas stays or struts properly when performing scheduled maintenance, and securely hold the hood, trunk, or rear Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve- cleaning the vehicle, etc. hatch fully open. If the hood, trunk, or rear hicle should pull to either side while driving Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for hatch is not held open, have the gas stays on a straight and level road, or if you detect smooth operation and make sure the or struts replaced. uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer- pedal does not catch or require uneven Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high- effort. Keep the floor mat away from the basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop way speeds, wheel balancing may be pedal. lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other needed. Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth lights are all operating properly and in- operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes stalled securely. Also check headlight aim. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” down further than normal, the pedal feels Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are the Warranty Information Booklet. to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a

Maintenance and schedules 9-3 NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, NOTE: floor mat away from the pedal. wear or damage. Care should be taken to avoid situations Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull Steering wheel: Check for changes in the that can lead to potential battery dis- the vehicle to one side when applied. steering system, such as excessive free charge and potential no-start conditions Continuously Variable Transmission play, hard steering or strange noises. such as: (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism (if so Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all 1. Installation or extended use of elec- equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that warning lights and chimes are operating tronic accessories that consume bat- the vehicle is held securely with the shift properly. tery power when the engine is not lever in the P (Park) position without apply- Windshield defroster: Check that the air running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD ing any brakes. comes out of the defroster outlets properly players, etc.). Parking brake: Check the parking brake and in sufficient quantity when operating 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or operation regularly. The vehicle should be the heater or air conditioner. only driven short distances. securely held on a fairly steep hill with only Windshield wiper and washer*: Check In these cases, the battery may need to the parking brake applied. If the parking that the wipers and washer operate prop- be charged to maintain battery health. brake needs adjustment, it is recom- erly and that the wipers do not streak. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid this service. level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch Under the hood and vehicle fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX Seats: Check seat position controls such The maintenance items listed here should lines on the reservoir. as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to be checked periodically (for example, each ensure they operate smoothly and all Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant time you check the engine oil or refuel). latches lock securely in every position. level when the engine is cold. Check that the head restraints/headrests Battery*: This vehicle is equipped with a Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt move up and down smoothly and the locks sealed maintenance free battery. It is rec- is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer Engine oil level*: Check the level after positions. for service. parking the vehicle on a level surface with Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. 9-4 Maintenance and schedules EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no areas where mud and dirt may have accu- The following descriptions are provided to loose supports, cracks or holes. If the mulated. For additional information, see give you a better understanding of the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or “Cleaning exterior” (P. 7-2). scheduled maintenance items that should there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi- Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that be regularly checked or replaced. The ately have the exhaust system inspected. It there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. maintenance schedule indicates at which is recommended that you visit a NISSAN mileage/time intervals each item requires dealer for this service. For additional infor- service. mation, see “Exhaust gas (carbon monox- In addition to scheduled maintenance, ide)” (P. 5-4). your vehicle requires that some items be Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for checked during normal day-to-day opera- fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the tion. For additional information, see “Gen- vehicle has been parked for a while. Water eral maintenance” (P. 9-2). dripping from the air conditioner after use Items marked with “*” are recommended is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the the warranties which come with your radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in- leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. tervals are required. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- mation, rot or loose connections. When applicable, additional information can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section Underbody: The underbody is frequently of this manual. exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those Maintenance and schedules 9-5 NOTE: additional information on the proper mix- CHASSIS AND BODY ture for your area, see “Engine cooling sys- MAINTENANCE: NISSAN does not advocate the se of non- tem” (P. 8-4). OEM approved aftermarket flushing sys- Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for tems and strongly advises against per- NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant proper installation. Check for chafing, forming these services on NISSAN or the use of non-distilled water may re- cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. products. Many of the aftermarket flush- duce the recommended service interval Replace any deteriorated or damaged ing systems use non-OEM approved of the coolant. parts immediately. chemicals or solvents, the use of which Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil has not been validated by NISSAN. Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings: and oil filter at the specified intervals. For Check for wear, deterioration and fluid For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, recommended oil grade and viscosity see grease, and refrigerant, see “Recom- leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam- “Recommended fluids/lubricants and ca- aged parts immediately. mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- pacities” (P. 10-2). ties” (P. 10-2) Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex- Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM valve noise increases. Adjust valve clear- cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten MAINTENANCE: ance if necessary. connections or replace parts as necessary. Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for Evaporative emissions control vapor In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified wear, fraying or cracking and for proper lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose- intervals. When driving for prolonged peri- tension. Replace any damaged drive belt. ness. Tighten connections or replace parts ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter as necessary. Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter- more frequently. vals. When driving for prolonged periods in Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not re- Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus- dusty conditions, check/replace the filter quired. (in-tank type filter) pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check more frequently. Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the and connections for leaks, looseness, or or grease. Under severe driving conditions, specified interval. When adding or replac- deterioration. Tighten connections or re- inspect more frequently. ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine place parts as necessary. Tire rotation: Rotate tires at the specified NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. interval shown in the maintenance sched- or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For Install new plugs of the type as originally ule. When rotating tires, check for damage equipped. and uneven wear. Replace if necessary. 9-6 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- • Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles signs of leakage at specified intervals. If cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- (16 km) with outside temperatures re- using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough nance schedules that may be used, de- maining below freezing. or muddy roads: pending upon the conditions in which you • Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go • Replace the manual transaxle gear oil ev- usually drive. These schedules contain “rush hour” traffic. ery 20,000 miles or 24 months. both distance and time intervals, up to • Extensive idling and/or low speed driving • Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For for long distances, such as police, taxi or (96,000 km) or request the dealer to in- most people, the odometer reading will indoor-to-door delivery use. spect the fluid deterioration data using a dicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be • Driving in dusty conditions. CONSULT. If the deterioration data is • Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid. serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. roads. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 • Using a car-top carrier. months, continue maintenance at the If your vehicle is mainly operated under the same mileage/time intervals. severe conditions, follow the severe maintenance intervals shown in the mainte- ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS nance schedule. FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Addi- tional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions: • Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).

Maintenance and schedules 9-7 OIL CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with oil control system. It calculates engine oil and filter change intervals based on driving conditions. Driving in the following severe conditions will shorten the engine oil and filter change interval. How driving conditions affect OCS display timing

Conditions Driving Scene Display timing • Freeway driving • City driving (flat/moderate hills) Light Normal • No towing or heavy loads • No extended engine idling • Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). • Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. • Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. Extreme • Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to- Early door delivery use. • Using a car-top carrier. • Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas. • Sustained high speed driving.

CAUTION • Operating your vehicle with deterio- • If your oil replacement indicator re- rated oil can damage the engine. sets prematurely or becomes inop- • If the oil replacement indicator is dis- erative, please change the oil within played, change the engine oil within six months or 5,000 miles (8,000 km) two weeks or less than 500 miles from your last oil change. (800 km).

9-8 Maintenance and schedules 2.0L 4 CYLINDER (MR20DD engine 5,000 miles/(8,000 km)/6 months 10,000 miles/(16,000 km)/ model) Perform at number of miles, kilometers or 12 months The following shows the maintenance months, whichever comes first. Perform at number of miles, kilometers or schedule. Standard maintenance: months, whichever comes first. Choose the maintenance schedule Inspections: Standard maintenance: needed based on your vehicle driving • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ Inspections: conditions. hood lift supports • Brake lines & cables After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Brake pads & rotors months, continue maintenance at the power steering, coolant) same mileage/time interval. • CVT fluid • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Front drive shaft boots • Engine air filter • Manual transmission gear oil • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ frame, tie rods) hood lift supports • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth power steering, coolant) Essentials: • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Tire rotation • Engine air filter Severe maintenance: • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) Inspections: • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Brake pads & rotors • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Exhaust system Essentials: • Steering gear & linkage • Replace engine oil & filter (1) • Axle & suspension parts • Tire rotation • Front drive shaft boots

Maintenance and schedules 9-9 Severe maintenance: 15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ Severe maintenance: Inspections: 18 months Inspections: • Brake pads & rotors Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Brake pads & rotors • Front drive shaft boots months, whichever comes first. • Exhaust system • Exhaust system Standard maintenance: • Steering gear & linkage • Steering gear & linkage Inspection: • Axle & suspension parts • Axle & suspension parts • Intelligent key battery • Front drive shaft boots Essentials: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Replace brake fluid hood lift supports (1) If the oil replacement indicator is dis- • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, played, change the engine oil and filter power steering, coolant) within two weeks or less than 500 miles • Engine drive belts and hose inspections (800 km). • Engine air filter • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth Essentials: • Replace in-cabin microfilter • Tire rotation

9-10 Maintenance and schedules 20,000 miles/(32,000 km)/ Essentials: 25,000 miles/(40,000 km)/ 24 months • Replace brake fluid 30 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace engine oil & filter (1) Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. • Tire rotation months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: Severe maintenance: Standard maintenance: Inspections: Inspections: Inspections: • Brake lines & cables • Brake pads & rotors • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Brake pads & rotors • Exhaust system hood lift supports • CVT fluid • Front drive shaft boots • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Fuel tank vapor vent system* • Steering gear & linkage power steering, coolant) • Fuel lines/connections* • Axle & suspension parts • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Engine air filter • Exhaust system Essentials: • Steering gear and linkage • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Replace manual transmission gear oil frame, tie rods) • Axle & suspension parts • Replace brake fluid • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Front drive shaft boots (1) If the oil replacement indicator is dis- • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Manual transmission gear oil played, change the engine oil and filter • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ within two weeks or less than 500 miles Essentials: hood lift supports (800 km). • Tire rotation • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” Severe maintenance: power steering, coolant) are recommended by NISSAN for reliable Inspections: • Engine drive belts and hose inspections vehicle operation. The owner need not per- • Brake pads & rotors • Engine air filter form such maintenance in order to main- • Exhaust system • Suspension components (shocks, sub- tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Steering gear & linkage frame, tie rods) turer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. • Axle & suspension parts • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Front drive shaft boots • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth Maintenance and schedules 9-11 30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/ Essentials: 35,000 miles/(56,000 km)/ 36 months • Replace engine air filter (1) 42 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace engine oil & filter (2) Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. • Replace in-cabin microfilter months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: • Replace intelligent key battery Standard maintenance: • Tire rotation Inspections: Inspections: • Brake lines & cables Severe maintenance: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Brake pads & rotors Inspections: hood lift supports • CVT fluid • Brake pads & rotors • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Front drive shaft boots • Front drive shaft boots power steering, coolant) • Manual transmission gear oil • Exhaust system • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter hood lift supports • Axle & suspension parts • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, Essentials: power steering, coolant) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Replace brake fluid • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Engine air filter (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, Essentials: more frequent maintenance may be • Suspension components (shocks, sub- required. • Tire rotation frame, tie rods) Severe maintenance: • Battery terminals and cables, battery test (2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter Inspections: • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth within two weeks or less than 500 miles • Brake pads & rotors (800 km). • Exhaust system • Steering gear & linkage • Axle & suspension parts • Front drive shaft boots

9-12 Maintenance and schedules 40,000 miles/(64,000 km)/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth 45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/ 48 months Essentials: 54 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. • Replace engine oil & filter (1) months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: • Tire rotation Standard maintenance: Inspections: Severe maintenance: Inspections: • Brake lines & cables Inspections: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Brake pads & rotors • Brake pads & rotors hood lift supports • CVT fluid • Exhaust system • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belts* • Front drive shaft boots • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Fuel tank vapor vent system* • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Fuel lines/connections* • Axle & suspension parts • Exhaust system • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Essentials: frame, tie rods) • Steering gear and linkage • Replace manual transmission gear oil • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Axle & suspension part • Replace brake fluid • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Front drive shaft boots (1) If the oil replacement indicator is dis- • Manual transmission gear oil Essentials: played, change the engine oil and filter • Replace in-cabin microfilter • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ within two weeks or less than 500 miles hood lift supports (800 km). • Replace intelligent key battery • Tire rotation • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” power steering, coolant) are recommended by NISSAN for reliable • Hose Inspection vehicle operation. The owner need not per- • Engine air filter form such maintenance in order to main- • Suspension components (shocks, sub- tain the emission warranty or manufac- frame, tie rods) turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Battery terminals and cables, battery test items and intervals are required. Maintenance and schedules 9-13 Severe maintenance: 50,000 miles/(80,000 km)/ Severe maintenance: Inspections: 60 months Inspections: • Brake pads & rotors Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Brake pads & rotors • Exhaust system months, whichever comes first. • Front drive shaft boots • Steering gear & linkage Standard maintenance: • Exhaust system • Axle & suspension parts Inspections: • Steering gear & linkage • Front drive shaft boots • Brake lines & cables • Axle & suspension parts • Brake pads & rotors Essentials: • CVT fluid • Replace brake fluid • Engine drive belts* (1) If the oil replacement indicator is dis- • Front drive shaft boots played, change the engine oil and filter • Manual transmission gear oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km). • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, are recommended by NISSAN for reliable power steering, coolant) vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to main- • Hose inspections tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Engine air filter turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Suspension components (shocks, sub- items and intervals are required. frame, tie rods) • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth Essentials: • Replace engine oil & filter (1) • Tire rotation

9-14 Maintenance and schedules 55,000 miles/(88,000 km)/ 60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/ • Battery terminals and cables, battery test 66 months 72 months • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Essentials: months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. • Replace engine air filter (1) Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: • Replace brake fluid Inspections: Inspections: • Replace engine oil & filter (2) • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Brake lines & cables • Replace in-cabin microfilter hood lift supports • Brake pads & rotors • Replace Intelligent key battery • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • CVT fluid • Tire rotation power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belts* Severe maintenance: • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Fuel tank vapor vent system* Inspections: • Engine air filter • Fuel lines/connections* • Brake pads & rotors • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Exhaust system frame, tie rods) • Exhaust system • Steering gear and linkage • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Front drive shaft boots • Axle & suspension part • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Steering gear & linkage • Front drive shaft boots • Axle & suspension parts Essentials: • Manual transmission gear oil • Tire rotation Essentials: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Replace CVT fluid Severe maintenance: hood lift supports • Replace manual transmission gear oil Inspections: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Replace brake fluid • Brake pads & rotors • Hose inspection (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, • Exhaust system • Engine air filter more frequent maintenance may be • Steering gear & linkage required. • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Axle & suspension parts frame, tie rods) • Front drive shaft boots

Maintenance and schedules 9-15 (2) If the oil replacement indicator is dis- 65,000 miles/(104,000 km)/ 70,000 miles/(112,000 km)/ played, change the engine oil and filter 78 months 84 months within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km). Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: vehicle operation. The owner need not per- Inspections: Inspections: form such maintenance in order to main- • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Brake lines & cables tain the emission warranty or manufac- hood lift supports turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Brake pads & rotors items and intervals are required. • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • CVT fluid power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belts* • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Front drive shaft boots • Engine air filter • Manual transmission gear oil • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ frame, tie rods) hood lift supports • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth power steering, coolant) Essentials: • Hose inspections • Tire rotation • Engine air filter Severe maintenance: • Suspension components (shocks, sub- frame, tie rods) Inspections: • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Brake pads & rotors • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Exhaust system Essentials: • Steering gear & linkage • Replace engine oil & filter (1) • Axle & suspension parts • Tire rotation • Front drive shaft boots

9-16 Maintenance and schedules Severe maintenance: 75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/ Severe maintenance: Inspections: 90 months Inspections: • Brake pads & rotors Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Brake pads & rotors • Front drive shaft boots months, whichever comes first. • Exhaust system • Exhaust system Standard maintenance: • Steering gear & linkage • Steering gear & linkage Inspections: • Axle & suspension parts • Axle & suspension parts • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Front drive shaft boots Essentials: hood lift supports • Replace brake fluid • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) (1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter • Engine drive belts and hose inspections within two weeks or less than 500 miles • Engine air filter (800 km). • Suspension components (shocks, sub- * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” frame, tie rods) are recommended by NISSAN for reliable • Battery terminals and cables, battery test vehicle operation. The owner need not per- • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth form such maintenance in order to main- Essentials: tain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance • Replace in-cabin microfilter items and intervals are required. • Replace intelligent key battery • Tire rotation

Maintenance and schedules 9-17 80,000 miles/(128,000 km)/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth 85,000 miles/(136,000 km)/ 96 months Essentials: 102 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. • Replace engine oil & filter (1) months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: • Tire rotation Standard maintenance: Inspections: Severe maintenance: Inspections: • Brake lines & cables Inspections: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Brake pads & rotors • Brake pads & rotors hood lift supports • CVT fluid • Exhaust system • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belts* • Front drive shaft boots • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Fuel tank vapor vent system* • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Fuel lines/connections* • Axle & suspension parts • Exhaust system • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Essentials: frame, tie rods) • Steering gear and linkage • Replace manual transmission gear oil • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Axle & suspension part • Replace brake fluid • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Front drive shaft boots (1) If the oil replacement indicator is dis- • Manual transmission gear oil Essentials: played, change the engine oil and filter • Tire rotation • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ within two weeks or less than 500 miles hood lift supports (800 km). Severe maintenance: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” Inspections: power steering, coolant) are recommended by NISSAN for reliable • Brake pads & rotors • Hose inspections vehicle operation. The owner need not per- • Exhaust system • Engine air filter form such maintenance in order to main- • Steering gear & linkage • Suspension components (shocks, sub- tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Axle & suspension parts frame, tie rods) turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Front drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test items and intervals are required. 9-18 Maintenance and schedules 90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ • Replace intelligent key battery 95,000 miles/(152,000 km)/ 108 months • Tire rotation 114 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Severe maintenance: Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. Inspections: Standard maintenance: • Brake pads & rotors Standard maintenance: Inspections: • Front drive shaft boots Inspections: • Brake lines & cables • Exhaust system • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Brake pads & rotors • Steering gear & linkage hood lift supports • CVT fluid • Axle & suspension parts • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belts* Essentials: • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Front drive shaft boots • Replace brake fluid • Engine air filter • Manual transmission gear oil (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Suspension components (shocks, sub- more frequent maintenance may be frame, tie rods) hood lift supports required. • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • Battery terminals and cables, battery test (2) If the oil replacement indicator is dis- • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth power steering, coolant) played, change the engine oil and filter • Hose inspections within two weeks or less than 500 miles Essentials: • Engine air filter (800 km). • Tire rotation • Suspension components (shocks, sub- * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” Severe maintenance: frame, tie rods) are recommended by NISSAN for reliable Inspections: • Battery terminals and cables, battery test vehicle operation. The owner need not per- • Brake pads & rotors • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth form such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufac- • Exhaust system Essentials: turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Steering gear & linkage • Replace engine air filter (1) items and intervals are required. • Axle & suspension parts • Replace engine oil & filter (2) • Front drive shaft boots • Replace in-cabin microfilter Maintenance and schedules 9-19 100,000 miles/(160,000 km)/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth 105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/ 120 months Essentials: 126 months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace brake fluid Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. • Replace engine oil & filter (1) months, whichever comes first. Standard maintenance: • Tire rotation Standard maintenance: Inspections: Severe maintenance: Inspections: • Brake lines & cables Inspections: • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Brake pads & rotors • Brake pads & rotors hood lift supports • CVT fluid • Exhaust system • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belts* • Front drive shaft boots • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Fuel tank vapor vent system* • Steering gear & linkage • Engine air filter • Fuel lines/connections* • Axle & suspension parts • Exhaust system • Suspension components (shocks, sub- Essentials: frame, tie rods) • Steering gear and linkage • Replace manual transmission gear oil • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Axle & suspension part • Replace brake fluid • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Front drive shaft boots (1) If the oil replacement indicator is dis- • Manual transmission gear oil Essentials: played, change the engine oil and filter • Replace in-cabin microfilter • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ within two weeks or less than 500 miles hood lift supports (800 km). • Replace intelligent key battery • Tire rotation • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” power steering, coolant) are recommended by NISSAN for reliable • Replace spark plugs (1) (2) • Hose inspections vehicle operation. The owner need not per- • Replace engine coolant * (3) • Engine air filter form such maintenance in order to main- • Suspension components (shocks, sub- tain the emission warranty or manufac- frame, tie rods) turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Battery terminals and cables, battery test items and intervals are required. 9-20 Maintenance and schedules Severe maintenance: 110,000 miles/(176,000 km)/ Severe maintenance: Inspections: 132 months Inspections: • Brake pads & rotors Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Brake pads & rotors • Exhaust system months, whichever comes first. • Front drive shaft boots • Steering gear & linkage Standard maintenance: • Exhaust system • Axle & suspension parts Inspections: • Steering gear & linkage • Front drive shaft boots • Brake lines & cables • Axle & suspension parts (1) Performed based on the number of • Brake pads & rotors Essentials: miles only • CVT fluid • Replace brake fluid (2) Replace spark plug when the plug gap • Engine drive belts* (1) If the oil replacement indicator is dis- exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within • Front drive shaft boots played, change the engine oil and filter specified periodic replacement mileage. • Manual transmission gear oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km). (3) First replacement interval is 105,000 • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first hood lift supports * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” replacement, replace every 75,000 miles • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, are recommended by NISSAN for reliable (120,000 km) or 60 months. power steering, coolant) vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to main- * Maintenance items and intervals with“*” • Hose inspections are recommended by NISSAN for reliable tain the emission warranty or manufac- • Engine air filter vehicle operation. The owner need not per- turer recall liability. Other maintenance form such maintenance in order to main- • Suspension components (shocks, sub- items and intervals are required. tain the emission warranty or manufac- frame, tie rods) turer recall liability. Other maintenance • Battery terminals and cables, battery test items and intervals are required. • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth Essentials: • Replace engine oil & filter (1) • Tire rotation

Maintenance and schedules 9-21 115,000 miles/(184,000 km)/ 120,000 miles/(192,000 km)/ • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth 138 months 144 months Essentials: Perform at number of miles, kilometers or Perform at number of miles, kilometers or • Replace engine air filter (1) months, whichever comes first. months, whichever comes first. • Replace brake fluid Standard maintenance: Standard maintenance: • Replace engine oil & filter (2) Inspections: Inspections: • Replace in-cabin microfilter • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Brake lines & cables • Replace intelligent key battery hood lift supports • Brake pads & rotors • Tire rotation • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, • CVT fluid Severe maintenance: power steering, coolant) • Engine drive belts* Inspections: • Engine drive belts and hose inspections • Fuel tank vapor vent system* • Brake pads & rotors • Engine air filter • Fuel lines/connections* • Exhaust system • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Exhaust system frame, tie rods) • Front drive shaft boots • Steering gear and linkage • Battery terminals and cables, battery test • Steering gear & linkage • Axle & suspension part • Tire pressure, treadwear and depth • Axle & suspension parts • Front drive shaft boots Essentials: Essentials: • Manual transmission gear oil • Tire rotation • Replace CVT fluid • Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ • Replace manual transmission gear oil Severe maintenance: hood lift supports • Replace brake fluid Inspections: • All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant) (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, • Brake pads & rotors • Hose inspections more frequent maintenance may be • Exhaust system required. • Engine air filter • Steering gear & linkage • Suspension components (shocks, sub- • Axle & suspension parts frame, tie rods) • Front drive shaft boots • Battery terminals and cables, battery test 9-22 Maintenance and schedules (2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km). * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-23 MEMO

9-24 Maintenance and schedules 10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and Emission control information label ...... 10-13 capacities ...... 10-2 Tire and Loading Information label ...... 10-14 Fuel recommendation ...... 10-4 Air conditioner specification label ...... 10-14 Engine oil and oil filter Installing front license plate ...... 10-15 recommendations ...... 10-7 Vehicle loading information ...... 10-16 Air conditioner system refrigerant and Terms ...... 10-16 oil recommendations ...... 10-8 Vehicle load capacity ...... 10-17 Specifications ...... 10-9 Loading tips ...... 10-19 Engine ...... 10-9 Measurement of weights ...... 10-20 Wheels and tires ...... 10-9 Towing a trailer ...... 10-20 Dimensions and weights ...... 10-10 Flat towing ...... 10-20 When traveling or registering in another Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-21 country ...... 10-12 Emission control system warranty ...... 10-22 Vehicle identification ...... 10-12 Reporting safety defects ...... 10-22 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) plate ...... 10-12 test ...... 10-24 Vehicle identification number (chassis Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...... 10-24 number) ...... 10-12 Engine serial number ...... 10-13 Owner's Manual/Service Manual order F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-13 information ...... 10-25 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (approximate) Fluid type Metric US Imperial Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Measure Measure Measure • For additional information, see “Fuel recommenda- Fuel 47 L 12-3/8 gal 10 3/8 gal tion” (P. 10-4). • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) With oil filter is recommended. 4.1 L 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt Engine oil*1 change • If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, Drain and refill a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) *1 For additional informa- may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor tion, see “Engine oil” oil (or engine oil) other than as recommended is not Without oil (P. 8-6 ). 3.8 L 4 qt 3-3/8 qt covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited War- filter change ranty. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” (P. 10-7). With manual 6.9 L 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal transmission Engine coolant • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ with reservoir With continu- Coolant (blue) or equivalent. ously variable 7.1 L 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal transmission • Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type 75W-80, or equivalent. • If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Manual transmission fluid — —— TL/JR Type is not available, API GL-4+, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type as soon as it is available.

10-2 Technical and consumer information Capacity (approximate) Fluid type Metric US Imperial Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Measure Measure Measure • Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ———equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may fluid damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid — — — • Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base) • HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) Air conditioning system refrigerant — —— • For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8). • Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent Air conditioning system oil — —— • For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8). USA 2.5 L 5/8 gal 1/2 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Windshield-washer fluid Canada 4.2 L 1-1/8 gal 7/8 gal Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3 FUEL RECOMMENDATION • Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your Gasoline specifications Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed NISSAN recommends using gasoline that tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) Index) number (Research octane number or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifi- specifications where it is available. Many of 91). cally designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel the automobile manufacturers developed can adversely affect the emission this specification to improve emission con- CAUTION control devices and systems of the trol system and vehicle performance. Ask vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel your service station manager if the gaso- • Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door is not covered by the NISSAN New Ve- line meets the WWFC specifications. label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys- hicle Limited Warranty. tem or other damage can occur if • Do not use fuel that contains the oc- Reformulated gasoline E-85 is used in vehicles that are not tane booster methylcyclopentadi- designed to run on E-85. enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Some fuel suppliers are now producing re- • Using a fuel other than that specified Using fuel containing MMT may ad- formulated gasolines. These gasolines are could adversely affect the emission versely affect vehicle performance specially designed to reduce vehicle emis- control system, and may also affect and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards the warranty coverage. dispensers are labeled to indicate cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available. • Under no circumstances should a MMT content, so you may have to leaded gasoline be used, because consult your gasoline retailer for this will damage the three-way more details. Note that Federal and Gasoline containing oxygenates catalyst. California laws prohibit the use of Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- MMT in reformulated gasoline. ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl • U.S. government regulations require Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with ethanol dispensing pumps to be or without advertising their presence. identified by a small, square, orange NISSAN does not recommend the use of and black label with the common ab- fuels of which the oxygenate content and breviation or the appropriate per- the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- centage for that region. not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

10-4 Technical and consumer information If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, • If a methanol blend is used, it should black label with the common abbreviation please take the following precautions as contain no more than 5% methanol or the appropriate percentage for that the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It region. performance problems and/or fuel system should also contain a suitable amount damage. of appropriate cosolvents and corro- E–85 fuel sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- • The fuel should be unleaded and have E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% lated with appropriate cosolvents and an octane rating no lower than that fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. corrosion inhibitors, such methanol recommended for unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel blends may cause fuel system damage • If an oxygenate-blend other than Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve- and/or vehicle performance problems. methanol blend is used, it should con- hicle. U.S. government regulations require At this time, sufficient data is not avail- tain no more than 10% oxygenate. fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- able to ensure that all methanol blends (MTBE may, however, be added up to tified by a small, square, orange and black are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. 15%.) label with the common abbreviation or the • E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy- If any driveability problems such as engine appropriate percentage for that region. genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe- the emission control devices and sys- rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, Fuel containing MMT immediately change to a non-oxygenate tems of the vehicle and should not be MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. used. Damage caused by such fuel is nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad- not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Take care not to spill gasoline during re- ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the Limited Warranty. fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may can cause paint damage. adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note E–15 fuel that while some fuel pumps label MMT E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% content, not all do, so you may have to fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. consult your gasoline retailer for more E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed details. to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and Technical and consumer information 10-5 Aftermarket fuel additives Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, NISSAN does not recommend the use of which may cause excessive fuel consump- any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex- tion or engine damage. If any of the above ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane symptoms are encountered, have your ve- booster, intake valve deposit removers, hicle checked. It is recommended that you etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active sol- However, now and then you may notice vents or similar ingredients that can be light spark knock for a short time while harmful to the fuel system and engine. accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the Octane rating tips greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy Using unleaded gasoline with an octane engine load. rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

10-6 Technical and consumer information Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil LTI2051 viscosity based on the temperatures at ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER Select only engine oils that meet the which the vehicle will be operated before RECOMMENDATIONS American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos- cation or International Lubricant Standard- ity other than that recommended could Selecting the correct oil ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) cause serious engine damage. certification and SAE viscosity standard. It is essential to choose the correct grade, These oils have the API certification mark Selecting the correct oil filter quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure on the front of the container. Oils which do Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a satisfactory engine life and performance. not have the specified quality label should high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When For additional information, see “Recom- not be used as they could cause engine replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” damage. its equivalent for the reason described in (P.10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an “Change intervals.” energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Technical and consumer information 10-7 Change intervals AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner The oil and oil filter change intervals for REFRIGERANT AND OIL system. your engine are based on the use of the RECOMMENDATIONS specified quality oils and filters. Using en- The air conditioner system in your gine oil and filters that are not of the speci- NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and and filter change intervals could reduce NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or the engine life. Damage to the engine caused exact equivalents. by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is CAUTION not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The use of any other refrigerant or oil Your engine was filled with a high-quality may cause severe damage to the air engine oil when it was built.You do not have conditioning system and will require to change the oil before the first recom- the replacement of all air conditioner mended change interval. Oil and filter system components. change intervals depend upon how you The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in use your vehicle. your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the Operation under the following conditions earth's ozone layer. Although this refriger- may require more frequent oil and filter ant does not affect the earth's atmo- changes: sphere, certain government regulations re- • repeated short distance driving at cold quire the recovery and recycling of any outside temperatures refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has • driving in dusty conditions the trained technicians and equipment • extensive idling needed to recover and recycle your air con- • stop and go commuting ditioner system refrigerant. For additional information, see “Mainte- nance and schedules” (P. 9-2).

10-8 Technical and consumer information SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE Model 2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model) Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.307 x 3.547 (84.0 x 90.1) Displacement cu in (cm 3) 121.86 (1,997) Firing order 1–3–4–2 Idle speed M/T CVT (in “N” position) No adjustment is necessary. Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO%atidle Spark plug DXE22H11C Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) Camshaft operation Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Technical and consumer information 10-9 WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm) Steel 16 x 6.5JJ 1.57 (40) Aluminum 16 x 6.5J 1.57 (40) 17 x 7J 1.89 (48) 18 x 7.5J 1.69 (43) T-type (Steel spare) 16 x 4T 1.18 (30) Tire size 205/60R16 215/50R17 215/45R18 Spare tire T125/70D16

10-10 Technical and consumer information DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Unit: in (mm) Overall length 182.7 (4,640) Overall width 71.5 (1,816) Overall height USA S, SV 16 inch wheel 56.9 (1,447) SV 17 inch wheel 56.9 (1,447) SR 18 inch wheel 57.0 (1,449) Canada S, SV M/T, CVT 16 inch wheel 57.0 (1,449) SV CVT 17 inch wheel 57.0 (1,447) SR M/T, CVT 18 inch wheel 57.1 (1,450) Front Track S, SV 16 inch wheel 62.5 (1,588) SV 17 inch wheel 61.9 (1,572) SR 18 inch wheel 62.3 (1,582) Rear Track S, SV 16 inch wheel 62.4 (1,585) SV 17 inch wheel 61.8 (1,570) SR 18 inch wheel 62.2 (1,580) Wheelbase 106.6 (2,708) Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) Refer to “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. Gross axle weight rating certification label” on the Front lbs. (kg) center pillar between the lbs. (kg) driver's side front and rear Rear doors.

Technical and consumer information 10-11 WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws LTI2050 LTI2483 and regulations. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards (VIN) PLATE (chassis number) vary according to the country, state, prov- The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is lo- ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica- plate is attached as shown. This number is cated as shown. tions may differ. the identification for your vehicle and is When any vehicle is to be taken into an- used in the vehicle registration. other country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

10-12 Technical and consumer information STI0466 STI0349 LTI2536 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION EMISSION CONTROL The number is stamped on the engine as LABEL INFORMATION LABEL shown. The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle The emission control information label is Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi- attached to the underside of the hood as cation label is affixed as shown. This label shown. contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

Technical and consumer information 10-13 LTI0197 LTI2448 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire The air conditioner specification label is af- and Loading Information label. The label is fixed to the underside of the hood as located as shown. shown.

10-14 Technical and consumer information INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Symbol Name Reference Graphic

Caution ISO 7000 0434

Air Conditioning System ISO 2575 D01 (MAC)

MAC System Lubricant Type (PAG–POE)

Requires Registered Technician to Service MAC System LTI2467 To mount the front license plate, attach the Flammable Refrigerant license plate bracket to the grille assembly at the location marks (small dimples) using the two provided screws A . Air Conditioner Specification Label Symbols O NOTE: Maximum screw length to attach license plate to bracket must be 0.63 in (16 mm).

Technical and consumer information 10-15 VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING TERMS • GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - It is important to familiarize yourself maximum weight (load) limit speci- • It is extremely dangerous to with the following terms before fied for the front or rear axle. This ride in a cargo area inside a ve- loading your vehicle: information is located on the hicle. In a collision, people rid- • Curb Weight (actual weight of your F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ing in these areas are more vehicle) - vehicle weight including: • GCWR (Gross Combined Weight likely to be seriously injured or standard parts, fluids, emergency Rating) - The maximum total killed. tools and spare tire assembly. This weight rating of the vehicle, pas- • Do not allow people to ride in weight does not include passen- sengers, cargo, and trailer. any area of your vehicle that is gers and cargo. • Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, not equipped with seats and • GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb Total load capacity - maximum to- seat belts. weight plus the combined weight tal weight limit specified of the load • Be sure everyone in your ve- of passengers and cargo. (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle is in a seat and using a • GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- hicle. This is the maximum com- seat belt properly. ing) - maximum total combined bined weight of occupants and weight of the unloaded vehicle, cargo that can be loaded into the passengers, cargo, hitch, trailer vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow tongue load and any other op- a trailer, the trailer tongue weight tional equipment. This information must be included as part of the is located on the F.M.V.S.S./ cargo load. This information is lo- C.M.V.S.S. certification label. cated on the Tire and Loading In- formation label.

10-16 Technical and consumer information • Cargo capacity - permissible To get “the combined weight of oc- weight of cargo, the subtracted cupants and cargo”, add the weight weight of occupants from the load of all occupants, then add the total limit. cargo weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration. VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. For additional information, see “Mea- surement of weights” (P. 10-20). Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as “Seating Ca- pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label.

Technical and consumer information 10-17 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. LTI2335 (1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) Example Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

10-18 Technical and consumer information 5. Determine the combined weight Before driving a loaded vehicle, con- WARNING of luggage and cargo being firm that you do not exceed the loaded on the vehicle. That weight (GVWR) or the (GAWR) for your ve- • Properly secure all cargo with may not safely exceed the avail- hicle. For additional information, see ropes or straps to help prevent able cargo and luggage load ca- “Measurement of weights” (P. 10-20). it from sliding or shifting. Do pacity calculated in step 4. Also check tires for proper inflation not place cargo higher than the 6. If your vehicle will be towing a pressures. For additional informa- seatbacks. In a sudden stop or trailer, load from your trailer will be tion, see “Tire and Loading Informa- collision, unsecured cargo transferred to your vehicle. Con- tion label” (P. 8-30). could cause personal injury. • Do not load your vehicle any sult this manual to determine LOADING TIPS how this reduces the available heavier than the GVWR or the • The GVW must not exceed GVWR or cargo and luggage load capacity maximum front and rear GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./ of your vehicle. GAWRs. If you do, parts of your C.M.V.S.S. certification label. Towing a trailer with a vehicle that is vehicle can break, tire damage • Do not load the front and rear axle could occur, or it can change not intended for towing may result in to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed an accident involving injury or death. the way your vehicle handles. the GVWR. This could result in loss of con- WARNING trol and cause personal injury.

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Towing a trailer may result in an accident involving injury or death.

Technical and consumer information 10-19 TOWING A TRAILER

• Overloading not only can MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. shorten the life of your vehicle Secure loose items to prevent FLAT TOWING and the tire, but can also cause weight shifts that could affect the Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on unsafe vehicle handling and balance of your vehicle. When the ve- the ground is sometimes called flat towing. longer braking distances. This hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve- may cause a premature tire weigh the front and the rear wheels hicle, such as a motor home. failure which could result in a separately to determine axle loads. serious accident and personal Individual axle loads should not ex- CAUTION injury. Failures caused by over- ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight • Failure to follow these guidelines can loading are not covered by the Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle result in severe transmission vehicle’s warranty. loads should not exceed the Gross damage. Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These • Whenever flat towing your vehicle, ratings are given on the vehicle cer- always tow forward, never backward. tification label. If weight ratings are • Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the exceeded, move or remove items to ground. Doing so may cause serious bring all weights below the ratings. and expensive damage to the powertrain. • DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. • For emergency towing procedures see “Towing recommended by NISSAN” (P. 6-12).

10-20 Technical and consumer information UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual- conditions on specified government test Manual Transmission (if so ity Grades: All passenger car tires must surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire equipped) conform to federal safety requirements in marked C may have poor traction • Always tow with the manual transmis- addition to these grades. performance. sion in N (Neutral). Quality grades can be found where appli- • After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and cable on the tire sidewall between tread WARNING idle the engine with the transmission in N shoulder and maximum section width. For The traction grade assigned to this tire (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle example: is based on straight-ahead braking the engine after every 500 miles (805 km) Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A traction tests, and does not include ac- of towing may cause damage to internal Treadwear celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or transmission parts. peak traction characteristics. The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- Continuously Variable ing based on the wear rate of the tire when Temperature A, B and C Transmission (if so equipped) tested under controlled conditions on a The temperature grades are A (the high- specified government test course. For ex- To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu- est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one ously variable transmission, an appropriate tance to the generation of heat, and its and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the ability to dissipate heat when tested under government course as a tire graded 100. towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow controlled conditions on a specified indoor The relative performance of tires depends the dolly manufacturer's recommenda- laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- upon the actual conditions of their use, tions when using their product. perature can cause the material of the tire however, and may depart significantly from to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- the norm due to variations in driving habits, cessive temperature can lead to sudden service practices and differences in road tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a characteristics and climate. level of performance which all passenger Traction AA, A, B and C car tires must meet under the Federal Mo- tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A The traction grades, from highest to low- represent higher levels of performance on est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- the laboratory test wheel than the mini- sent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave- mum required by law. ment as measured under controlled

Technical and consumer information 10-21 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS WARRANTY

WARNING Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol- For USA lowing emission warranties: If you believe that your vehicle has a The temperature grade for this tire is For USA established for a tire that is properly defect which could cause a crash or inflated and not overloaded. Excessive 1. Emission Defects Warranty could cause injury or death, you speed, under-inflation, or excessive 2. Emissions Performance Warranty should immediately inform the Na- loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and Details of this warranty may be found with tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- possible tire failure. other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- formation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War- fying NISSAN. ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you If NHTSA receives similar complaints, may obtain a replacement by writing to: it may open an investigation, and if it • Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department finds that a safety defect exists in a P.O. Box 685003 group of vehicles, it may order a re- Franklin, TN 37068-5003 call and remedy campaign. However, For Canada NHTSA cannot become involved in Emission Control System Warranty individual problems between you, Details of this warranty may be found with your dealer, or NISSAN. other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- To contact NHTSA, you may call the formation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War- Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); may obtain a replacement by writing to: go to http://www.safercar.gov; or • Nissan Canada Inc. write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 5290 Orbitor Drive Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

10-22 Technical and consumer information 20590. You can also obtain other in- You may contact Transport Canada's To notify NISSAN of any safety con- formation about motor vehicle safety Defect Investigations and Recalls cerns please contact our Consumer from http://www.safercar.gov. Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. Information Centre toll free at You may notify NISSAN by contact- You may also report safety defects 1-800-387-0122. ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- online at: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm (Eng- lish speakers) or http://www.tc.gc.ca/ For Canada fra/securiteautomobile/menu.htm If you believe that your vehicle has a (French speakers) defect which could cause a crash or Or contact Transport Canada by could cause injury or death, you mail at: should immediately inform Trans- Transport Canada Motor Vehicle port Canada in addition to notifying Safety Investigations Laboratory NISSAN. 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z0A1 If Transport Canada receives com- Additional information concerning plaints, it may open an investigation, motor vehicle safety may be obtained and if it finds that a safety defect from Transport Canada's Road Safety exists in a group of vehicles, it may Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 request that NISSAN conduct a recall or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety campaign. However, Transport (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/ Canada cannot become involved in securiteroutiere (French speakers). individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

Technical and consumer information 10-23 READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

Due to legal requirements in some states This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data These data can help provide a better un- and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an derstanding of the circumstances in which be required to be in what is called the EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data “ready condition” for an Inspection/ crash-like situations, such as an air bag are recorded by your vehicle only if a non- Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data trivial crash situation occurs; no data are control system. that will assist in understanding how a ve- recorded by the EDR under normal driving The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” hicle's systems performed. The EDR is de- conditions and no personal data (e.g., when it is driven through certain driving signed to record data related to vehicle dy- name, gender, age, and crash location) are patterns. Usually, the ready condition can namics and safety systems for a short recorded. However, other parties, such as be obtained by ordinary usage of the period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. law enforcement, could combine the EDR vehicle. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- data with the type of personally identifying cord such data as: data routinely acquired during a crash If a powertrain system component is re- • How various systems in your vehicle were investigation. paired or the battery is disconnected, the operating; vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi- To read data recorded by an EDR, special tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the • Whether or not the driver and passenger equipment is required, and access to the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test safety belts were buckled/fastened; vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to readiness condition. Place the ignition • How far (if at all) the driver was depress- the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN switch in the ON position without starting ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator and, ment, that have the special equipment, can Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds • How fast the vehicle was traveling. read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test • Sounds are not recorded. condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not accessed with the consent of the vehicle blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi- owner or lessee or as otherwise required or tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you permitted by law. visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

10-24 Technical and consumer information OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased. For USA For current pricing and availability of Genu- ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of Genu- ine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact: 1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model year and prior, please visit the nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep- resentative will assist you.

Technical and consumer information 10-25 MEMO

10-26 Technical and consumer information 11 Index

Antifreeze ...... 5-141 Key fob ...... 8-22 A Armrests...... 1-6 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 8-22 Active Ride Control ...... 5-134 Audio system ...... 4-43 Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 Air bag (See supplemental restraint AM radio operation...... 4-49 Belt (See drive belt)...... 8-14 system) ...... 1-43 AM radio reception ...... 4-43 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ...... 5-38 Air bag system AM/FM radio ...... 4-47, 4-49 Bluetooth® audio ...... 4-58 Front (See supplemental front impact air Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-51 Bluetooth® hands-free phone bag system) ...... 1-51 Bluetooth® audio ...... 4-58 system ...... 4-65 Air bag warning labels...... 1-64 FM radio operation ...... 4-50 Bluetooth® connections...... 4-79 Air bag warning light ...... 1-65, 2-10 FM radio reception ...... 4-43 Connecting procedure...... 4-70 Air bag warning light, iPod® Player ...... 4-55 Phone indicators ...... 4-69 supplemental...... 1-65, 2-10 iPod® player operation ...... 4-55 Text messaging ...... 4-75 Air cleaner ...... 8-16 Radio ...... 4-43 Voice commands ...... 4-71 Air cleaner housing filter ...... 8-16 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Booster seats ...... 1-40 Air conditioner Port ...... 4-52 Brake Air conditioner operation . . . .4-33, 4-39 USB Connections ...... 4-53 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . .5-129 Air conditioner service...... 4-42 USB interface ...... 4-52 Brake fluid ...... 8-10 Air conditioner specification label . .10-14 Autolight switch ...... 2-51 Brake light (See stop light) ...... 8-26 Air conditioner system refrigerant Automatic Brake system...... 5-129 recommendations ...... 10-8 Automatic power window switch . . .2-68 Brake warning light ...... 2-8 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-28 Brake wear indicators ...... 2-15,8-18 recommendations ...... 10-8 Automatic door locks...... 3-6 Self-adjusting brakes...... 8-18 Heater and air conditioner Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Brake and clutch fluid ...... 8-10 controls ...... 4-31, 4-39 Pedestrian Detection ...... 2-11,5-93 Brake Assist...... 5-131 Servicing air conditioner ...... 4-42 Brake fluid ...... 8-10 Brake system ...... 5-129 Air flow charts ...... 4-34 B Alarm system (See vehicle security Brakes ...... 8-18 Break-in schedule ...... 5-125 system) ...... 2-46 Battery ...... 5-141, 8-12 Anchor point locations ...... 1-27 Brightness control Charge warning light ...... 2-9 Instrument panel ...... 2-55 Antenna ...... 4-62 Battery replacement ...... 8-22 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .....5-129 Brightness/contrast button ...... 4-7 Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-8 Control panel buttons ...... 4-3 Precautions when starting and Bulb replacement ...... 8-26 Brightness/contrast button...... 4-7 driving ...... 5-4 Controls Driving the vehicle...... 5-16 Audio controls (steering wheel) .....4-61 C Heater and air conditioner controls ...... 4-31, 4-39 E C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-13 Coolant Capacities and recommended Capacities and recommended E-call (SOS) Button ...... 2-59 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 ECO mode switch ...... 5-26 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-65 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-5 Economy - fuel ...... 5-126 Cargo Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Emergency engine shutoff ...... 5-13,6-2 (See vehicle loading information) .....10-16 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-5 Emission control information label . . . .10-13 Chassis control ...... 5-134 Corrosion protection...... 7-8 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-22 Check tire pressure ...... 2-27,2-42 Cruise control ...... 5-61 Engine Child restraints ...... 1-20,1-21,1-22,1-24 Cup holders ...... 2-65, 2-66 Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Capacities and recommended CHildren) System ...... 1-24 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 Precautions on child D Changing engine coolant ...... 8-5 restraints ...... 1-29,1-35, 1-40 Changing engine oil ...... 8-6 Top tether strap anchor point Daytime Running Light System ...... 2-54 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-6 locations ...... 1-27 Defroster switch Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Rear window and outside mirror defroster Checking engine oil level ...... 8-6 Cleaning exterior and interior ...... 7-2,7-5 switch ...... 2-49 Engine compartment check Clock set/adjustment ...... 4-5 Dimensions and weights ...... 10-11 locations ...... 8-3 Clutch Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-55 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-5 Clutch fluid ...... 8-11 Display controls (see control panel Engine cooling system...... 8-4 Cold weather driving ...... 5-141 buttons) ...... 4-3 Engine oil ...... 8-6 Console box ...... 2-64 Door locks ...... 3-4 Engine oil and oil filter Continuously Variable Transmission Drive belt ...... 8-14 recommendation ...... 10-7 (CVT) ...... 5-16 Driving Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-9 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Cold weather driving ...... 5-141 Engine oil viscosity ...... 10-7 fluid ...... 8-10 Driving with Continuously Variable Engine serial number ...... 10-13 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-16 Engine specifications ...... 10-9 Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-16 Driving with manual transmission . . .5-22 Starting the engine ...... 5-15

11-2 Engine Block Heater...... 5-143 Fuel Head restraints ...... 1-7 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-5 Capacities and recommended Headlight and turn signal switch .....2-50 Event Data recorders ...... 10-24 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 Headlight control switch ...... 2-50 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...... 5-4 Fuel economy ...... 5-126 Headlights ...... 8-24 Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2 Fuel gauge ...... 2-6 Heated seat switches ...... 2-57 Explanation of scheduled maintenance Fuel octane rating ...... 10-6 Heated seats ...... 2-57 items ...... 9-5 Fuel recommendation ...... 10-4 Heated steering wheel switch ...... 2-58 Extended storage switch ...... 2-61 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-24 Heater Eyeglass case ...... 2-64 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-23 Heater and air conditioner Fuel-filler lid ...... 3-24 controls ...... 4-31, 4-39 Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-26,2-40 Heater operation ...... 4-32, 4-40 F Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-125 Hill start assist system ...... 5-135 Fuel gauge ...... 2-6 Hood ...... 3-21 F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-13 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-23 Horn ...... 2-56 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher Fuses...... 8-19 switch) ...... 6-2 Fusible links ...... 8-20 Flat tire ...... 6-3 I Floor mat positioning aid ...... 7-6 Fluid G Ignition switch Brake fluid ...... 8-10 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-11 Capacities and recommended Gas cap ...... 3-24 Immobilizer system ...... 2-47, 5-14 fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 Gauge Important vehicle information label . . .10-13 Clutch fluid ...... 8-11 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-5 In-cabin microfilter ...... 8-16 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fuel gauge ...... 2-6 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-126 fluid ...... 8-10 Speedometer ...... 2-3 Indicator Engine coolant...... 8-4 Tachometer ...... 2-4 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery Engine oil ...... 8-6 Trip odometer ...... 2-4 discharge indicator ...... 5-13 Windshield-washer fluid...... 8-11 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . .3-28 Fog light switch ...... 2-56 Glove box ...... 2-64 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-55 Front air bag system (See supplemental Instrument panel ...... 0-6, 2-2 restraint system) ...... 1-51 Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-55 Front power seat adjustment ...... 1-4 H Intelligent Around View Monitor ...... 4-15 Front seats ...... 1-2 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ...... 5-63 Front-door pocket ...... 2-62 Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth®. .4-65 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) .....5-120 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 11-3 Intelligent Engine Brake...... 5-134 Low windshield-washer fluid warning L Intelligent Forward Collision Warning light ...... 2-26,2-41 (I-FCW) ...... 5-105 Labels Spotlights (See map light) ...... 2-72 Intelligent Key system Air conditioner specification label . . .10-14 Trunk light ...... 2-72 Key operating range ...... 3-9 C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-13 Lights ...... 8-24 Key operation ...... 3-10 Emission control information label . .10-13 Map lights ...... 2-72 Mechanical key...... 3-3 Engine serial number ...... 10-13 Lock Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-13 F.M.V.S.S. certification label...... 10-13 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-16,3-17 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-14 Door locks ...... 3-4 Warning signals ...... 3-16,3-17 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-23 Intelligent Trace Control ...... 5-134 plate ...... 10-12 Power door locks ...... 3-5, 3-6 Interior light ...... 2-71,2-72 Warning labels (for SRS)...... 1-64 Trunk lid lock opener lever ...... 3-22 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-22 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ...... 5-31 Loose fuel cap warning...... 2-26,2-40 iPod® Player ...... 4-55 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Low fuel warning light ...... 2-26,2-41 ISOFIX child restraints...... 1-24 CHildren) System ...... 1-24 Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-11 Launch bar menu...... 4-7 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light ...... 2-26,2-41 J License plate Installing the license plate...... 10-15 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) ...... 10-16 Jump starting...... 6-9, 8-13 Light Air bag warning light ...... 1-65, 2-10 Brake light (See stop light) ...... 8-26 M K Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-8 Bulb replacement ...... 8-26 Maintenance Key ...... 3-2 Charge warning light ...... 2-9 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Key fob battery replacement ...... 8-22 Exterior and Interior lights ...... 8-26 Inside the vehicle ...... 9-3 Keyless entry Fog light switch ...... 2-56 Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 With Intelligent Key system Fog lights ...... 8-25 Outside the vehicle ...... 9-3 (See Intelligent Key system) ...... 3-13 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-50 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-19 Keys Headlight control switch ...... 2-50 Under the hood and vehicle ...... 9-4 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2,3-7 Headlights...... 8-24 Maintenance requirements...... 9-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Interior light ...... 2-71,2-72 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7,9-8 keys ...... 3-3 Light bulbs ...... 8-24 Malfunction indicator light ...... 2-9 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-11 Manual front seat adjustment ...... 1-3

11-4 Map lights ...... 2-72 Engine oil and oil filter Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-11 Menu button...... 4-5 recommendation ...... 10-7 Precautions on supplemental restraint Meters and gauges...... 2-3 Engine oil viscosity ...... 10-7 system ...... 1-43 Instrument brightness control .....2-55 Outside mirror control ...... 3-29 Precautions when starting and Mirror Outside mirrors ...... 3-29 driving ...... 5-4 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-28 Overhead sunglasses holder...... 2-64 Push starting ...... 6-11 Outside mirror control ...... 3-29 Overheat Outside mirrors ...... 3-29 If your vehicle overheats ...... 6-11 Rearview...... 3-28 Owner's manual order form ...... 10-25 R Vanity mirror ...... 3-27 Owner's manual/service manual order Mirrors ...... 3-28 information ...... 10-25 Radio Moonroof ...... 2-69, 7-6 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-65 Moving Object Detection (MOD) ...... 4-26 FM/AM radio ...... 4-47 P Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test ...... 10-24 N Parking Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . .2-14, 5-86 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-127 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ...... 5-50 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 3-2,3-7 Parking brake ...... 5-24 Rear Door Alert ...... 2-25,2-40, 2-59 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-65 Rear power windows...... 2-68 indicator ...... 5-13 Power Rear seat ...... 1-6 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Power door locks ...... 3-5, 3-6 Rear Sonar System (RSS) ...... 5-136 System ...... 2-47, 5-14 Power outlet...... 2-61 Rear window and outside mirror defroster NissanConnect® Owner's Manual ...... 4-2 Powerrearwindows ...... 2-68 switch ...... 2-49 Power steering system ...... 5-128 Rearview mirror ...... 3-28 Power windows ...... 2-66 RearView Monitor...... 4-8 O Rear power windows ...... 2-68 Recommended Fluids ...... 10-2 Power outlet ...... 2-61 Recorders Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6 Power steering ...... 5-128 Event Data ...... 10-24 Oil Precautions Refrigerant recommendation ...... 10-8 Capacities and recommended Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 Registering a vehicle in another fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 Precautions on booster country ...... 10-12 Changing engine oil ...... 8-6 seats...... 1-29,1-35, 1-40 Remote Engine Start...... 3-18,5-16 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-6 Precautions on child Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-22 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-6 restraints ...... 1-29,1-35, 1-40 Engine oil ...... 8-6 11-5 Security systems Steering wheel ...... 3-26 S Vehicle security system ...... 2-46 Stop light ...... 8-26 Safety Self-adjusting brakes ...... 8-18 Storage ...... 2-62 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Service manual order form ...... 10-25 Storage tray ...... 2-63 Child seat belts .....1-22,1-29,1-35, 1-40 Servicing air conditioner...... 4-42 Sun visors...... 3-26 Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-22 Shift lock release ...... 5-20 Sunglasses case ...... 2-64 Seat adjustment Shifting Sunglasses holder ...... 2-64 Front manual seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Continuously Variable Transmission Sunroof ...... 2-69, 7-6 Front power seat adjustment...... 1-4 (CVT) ...... 5-18 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-64 Rear seat adjustment...... 1-6 Manual transmission ...... 5-23 Supplemental air bag warning Seat belt Shoulder belt height adjustment ...... 1-18 light ...... 1-65, 2-10 Child safety ...... 1-20 Siri® Eyes-Free ...... 4-62 Supplemental front impact air bag Infants and small children .....1-20,1-21 Sonar system ...... 1-51 Injured person...... 1-15 Rear system ...... 5-136 Supplemental restraint system Larger children ...... 1-21 Spark plug replacement ...... 8-15 Information and warning labels.....1-64 Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-11 Spark plugs ...... 8-15 Precautions on supplemental restraint Pregnant women ...... 1-14 Specifications ...... 10-9 system ...... 1-43 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-19 Speedometer ...... 2-3 Supplemental restraint system Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-19 Spotlights (See map light) ...... 2-72 (Supplemental air bag system) ...... 1-43 Seat belts ...... 1-11,7-7 SRS warning label ...... 1-64 Switch Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-18 Stability control ...... 5-131 Autolight switch ...... 2-51 Three-point type with retractor .....1-15 Standard maintenance ...... 9-9 Automatic power window switch . . .2-68 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-19 Starting Fog light switch ...... 2-56 Seat belt warning light ...... 1-14,2-10 Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 Seatback pockets...... 2-63 Jump starting ...... 6-9, 8-13 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-50 Seats Precautions when starting and Headlight control switch ...... 2-50 Adjustment ...... 1-2 driving ...... 5-4 Instrument brightness control .....2-55 Armrests...... 1-6 Push starting ...... 6-11 Power door lock switch...... 3-5, 3-6 Front seats ...... 1-2 Starting the engine ...... 5-15 Rear window and outside mirror defroster Heated seats ...... 2-57 Starting the engine ...... 5-15 switch ...... 2-49 Manual front seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Starting the engine (models with NISSAN Turn signal switch ...... 2-55 Rear seat ...... 1-6 Intelligent Key® system) ...... 5-15 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Steering System), engine start ...... 2-47, 5-14 Power steering system ...... 5-128 11-6 Transmission Vehicle immobilizer system .....2-47, 5-14 T Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Vehicle information display .....2-16,2-30 Tachometer ...... 2-4 fluid ...... 8-10 Vehicle loading information ...... 10-16 Temperature gauge Driving with Continuously Variable Vehicle recovery ...... 6-14 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-5 Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-16 Vehicle security system ...... 2-46 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Driving with manual transmission . . .5-22 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Im- engine start ...... 2-47, 5-14 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another mobilizer System), engine start . . .2-47, 5-14 Three-way catalyst...... 5-4 country) ...... 10-12 Vents ...... 4-30 Tilt Trip odometer ...... 2-4 Visors ...... 3-26 Telescopic steering ...... 3-26 Trunk access through the rear seat . . . .3-23 Voice Prompt Interrupt ...... 4-68 Tire Trunk lid ...... 3-22 Trunk lid lock opener lever...... 3-22 Flat tire ...... 6-3 W Spare tire ...... 6-4, 8-39 Trunk light...... 2-72 Turn signal switch...... 2-55 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-14 Warning Tire chains ...... 8-35 Air bag warning light ...... 1-65, 2-10 Tire pressure ...... 8-28 U Battery charge warning light ...... 2-9 Tire rotation...... 8-36 Brake warning light ...... 2-8 Types of tires ...... 8-34 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-21 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-9 Uniform tire quality grading...... 10-21 USB interface ...... 4-52 Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 Wheel/tire size ...... 10-10 USB/iPod® Charging Ports ...... 4-62 Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-26,2-40 Wheels and tires ...... 8-28 Low fuel warning light ...... 2-26,2-41 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light .....2-11 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-11 V Low windshield-washer fluid warning Tire Pressure Monitoring System light ...... 2-26,2-41 (TPMS)...... 5-5 Vanity mirror ...... 3-27 Seat belt warning light ...... 1-14,2-10 Towing Variable voltage control system ...... 8-14 Supplemental air bag warning 2-wheel drive models ...... 6-13 Vehicle dimensions and weights .....10-11 light...... 1-65, 2-10 4-wheel drive models ...... 6-13 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Vehicle security system ...... 2-46 Flat towing ...... 10-20 system ...... 5-131 Warning labels (for SRS)...... 1-64 Trailer towing ...... 10-20 Vehicle identification...... 10-12 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Towing a trailer ...... 10-20 Vehicle identification number (VIN) reminders ...... 2-7 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-12 (Chassis number)...... 10-12 Weights Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) ...... 5-27 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (See dimensions and weights) ...... 10-11 plate...... 10-12 11-7 Wheel/tire size ...... 10-10 Wheels and tires...... 8-28 When traveling or registering in another country ...... 10-12 Windows ...... 2-66 Locking passengers' windows .....2-67 Powerrearwindows ...... 2-68 Power windows ...... 2-66 Rear power windows ...... 2-68 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-17 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-11 Wiper Wiper blades ...... 8-17 Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-48

11-8 MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: • Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your For additional information, see “Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed (P. 10-2). tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 Index) number (Research octane number or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifi- ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: 91). cally designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and CAUTION control devices and systems of the capacities” (P. 10-2). vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel • Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door is not covered by the NISSAN New Ve- COLD TIRE PRESSURE: label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys- hicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, see “Tire and tem or other damage can occur if • Do not use fuel that contains the oc- Loading Information label” (P. 8-30). E-85 is used in vehicles that are not tane booster methylcyclopentadi- The label is typically located on the driver designed to run on E-85. enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). side center pillar or on the driver's door. For • Using a fuel other than that specified Using fuel containing MMT may ad- additional information, see “Wheels and could adversely affect the emission versely affect vehicle performance tires” (P. 8-28). control system, and may also affect and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel the warranty coverage. dispensers are labeled to indicate RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE • Under no circumstances should a MMT content, so you may have to BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: leaded gasoline be used, because consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of this will damage the three-way vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure catalyst. California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline. recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For ad- • U.S. government regulations require ditional information, see “Break-in sched- ethanol dispensing pumps to be ule” (P.5-125). Failure to follow these recom- identified by a small, square, orange mendations may result in vehicle damage and black label with the common ab- or shortened engine life. breviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Printing : May 2021 Publication No.: OM21EM 0B18U3 Printed in the U.S.A. ‘21 B18-D